syd_hix5625_30_35_r28_update5

SURPASS hiX 5622/25/30/35 R2.8

IP-DSLAM

System Description

2

System Description

Id:0900d805805e07f2

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and describes only the product defined in the introduction of this documentation. This documentation is intended for the use of Nokia Siemens Networks customers only for the purposes of the agreement under which the document is submitted, and no part of it may be used, reproduced, modified or transmitted in any form or means without the prior written permission of Nokia Siemens Networks. The documentation has been prepared to be used by professional and properly trained personnel, and the customer assumes full responsibility when using it. Nokia Siemens Networks welcomes customer comments as part of the process of continuous development and improvement of the documentation.

The information or statements given in this documentation concerning the suitability, capacity, or performance of the mentioned hardware or software products are given "as is" and all liability arising in connection with such hardware or software products shall be defined conclusively and finally in a separate agreement between Nokia Siemens Networks and the customer. However, Nokia Siemens Networks has made all reasonable efforts to ensure that the instructions contained in the document are adequate and free of material errors and omissions. Nokia Siemens Networks will, if deemed necessary by Nokia Siemens Networks, explain issues which may not be covered by the document.

Nokia Siemens Networks will correct errors in this documentation as soon as possible. IN NO EVENT WILL Nokia Siemens Networks BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS IN THIS DOCUMENTA-TION OR FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDI-RECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR ANY LOSSES, SUCH AS BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY OR DATA,THAT MAY ARISE FROM THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR THE INFORMATION IN IT.

This documentation and the product it describes are considered protected by copyrights and other intellectual property rights according to the applicable laws.

The wave logo is a trademark of Nokia Siemens Networks Oy. Nokia is a registered trademark of Nokia Corporation. Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.

Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of their respective owners, and they are mentioned for identification purposes only.

Copyright © Nokia Siemens Networks 2008-2009. All rights reserved

f Important Notice on Product Safety Elevated voltages are inevitably present at specific points in this electrical equipment. Some of the parts may also have elevated operating temperatures.

Non-observance of these conditions and the safety instructions can result in personal injury or in property damage.

Therefore, only trained and qualified personnel may install and maintain the system.

The system complies with the standard EN 60950 / IEC 60950. All equipment connected has to comply with the applicable safety standards.

The same text in German:

Wichtiger Hinweis zur Produktsicherheit

In elektrischen Anlagen stehen zwangsläufig bestimmte Teile der Geräte unter Span-nung. Einige Teile können auch eine hohe Betriebstemperatur aufweisen.

Eine Nichtbeachtung dieser Situation und der Warnungshinweise kann zu Körperverlet-zungen und Sachschäden führen.

Deshalb wird vorausgesetzt, dass nur geschultes und qualifiziertes Personal die Anlagen installiert und wartet.

Das System entspricht den Anforderungen der EN 60950 / IEC 60950. Angeschlossene Geräte müssen die zutreffenden Sicherheitsbestimmungen erfüllen.

3

System Description

Id:0900d805805e07f2

Table of ContentsThis document has 268 pages.

Change History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191.1 Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191.2 Document Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

2 Protective Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212.1 General Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212.2 Protection Against Excessive Contact Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212.3 Protection Against Escaping Laser Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222.4 Protection Against Fire in Racks or Housings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232.5 Protection Against Hot Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232.6 Components Subject to Electrostatic Discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242.7 Handling Modules (General) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242.8 Handling Optical Fiber Connectors and Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252.9 Virus Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262.10 RoHS Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262.11 Declaration of CE Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272.12 WEEE Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

3 System Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283.1 SURPASS hiX 5622/25/30/35 as Part of Carrier Ethernet Solutions. . . 303.2 System Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313.3 Slot Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373.4 Features of the hiX 5622/25/30/35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443.4.1 System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443.4.2 Functionalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463.4.3 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473.4.4 Customer Premises Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

4 Rack and Shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504.1 Rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504.2 Basic Shelf M1200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524.2.1 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524.2.2 Equipping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534.2.3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544.2.4 Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574.3 Basic Shelves M1100 and M1100 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584.3.1 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584.3.2 Equipping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594.3.3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604.3.4 Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614.4 Basic Shelves G1100 and G1100 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614.4.1 Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614.4.2 Equipping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624.4.3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

4

System Description

Id:0900d805805e07f2

4.4.4 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654.5 Basic Shelf M600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654.5.1 Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654.5.2 Equipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664.5.3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674.5.4 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684.6 Basic Shelves G600 2G and G600R 2G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684.6.1 Shelf G600 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684.6.1.1 Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684.6.1.2 Equipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694.6.1.3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704.6.1.4 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714.6.2 Shelf G600R 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714.6.2.1 Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714.6.2.2 Equipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 714.6.2.3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734.6.2.4 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734.7 Basic Shelf M400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744.7.1 Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744.7.2 Equipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744.7.3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764.7.4 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 764.8 Basic Shelves G400, G400 2G, G400R and G400R 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . 774.8.1 Shelf G400/G400 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774.8.1.1 Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 774.8.1.2 Equipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784.8.1.3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804.8.1.4 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814.8.2 Shelf G400R/G400R 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814.8.2.1 Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814.8.2.2 Equipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824.8.2.3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844.8.2.4 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 844.9 Basic Shelves G200 2G and G200S 2G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854.9.1 Shelf G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854.9.1.1 Design. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 854.9.1.2 Equipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 864.9.1.3 Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874.9.1.4 Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 874.10 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884.10.1 Shelves for ETSI Application

(M1200/M1100/M1100 2G/G1100/G1100 2G/M600/G600 2G/ G600R 2G/M400/G400/G400R/G400 2G/G400R 2G) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

4.10.2 Shelves for ANSI Application (G400/G400R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 884.10.3 Mechanics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 894.11 Splitter Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 914.12 AC/DC Converter hiX PS 48/30 (K1196) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

5

System Description

Id:0900d805805e07f2

4.12.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954.12.2 Control and Signaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 964.12.3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 974.12.4 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 994.13 Supervision and Management Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004.13.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1004.13.2 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1014.13.3 Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024.13.3.1 External Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1024.13.3.2 Internal Alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034.13.4 Control Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1054.13.5 Connector Pin Assignments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1064.13.6 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

5 Central Switch Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115.1 Central Switch Units CXU_B/CXU_B1/CXU_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1115.1.2 Interface Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1135.1.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165.2 Central Switch Units CXU_B2/C2/B3/B21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1175.2.2 Interface Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205.2.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

6 Interface Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236.1 Interface Units IU_ADSL72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236.1.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1236.1.2 Interface Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1266.1.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276.2 Interface Unit IU_ADSL48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276.2.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276.2.2 Interface Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296.2.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1296.3 Interface Units IU_VDSL24, IU_VDSL24P, IU_VDSL48P

and IU_VDSL48I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306.3.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306.3.2 Interface Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1336.3.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1356.4 Interface Units IU_SHDSL48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1366.4.2 EFM Bonding (G.Bond/G.998.2) for IU_SHDSL48 (-A2) and

IU_SHDSL48 (-A4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1376.4.3 Interface Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386.4.4 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1386.5 Interface Unit IU_10x1G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406.5.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1406.5.2 Interface Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1416.5.3 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1426.5.3.1 1-Gbps Ethernet Interface Optical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

6

System Description

Id:0900d805805e07f2

6.5.3.2 100-Mbps Ethernet Interface Optical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1436.5.3.3 Power Supply and Power Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

7 Common Interface Unit (CIUG for M400/M600) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1457.1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1457.2 CIUG-A3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

8 Power Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1478.1 PM_1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1478.2 PM_UPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1498.3 PM_1R 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1528.4 PM_UPL 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1548.5 PM_ONU 2G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1588.6 PM_R/PM_R 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

9 Fan Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1659.1 M1200 Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1669.2 M1100/G1100 Fan Unit Small. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1679.3 M1100/G1100 Fan Unit Large . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1689.4 M600 Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1699.5 M400 Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709.6 G400 Fan Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1709.7 G600 2G Fan Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1719.8 G200 2G Fan Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

10 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17410.1 Bridging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17510.1.1 Residential Bridging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17510.1.2 Cross-connect Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17610.1.3 Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17610.2 VLAN Tagging. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17710.2.1 VLAN Stacking and Double Tagging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17810.2.2 Mixing of Single-Tagged and Double-Tagged Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17910.2.3 VLAN Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17910.3 Layer 2 Switching Scenarios. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18010.3.1 Bridged Mode with Unchanged Service Tag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18010.3.2 Bridged Mode with Added Service Tag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18110.3.3 Bridged Mode with Added Port Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18110.3.4 Bridged Mode with Service-to-Port Tag Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18110.3.5 Cross-connect Mode with Added Port Tag and Service Tag . . . . . . . . 18210.3.6 Cross-connect Mode with Added Port Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18210.4 VLAN Protocol Stacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18310.5 IP over ATM (IPoA) and ARP Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18410.6 EtherType-based Tagging and Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18510.7 Mobile Backhauling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18510.8 MAC Address Translation 1:1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18710.8.1 MAC Address Translation with PPPoE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18710.8.2 MAC Address Translation with DHCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18810.9 PPPoE Intermediate Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

7

System Description

Id:0900d805805e07f2

10.10 PPPoA to PPPoE Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18810.11 DHCP Relay Agent (Option 82) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19110.12 Access Line Identification for DHCP/PPPoE/ANCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19210.13 Use of Private IP Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19210.14 Multicast and IGMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19310.14.1 Previous Release Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19310.14.2 New Multicast Functions with IGMPv3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19410.14.3 IGMP Configuration Model. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19410.14.4 IGMPv3 Source Specific Multicast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19510.14.5 IGMP Snooping on IU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19510.14.6 IGMP Proxy on CXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19610.14.7 IGMP Snooping on CXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19710.14.8 IGMP Fast Leave. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19810.14.9 IGMP Explicit Host Tracking for Fast Leave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19810.14.10 IGMPv3 User Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19910.14.11 Multicast Service Support with IPoA-to-IPoE Interworking . . . . . . . . . 19910.14.12 Modification of IGMP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19910.14.13 Access and Admission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20010.14.13.1 IGMP Access Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20010.14.13.2 Admission Control for Multicast Traffic (IPTV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20010.14.14 Static Configuration of IGMP Multicast Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20110.15 IS-IS Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20110.16 BGP Version 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20210.17 ADSL Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20310.18 VDSL2 Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20510.19 SHDSL Interface Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20710.20 Rate Adaptation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20710.21 Spectral Shaping and RFI Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20910.22 Dynamic Transmission Power Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21010.23 L2 Energy-Saving Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21110.24 Access Node Control Protocol (ANCP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21310.25 Traffic Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21410.25.1 IU_ADSL48-CNX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21610.25.2 IU_ADSL72-C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21610.25.3 IU_VDSL24/P, IU_VDSL48P, IU_SHDSL48, IU_ADSL72-C1 and

IU_ADSL72-D1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21610.25.4 Policing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21710.25.4.1 Input/Output Rate Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21710.25.4.2 Policing per DSL Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21810.25.4.3 Policing per PVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21810.25.4.4 Policing per CoS (.1p) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21810.25.4.5 Policing of ARP, IGMP and DHCP per DSL Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21810.25.5 Shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21910.25.5.1 Egress Shaping per CoS Service Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21910.25.5.2 Egress Shaping per Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22010.25.5.3 Egress Shaping per PVC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22010.25.6 Class of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

8

System Description

Id:0900d805805e07f2

10.25.7 Queuing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22110.25.8 CoS-to-DSCP Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22110.25.8.1 DSCP-to-CoS Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22210.26 Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22410.26.1 Access Control Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22410.26.2 Denial of Service (DoS) Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22410.26.3 IP Anti-Spoofing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22410.26.4 MAC Anti-Spoofing and Uplink MAC Anti-Spoofing (UMAS) . . . . . . . . 22510.27 Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22510.28 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22510.29 Link Aggregation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22610.30 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22710.31 Concentration and Cascading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22810.32 Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22910.33 CWDM Ring Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23210.34 Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23310.35 Dual-Ended Line Test (DELT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23410.36 Single-Ended Line Test (SELT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23510.37 Internal Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23810.38 Clock Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23810.39 External Clock Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23910.40 Remote Inventory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23910.41 Temperature Controlling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23910.42 Mass Software Upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24110.43 Switching between Inband Management

Channel and Outband Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24110.44 Routing between Inband Management

Channel and Outband Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24110.45 Move of Subscriber from one Port to Another. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

11 Operation and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24311.1 Management Network Environment of hiX 5622/25/30/35 . . . . . . . . . . 24311.1.1 FTP Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24411.1.2 Management Operating System ACI-E EM GX R2.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24511.1.3 Configuration via Command Line Interface (CLI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24511.1.4 Security Concept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24511.1.5 Fault Handling and Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24511.1.6 Performance Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24511.1.7 Ethernet Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24611.1.8 Integrated Line Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24611.1.9 Operating States and Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24711.2 Maintenance Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24711.2.1 Directly Branching Into the Maintenance Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24711.2.2 Maintenance Manual via Main Menu “Help” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

12 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

13 Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

9

System Description

Id:0900d805805e07f2

List of FiguresFigure 1 Power Rating Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Figure 2 High Leakage Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Figure 3 Warning Label According to IEC 60825/EN 60825 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Figure 4 Warning Label for Class 1 Laser Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Figure 5 Symbol Label for Hot Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Figure 6 Text on Label for Hot Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Figure 7 ESD Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Figure 8 Prohibition Label According to DIN 4844-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Figure 9 Network Architecture with hiX 5622/25/30/3 (Example). . . . . . . . . . . . . 31Figure 10 hiX 5635 System Architecture with M1200 (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32Figure 11 hiX 5635 System Architecture with M1100/M1100 2G (Example) . . . . . 33Figure 12 hiX 5635 Splitter Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33Figure 13 hiX5630 System Architecture with M600 (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Figure 14 hiX5630 System Architecture with G600 2G (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Figure 15 hiX5630 System Architecture with G600R 2G (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . 35Figure 16 hiX5630 8-Slot Splitter Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Figure 17 hiX5625 System Architecture with M400 (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Figure 18 hiX5625 System Architecture with G400 (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Figure 19 hiX5625 System Architecture with G400R (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Figure 20 hiX5622 System Architecture with G200 2G (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Figure 21 Rack Equipping (Example with G1100, M1100, M1200) . . . . . . . . . . . . 51Figure 22 Rack Equipping (Examples for hiX 5630 and hiX 5625) . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Figure 23 M1200 shelf equipped with IU_ADSL72 and CXU_Bs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Figure 24 M1200 Slot Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Figure 25 CIF Module Connectors on the Top of M1200. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Figure 26 M1200 Power Supply 3W3 Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Figure 27 RJ45 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Figure 28 M1100 Shelf Equipped with IU_ADSL72 (14 x) and CXU_B1s . . . . . . . 58Figure 29 M1100 Slot Allocation (Example). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Figure 30 G1100 Shelf Equipped with IU_ADSL72 (14 x) and CXU_B1s . . . . . . . 62Figure 31 G1100 Slot Allocation (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Figure 32 M600 Shelf Equipped With IU_ADSL72 (8 x) and CXU_Cs . . . . . . . . . 65Figure 33 M600 Slot Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Figure 34 M400 shelf equipped with IU_ADSL72 (4 x) and CXU_C . . . . . . . . . . . 74Figure 35 M400 Slot Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Figure 36 G400/G400 2G shelf equipped with IU_ADSL72 (4 x) and

CXU_Cs (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Figure 37 G400R/G400R 2G shelf equipped with IU_ADSL72 (4 x) and

CXU_Cs (2x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Figure 38 hiX 5622 in the subrack G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Figure 39 Splitter Application with IU_ADSL72 (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Figure 40 Splitter Unit (Example for SPT-24-4B3T-C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Figure 41 Splitter Unit (Example for SP36-4B3T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Figure 42 Splitter Shelf with 16 Splitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Figure 43 Splitter Shelf with 8 Splitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Figure 44 Splitter Shelf with 4 Splitters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

10

System Description

Id:0900d805805e07f2

Figure 45 Interfaces of the hiX PS 48/30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Figure 46 AC/DC Converter hiX PS 48/30 (with front panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Figure 47 AC/DC Converter hiX PS 48/30 (without front panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Figure 48 Address Settings for RFI Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98Figure 49 Assignment of Signal Connector RFI and Relay Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . 99Figure 50 General View SMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101Figure 51 Front View SMU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Figure 52 SMU Ethernet Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Figure 53 Rear View of SMU with Switches S10 and S11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Figure 54 SMU Connectors X12_1, X12_2, X13_1 and X13_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Figure 55 SMU RJ45 Connector X6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Figure 56 SMU 3W3 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Figure 57 Interfaces of the CXU_B/CXU_B1/CXU_C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111Figure 58 LEDs and Connectors on CXU_B/CXU_B1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114Figure 59 LEDs and Connectors on CXU_C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Figure 60 Interfaces of the CXU_B2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117Figure 61 Interfaces of the CXU_C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118Figure 62 Interfaces of the CXU_B3/CXU_B21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119Figure 63 LEDs and Connectors on CXU_B2/C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B22 . . . . . . . . . 121Figure 64 IU_ADSL72 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Figure 65 LEDs and Connectors on IU_ADSL72 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126Figure 66 LEDs and Connectors on IU_ADSL48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Figure 67 IU_VDSL24/IU_VDSL24P Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Figure 68 IU_VDSL48P/IU_VDSL48I Interfaces. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131Figure 69 LEDs and Connectors on IU_VDSL24/IU_VDSL24P . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Figure 70 LEDs and Connectors on IU_VDSL48P/IU_VDSL48I . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Figure 71 IU_SHDSL48 Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137Figure 72 LEDs and Connectors on IU_SHDSL48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Figure 73 LEDs and Connectors on IU_10x1G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142Figure 74 External Interfaces of the CIUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Figure 75 Connectors on the PM_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Figure 76 PM_1 Power Supply Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Figure 77 RJ45 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Figure 78 Power Module PM_UPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Figure 79 PM_UPL Power Supply Connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Figure 80 RJ45 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Figure 81 Connectors on the PM_1R 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Figure 82 PM_1R 2G Power Supply Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Figure 83 Power Module PM_UPL 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154Figure 84 PM_UPL 2G Power Supply Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Figure 85 RJ45 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Figure 86 Power Module PM_ONU 2G. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Figure 87 PM_ONU 2G Power Supply Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Figure 88 RJ45 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Figure 89 View to front panel of PM_R/PM_R 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Figure 90 PM_R/PM_R 2G Power Supply Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Figure 91 RJ45 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

11

System Description

Id:0900d805805e07f2

Figure 92 hiX 5635 Fan Unit (M1200) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Figure 93 Front View of Fan Unit for M1200 Shelf. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166Figure 94 hiX 5635 Fan Unit Small (M1100/G1100) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Figure 95 Front View of Fan Unit Small for M1100/G1100 Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167Figure 96 hiX 5635 Fan Unit Large (S50028-B2104-A2/-A3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Figure 97 Front View of Fan Unit Large for

M1100/G1100 Shelf (S50028-B2104-A2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Figure 98 Front View of Fan Unit Large for

M1100/G1100 Shelf (S50028-B2104-A3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168Figure 99 hiX 5630 Fan Unit (S50028-B2038-A2) for M600 Shelf. . . . . . . . . . . . 169Figure 100 hiX 5625 Fan Unit (S50028-B2036-A2) for M400 Shelf. . . . . . . . . . . . 170Figure 101 hiX 5625 Fan Unit for G400/G400R/G400 2G/G400R 2G Shelf . . . . . 171Figure 102 hiX 5630 Fan Unit for G600 2G/G600R 2G Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172Figure 103 hiX 5622 Fan Unit for G200 2G Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173Figure 104 Tagging Modes of IP-DSLAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Figure 105 Double Tagged Packet Encapsulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Figure 106 Example for VLAN Translation Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180Figure 107 Cross-connect Mode with Added Service and Port Tags . . . . . . . . . . 182Figure 108 Cross-connect Mode with Added Port Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Figure 109 VLAN Protocol Stacks for Ethernet Based Transmission (Example). . 183Figure 110 VLAN Protocol Stacks ATM Based Transmission (Example) . . . . . . . 183Figure 111 VLAN Protocol Stack Mapping of ATM Parameters (Example) . . . . . . 184Figure 112 RFC 2684 Routed Encapsulation Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Figure 113 TDM Based Mobile Backhauling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Figure 114 ATM Based Mobile Backhauling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Figure 115 PPPoE Scenario . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188Figure 116 End-to-end Protocol Processing for PPPoA Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Figure 117 Example Message Flow with PPPoA IWF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Figure 118 DHCP Relay Agent - Message Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Figure 119 IGMP Snooping on IU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196Figure 120 IGMP Proxy on CXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Figure 121 IGMP Snooping on CXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Figure 122 IGMP Access Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Figure 123 VDSL2 Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Figure 124 VDSL2 Bandplans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206Figure 125 Seamless Rate Adaptation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Figure 126 Spectral Shaping and RFI Tone Masking (Example). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Figure 127 Example of Power Back-Off. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210Figure 128 ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ Power Management Link States. . . . . . . . . . . 212Figure 129 Shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Figure 130 Traffic Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Figure 131 Ingress Bandwidth Profile per UNI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Figure 132 Ingress Bandwidth Profile for EVC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217Figure 133 Ingress Bandwidth Profile for CoS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218Figure 134 Egress Shaping per Service Class (CoS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219Figure 135 Egress Shaping per Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220Figure 136 Traffic Classification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

12

System Description

Id:0900d805805e07f2

Figure 137 Spanning Tree Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226Figure 138 Link Aggregation Control Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227Figure 139 Protection Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228Figure 140 Cascading with hiX 5635 (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229Figure 141 Cross-connection for CXU Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230Figure 142 Cabling diagram for CXU_C2 redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231Figure 143 CWDM Ring Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232Figure 144 Port Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233Figure 145 Single-Ended Line Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Figure 146 Switching between Inband Management Channel and

Outband Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241Figure 147 Management Network Environment (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243Figure 148 Outband Management Access (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

13

System Description

Id:0900d805805e07f2

List of TablesTable 1 Overview of Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Table 2 CXU Compatibility for hiX 5622/25/30/35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28Table 3 Maximum Line Capacity of hiX5635 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Table 4 Maximum Line Capacity of hiX5630 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29Table 5 Maximum Line Capacity of hiX5625 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Table 6 Maximum Line Capacity of hiX5622 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30Table 7 Slotnumbering on the M1200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37Table 8 Slotnumbering on the M1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38Table 9 Slotnumbering on the M1100 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Table 10 Slotnumbering on the G1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Table 11 Slotnumbering on the G1100 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40Table 12 Slotnumbering on the M600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Table 13 Slotnumbering on the G600 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Table 14 Slotnumbering on the G600R 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Table 15 Slotnumbering on the M400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Table 16 Slotnumbering on the G400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42Table 17 Slotnumbering on the G400R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Table 18 Slotnumbering on the G400 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Table 19 Slotnumbering on the G400R 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Table 20 Slotnumbering on the G200 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Table 21 Slotnumbering on the G200S 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Table 22 SFP Modules for CXUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48Table 23 SFP Modules and Splitters for CWDM Ring Configuration . . . . . . . . . . 48Table 24 M1200 Plug-in Unit Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53Table 25 Common Interface Field (CIF) of the M1200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54Table 26 M1200 Power Supply 3W3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55Table 27 M1200 Connector X62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Table 28 Connectors X63, X64 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Table 29 M1200 Connectors X65 and X66 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56Table 30 M1200 Connectors X67 and X68 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Table 31 M1200 Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57Table 32 M1100 Plug-in Unit Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Table 33 Power Module Connectors of M1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Table 34 M1100 Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Table 35 G1100 Plug-in Unit Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62Table 36 Power Module Connectors of G1100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64Table 37 G1100 Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Table 38 M600 Plug-in Unit Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66Table 39 External Interfaces of the CIU_G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Table 40 M600 Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Table 41 G600 2G Plug-in Unit Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Table 42 Power Module Connectors of G600 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70Table 43 G600 2G Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Table 44 G600R 2G Plug-in Unit Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Table 45 Power Module Connectors of G600R 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

14

System Description

Id:0900d805805e07f2

Table 46 G600R 2G Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Table 47 M400 Plug-in Unit Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Table 48 Interfaces of the CIU_G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Table 49 M400 Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Table 50 G400/G400 2G Plug-in Unit Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Table 51 Power Module Connectors of G400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Table 52 Power Module Connectors of G400 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Table 53 G400/G400 2G Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Table 54 G400R/G400R 2G Plug-in Unit Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Table 55 Power Module Connectors of G400R/G400R 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Table 56 G400R/G400R 2G Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Table 57 G200 Plug-in Unit Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Table 58 Power Module Connectors of G200 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Table 59 G200 Electrical Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87Table 60 ADSL Splitter Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Table 61 VDSL Splitter Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92Table 62 LED Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Table 63 SMU One Pole External Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Table 64 SMU Internal Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Table 65 Settings DIL switch S10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Table 66 Settings DIL Switch S11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Table 67 SMU Connector X5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Table 68 SMU Connector X10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Table 69 SMU Connector X11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Table 70 SMU Connectors X13_1, X13_2 and X12_2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Table 71 SMU Connector X12_1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Table 72 SMU Connector X6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Table 73 SMU Connector X4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Table 74 SMU Connector X3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Table 75 SMU Connector X1 and X2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109Table 76 CXU Operating Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115Table 77 Status LEDs on CXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Table 78 Alarm Status LEDs on CXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Table 79 CXU Operating Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Table 80 Status LEDs on CXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Table 81 Alarm Status LEDs on CXU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Table 82 IU_ADSL72 Interface Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Table 83 ADSL Annexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Table 84 IU_ADSL72 Operating Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Table 85 ADSL Annexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Table 86 IU_ADSL48 Operating Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Table 87 IU_VDSL24/IU_VDSL24P/IU_VDSL48P/IU_VDSL48I Operating

Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Table 88 IU_VDSL24/IU_VDSL24P/IU_VDSL48P/IU_VDSL48I Operating Status

LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Table 89 IU_SHDSL48 Interface Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Table 90 IU_SHDSL48 Operating Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

15

System Description

Id:0900d805805e07f2

Table 91 IU_10x1G Operating Status LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141Table 92 External CIUG Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Table 93 PM_1 Power Supply 3W3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147Table 94 PM_1 RJ45 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Table 95 PM_UPL Power Supply 3W3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Table 96 External Alarm Inputs Connector #1 on PM_UPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Table 97 External Alarm Inputs Connector #2 on PM_UPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Table 98 Potential Free Two-pin Alarm Output Connector on PM_UPL . . . . . . 151Table 99 Test Bus Connector on PM_UPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Table 100 MTA Master Connector on PM_UPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Table 101 MTA Slave Connector on PM_UPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Table 102 Relay Switching Unit Control Connector on PM_UPL . . . . . . . . . . . . 152Table 103 PM_1R 2G Power Supply 3W3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Table 104 PM_UPL 2G Power Supply 3W3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Table 105 External Alarm Inputs Connector #1 on PM_UPL 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Table 106 External Alarm Inputs Connector #2 on PM_UPL 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Table 107 Potential Free Two-pin Alarm Output Connector on PM_UPL 2G . . . 156Table 108 Test Bus Connector on PM_UPL 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Table 109 MTA Master Connector on PM_UPL 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156Table 110 MTA Slave Connector on PM_UPL 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Table 111 Relay Switching Unit Control Connector on PM_UPL 2G . . . . . . . . . . 157Table 112 PM_ONU 2G Power Supply 3W3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Table 113 External Clock Interface Connector “CLK1” on PM_ONU 2G . . . . . . . 159Table 114 External Clock Interface Connector “CLK2” on PM_ONU 2G . . . . . . . 159Table 115 Pinout “CLI” Connector on PM_ONU 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Table 116 Pinout “HEX/PWM” Connector on PM_ONU 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Table 117 Pinout “I2C” Connector on PM_ONU 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Table 118 Pinout “TAP” Connector on PM_ONU 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160Table 119 “AL IF” Connector on PM_ONU 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Table 120 Pinout “ENV.SENSOR” Connector on PM_ONU 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Table 121 Ethernet Switch “10/100bT” on PM_ONU 2G (Port 1 to 4) . . . . . . . . . 161Table 122 PM_R/PM_R 2G Power Supply 3W3 Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Table 123 External Interface for Environmental Sensors X14/A . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Table 124 External Interface for Heat Exchanger Control X14/B . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Table 125 CLI/TL1 Interface X14/C of PM_R/PM_R 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Table 126 Test Bus Connector X14/D of PM_R/PM_R 2G . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Table 127 Ethernet Ports#1 to 4, X15/A to D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Table 128 Alarm inputs#1 to 8 Connector X6 to X13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164Table 129 Fans and Dust Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165Table 130 Residential Bridging and Cross-conntect Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176Table 131 Tagging Modes of IP-DSLAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177Table 132 Rate Adaptation Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Table 133 L2 Energy-saving Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211Table 134 Overview of Unit’s Policing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Table 135 Overview of Unit’s Shaping Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Table 136 VLAN Priority Configuration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221Table 137 DSCP-to-CoS Mapping Default Configuration #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

16

System Description

Id:0900d805805e07f2

Table 138 DSCP-to-CoS Mapping Default Configuration #2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223Table 139 SFP Modules and Splitters for CWDM Ring Configuration . . . . . . . . . 233Table 140 DELT Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234Table 141 SELT Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236Table 142 Physical Layer Performance Monitoring Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246Table 143 Ethernet Statistic Counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

17

System Description Change History

Id:0900d805805e07b6

Change History5. Update (31.08.2009)

System Overview (3)

– Added: PM_ONU 2G

Rack and Shelves (4)

– Added: 4-Slot Splitter Shelf

Basic Shelves M1100 and M1100 2G (4.3)


Basic Shelves G1100 and G1100 2G (4.4)


Basic Shelves G600 2G and G600R 2G (4.6)


Basic Shelves G400, G400 2G, G400R and G400R 2G (4.8)


Basic Shelves G200 2G and G200S 2G (4.9)


Power Modules (8)


Bridging (10.1)

– Added: Introduction for Cross-connect Mode

Product Overview (12)

– Added: PM_ONU 2G and 4-Slot Splitter Shelf

4. Update (29.05.2009)

3. Update (31.03.2009)

2. Update (26.02.2009)

1. Update (10.12.2008)

Initial release (28.11.2008)

18

System Description

Id:0900d805805e07b6

Change History

19

System Description Introduction

Id:0900d8058058afbe

1 Introduction

1.1 AudienceThe system description is intended for operators and maintenance personnel, for pro-viders of digital subscriber line (DSL) services: SURPASS hiX 5622, hiX 5625, SURPASS hiX 5630 and SURPASS hiX 5635.

This manual assumes that you are familiar with the following:

• Ethernet networking technology and standards • Internet topologies and protocols • DSL technology and standards • ATM technology and standards • Usage and functions of graphical user interfaces.

1.2 Document StructureThe following information and references provide an overview of the available documen-tation and are intended to facilitate use of the operation documentation.

The following manuals are relevant to the hiX 5622/25/30/35:

• System description (SYD) • Installation manual hiX5622 (IMN G200) • Installation manual hiX5625 (IMN M400) • Installation manual hiX5625 (IMN G400) • Installation manual hiX5630 (IMN M600) • Installation manual hiX5630 (IMN G600) • Installation manual hiX5635 (IMN M1200/M1100) • Installation manual hiX5635 (IMN G1100) • Operation manual CLI (OMN CLI) • Maintenance manual (MMN) • ACI-E manuals:

– Installation manual IMN ACI-E EM GX R2.8– Administration manual ADMN ACI-E EM GX R2.8– Operator guidelines OGL ACI-E EM GX R2.8

• User manual SMU (Supervision and Management Unit)

SYDThe system description provides an overview of the structure, functions and design of the system and its components. It provides information about the management structure and gives a common product overview.

IMNThis manual describes the equipping and mounting of the hiX 5622/25/30/35 system and contains an overview of the required tools and cables.

ITMNThe installation and test manual contains all the procedures and measurements for acti-vating the installed system.

20

System Description

Id:0900d8058058afbe

Introduction

OMN CLIThe operation manual CLI is intended for those personnel involved in the configuration and supervision of the hiX 5622/25/30/35. It contains step-by-step instructions for performing the various configuration and supervision tasks by means of the command line interface (CLI).

MMNThe maintenance manual contains all information of the maintenance procedures carried out after a failure has occurred.This can be assisted by the special feature “Branch to Maintenance”, an ACI-E based online help. A guideline for using this feature is described in the MMN as well as in this system description.

ACI-E ManualsThe ACI-E manual contains all information needed for the configuration and supervision of the hiX 5622/25/30/35 by means of the ACI-E EM GX R2.8. It contains step-by-step instructions for installation (IMN ACI-E), operation (OGL ACI-E) and administration (ADMN ACI-E) of the ACI-E EM GX R2.8.

SMU User ManualThe SMU user manual describes the supervision and management unit and its inter-faces, commissioning of the NE SMU and the commissioning of the batteries, display-ing/resetting of battery data and changing deep threshold values.

Table 1 briefly describes the structure of this document.

Chapter Description

System Overview Introduces the hiX 5622/25/30/35 system and its components. It also lists the features of the system.

Rack and Shelves Describes the features of the M1100/M1100 2G/M1200/G1100/ G1100 2G shelf used in the hiX 5635, M600/G600 2G/G600R 2G shelf used in the hiX5630, M400/G400/G400R/G400 2G/G400R 2G shelf used in hiX5625,G200 2G/G200S 2G shelf used in hiX5622 system.

Central Switch Units Lists all central switch units of the hiX 5622/25/30/35 system and their features.

Interface Units Lists all interface units of the hiX 5622/25/30/35 system and their features.

CIUG Describes CIUG of the hiX 5625/30 system and its features.

Fan Units Lists all fan units of the hiX 5622/25/30/35 system and their features.

Function Describes functions of the hiX 5622/25/30/35 system, including the detailed information of the features.

Operation and Maintenance Describes the operation and management features of the hiX 5622/25/30/35 system.

Product Overview Lists all products for hiX 5622/25/30/35 with product number, dimensions and weight.

Abbreviations Lists all abbreviations and acronyms which appear in this document.

Table 1 Overview of Chapters

21

System Description Protective Measures

Id:0900d805805f1f0a

2 Protective Measures

2.1 General NotesThis Section contains requirements with regard to protection of people, equipment and environment.

All assembly, installation, operation and repair work may only be undertaken by service personnel.

In the event of any injury (e.g. burns and acid burns) being sustained, seek medical help immediately. Generally, to avoid danger, the operator is instructed to read the desig-nated manual before beginning e.g. a maintenance task.

This section includes the following topics: • General Notes • Protection Against Excessive Contact Voltage • Protection Against Escaping Laser Light • Protection Against Fire in Racks or Housings • Protection Against Hot Surfaces • Components Subject to Electrostatic Discharge • Handling Modules (General) • Handling Optical Fiber Connectors and Cables • Virus Protection • RoHS Requirements • Declaration of CE Conformity • WEEE Requirements.

2.2 Protection Against Excessive Contact VoltageWhen dealing with the power supply, observe the safety measures described in the specifications of the European Norm EN 50110, Part 1 and Part 2 (operation of electrical installations) and the valid applicable national standards as VDE 0105 (operation of high-voltage equipment) Part 1, Section 9.3 (safety measures to be carried out) at all

!Before unplugging/plugging of the DC plugs, the power supplies must be switched off. Otherwise there is a danger of electric arc hazard!

!The system can have several power supplies. Note that to switch off the power supply completely, you also have to switch off the redundant power supply. Switch off all con-cerned devices!

!Please pay attention also to the high leakage current.

A ground connection is essential before connecting the system to the telecommunica-tion network.

22

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1f0a

Protective Measures

times. Be sure to follow local national regulations regarding the handling of high-voltage equipment.

Figure 1 shows the label on the subrack with information on the subrack power supply (limits for battery voltage and load current). ** Numerical values for load current. Check the power rating label for the actual value.

g In ANSI applications only 48 V is permitted!

Figure 1 Power Rating Label

Figure 2 shows the label on the front side of the subrack with information that a high leakage current can occur if the shelf is not grounded.

Figure 2 High Leakage Current

2.3 Protection Against Escaping Laser LightIn order to avoid health risks, take care to ensure that any laser light escaping is not directed towards the eyes. Plug-in units equipped with laser light units may carry the laser symbol, but it is not required, see Figure 3. For operation in closed systems the laser light units comply with Laser class 1. Such units can be identified by an adhesive label as well as by a warning label, see Figure 4.

Figure 3 Warning Label According to IEC 60825/EN 60825

!

Never look directly into the beam, not even with optical instruments.

23


Id:0900d805805f1f0a

Figure 4 Warning Label for Class 1 Laser Equipment

2.4 Protection Against Fire in Racks or HousingsIf shelves are used in housing, the shelves must comply with the conditions for fire pro-tection housing according to DIN EN 60950-1.

To comply with fire protection standards as defined in DIN EN 60950-1, a protective plate (C42165-A320-C684) must be fitted into the floor of ETSI and 19-inch standard racks. The rack must also meet the requirements of fire-resistant housing as defined in DIN EN 60950-1.

2.5 Protection Against Hot SurfacesIf temperatures higher than 70°C can be present on components inside the transmission equipment, following labels are attached to this equipment, see Figure 5 and Figure 6.

Figure 5 Symbol Label for Hot Surfaces

Figure 6 Text on Label for Hot Surfaces

24

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1f0a

Protective Measures

2.6 Components Subject to Electrostatic Discharge

Figure 7 ESD Symbol

When packing, unpacking, touching, pulling out, or plugging in plug-in units bearing the ESD symbol, it is essential to wear a grounding bracelet. This ensures that the plug-in units are not subject to electrostatic discharge.

Under no circumstances should you touch the printed conductors or components of plug-in units. Take hold of plug-in units by the edge only.

Once removed, place the plug-in units in the conductive plastic sleeves intended for them. Keep or dispatch them in the special boxes or transport cases bearing the ESD symbol.

Treat defective plug-in units with the same degree of care as new ones in order to avoid further damage.

Plug-in units in a closed and intact housing are protected in any case.

European Norm EN 50082-1 provides information on the proper handling of compo-nents which are subject to electrostatic discharge.

2.7 Handling Modules (General)To pull out or plug in plug-in units, use the front-mounted levers.

In shelters fans are used for cooling. To indicate positions where there is a danger of being caught up in a fan, following label is attached, see Figure 8.

Figure 8 Prohibition Label According to DIN 4844-2

!

Plug-in units bearing the symbol shown in Figure 7, are equipped with components subject to electrostatic discharge (ESD). Adhere to the relevant safety provisions.

25


Id:0900d805805f1f0a

When working with modules (plug-in units, subracks and shelters) the following points should be noted: • Existing ventilation equipment must not be changed. To ensure a sufficient air circu-

lation, the flow of air must not be obstructed.

• All slide-in units can be removed or inserted with the power still applied. To remove and insert the units you should use the two locking screws fitted to the front of the unit. A type label is fixed on the handhold above the locking screw on the bottom of the board providing information on the hardware and software version of the unit.

• A label with the words “HOT AREA” is fixed to hot surfaces. This indicates severe danger of injury.

• Shelters with a front door may only be operated when this door is closed.

You should therefore remove the front door before doing the necessary work and replace it once you have finished your work.

• When inserting and removing shelves and when transporting them, take their weight into consideration.

• Cables may never be disconnected by pulling on the cable. Disconnection/connec-tion may only be undertaken by pushing in/pulling out the connector involved.

2.8 Handling Optical Fiber Connectors and CablesOptical connectors are precision-made components and must be handled accordingly. To ensure faultless functioning, the following points must be observed: • Install protective caps on unplugged optical connectors under all circumstances to

protect against physical damage and dirt. • Before making connections, use isopropyl alcohol and non-fibrous cellulose to clean

the faces of the connectors. • Avoid impact stresses when handling connectors.

Physical damage to the faces of optical connections impair transmission quality (higher attenuation).

• Avoid a bend radius less than 30 mm for fiber optic links. • Mechanical damage to the surfaces of optical connectors impairs transmission

quality by higher attenuation.– For this reason, do not expose the connectors to impact and tensile load.– Once the protective dust caps have been removed, you must check the surfaces

of the optical fiber connectors to ensure that they are clean, and clean them if necessary. For cleaning, the C42334-A380-A926 optical fiber cleaning tool or a clean, lint-free cellulose cloth or a chamois leather is suitable. Isopropyl alcohol can be used as a cleaning fluid.

!Beware of rotating parts.

!There is a danger of injury if the door is left open.

26

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1f0a

Protective Measures

2.9 Virus Protection

Even when exchanging data via a network or external data media (e.g. floppy disks) there is a possibility of infecting your system with a virus. The occurrence of a virus in your system may lead to a loss of data and breakdown of functionality.

You have to do the following: • You have to check every data medium (used data media as well as new ones) for

viruses before reading data from it. • You must ensure that an up-to-date virus scanning program is always available. This

program has to be supplied with regular updates by a certified software provider. • It is recommended that you make periodic checks for viruses in your OS. • It is recommended to integrate the virus scanning program into the start-up

sequence on the LCT.

2.10 RoHS RequirementsNokia Siemens Networks considers the protection of the environment and the preserva-tion of natural resources as a major duty and thus undertakes great efforts to design its products to be environmental friendly. Therefore, as of July 1st, 2006, all contract products of Nokia Siemens Networks

• to which the RoHS (Restriction of Hazardous Substances) directive applies to • and which are put on the market within the countries where the RoHS requirements

are transposed into national law

are in compliance with the requirements of the RoHS.

Nokia Siemens Networks reserves the right to apply the exemptions to the RoHS requirements as set out in the Annex to the RoHS directive, in particular lead in solders for network infrastructure equipment for switching, signaling, transmission as well as network management for telecommunication.

!To prevent a virus infection you may not use any software other than that is released for

the Operating System (OS based on Basis AccessIntegrator), Local Craft Terminal

LCT) and transmission system.

!The operator is responsible for protecting against viruses and for carrying out repair

procedures when the system is infected.

27


Id:0900d805805f1f0a

2.11 Declaration of CE Conformityg The CE (Conformité Européenne) Declaration of Conformity for the product is ful-

filled only if all construction and cabling is undertaken in accordance with the manual and the documentation listed therein, e.g. installation instructions, cabling lists, etc.

2.12 WEEE RequirementsNokia Siemens Networks considers the protection of the environment and the preserva-tion of natural resources as a major duty.

This includes waste recovery with a view to reducing the quantity of waste for disposal and saving natural resources, in particular by treatment, recycling and recovering energy from waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE). Therefore Nokia Siemens Networks complies with its obligations as “producer” in terms of the WEEE directive for all its products

• to which the WEEE directive applies to • and which are put on the market within the countries where the WEEE requirements

are transposed into national law,

unless any deviant allocation of such obligations have been agreed between Nokia Siemens Network’s and its contractual partners. According to WEEE-requirements since August 13, 2005 such products are marked with the symbol of a crossed out wheeled bin with bar, indicating separate collection for electrical and electronic equip-ment, as shown below.

!

Deviations from the specifications or unstipulated changes during construction, e.g. the use of cable types with lower shielding values is a violation of the CE requirements. In such cases, the conformity declaration is invalidated and the manufacturer is refused from responsibility. All liability passes immediately to those persons undertaking any unauthorized deviations.

28

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1ede

System Overview

3 System OverviewThe hiX 5622/25/30/35 is a shelf based modular Ethernet/IP-DSLAM that terminates the ATM and Ethernet traffic coming from the subscriber lines and consolidates it on one or more Fast/Gigabit Ethernet interfaces towards the Metropolitan Area. If ATM layer exists, the PVCs (Permanent Virtual Connections) of the ATM layer are terminated on the interface unit and translated to Ethernet to be transported through an Ethernet/IP environment. The multiple PVCs/VLANs are usually mapped into one or more VLANs and forwarded to the right destination with the appropriate CoS.

DSL is the ideal solution for the bottleneck of the last mile, providing voice, data, and video solutions.

The following DSL technologies are used:

– VDSL2– ADSL2+/ADSL2/ADSL– SHDSL

Its high speed interfaces are suitable for asymmetrical and symmetrical applications such as high-speed Internet access, teleworking, video conferences, virtual private net-working and streaming multimedia content and video.

The CXU is the central unit of hiX 5622/hiX 5625/hiX 5630 and hiX 5635, it plays the important role of switching the traffic, managing all components and providing the network interfaces. There are various types of central units for different shelves:

The CXU_B/CXU_B1/CXU_C contains 4 fixed electrical GE interfaces and 4 interfaces for optical GE uplinks. The CXU_B2/CXU_C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21 has 4 optical/electri-cal GE interfaces. At maximum 4 of these 8 possible uplinks can be used. The uplinks can be used as uplink towards the core network or they are used either to cascade other DSLAMs or to connect to a collocated switch. A typical configuration can be e. g.:

Product Name Shelf CXU

hiX 5635 M1200 CXU_B

hiX 5635 M1100 CXU_B1/CXU_B2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21

hiX 5635 M1100 2G CXU_B1/CXU_B2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21

hiX 5635 G1100 CXU_B1/CXU_B2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21

hiX 5635 G1100 2G CXU_B1/CXU_B2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21

hiX 5630 M600 CXU_C/CXU_C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21

hiX 5630 G600 2G CXU_C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21

hiX 5630 G600R 2G CXU_C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21

hiX 5625 M400 CXU_C/CXU_C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21

hiX 5625 G400 CXU_C/CXU_B3/CXU_B21

hiX 5625 G400R CXU_C/CXU_B3/CXU_B21

hiX 5625 G400 2G CXU_C/CXU_B3/CXU_B21

hiX 5625 G400R 2G CXU_C/CXU_B3/CXU_B21

hiX 5622 G200 2G CXU_B3/CXU_B21

hiX 5622 G200S 2G CXU_B3/CXU_B21

Table 2 CXU Compatibility for hiX 5622/25/30/35

29

System Description System Overview

Id:0900d805805f1ede

2 optical GB uplinks and 2 electrical GB links towards a cascaded/collocated DSLAM/switch. In order to be able to use the optical uplinks separate pluggable modules (SFPs) have to be delivered for these slots.

The maximum line capacity of hiX 5622/25/30/35 is dependent on the equipment configuration, Table 3 lists the maximum line capacity of hiX 5635:

Table 4 lists the maximum line capacity of hiX 5630:

Shelf CXU Plug-in Units Maximum Line Capacity

M1200

One CXU_B

24 port VDSL 24 x 16 = 384

48 port VDSL 48 x 16 = 768

48 port ADSL 48 x 16 = 768

72 port ADSL 72 x 16 = 1152

48 port SHDSL 48 x 16 = 768

Two CXU_Bs

24 port VDSL 24 x 15 = 360

48 port VDSL 48 x 15 = 720

48 port ADSL 48 x 15 = 720

72 port ADSL 72 x 15 = 1080

48 port SHDSL 48 x 15 = 720

M1100/M1100 2G One CXU

24 port VDSL 24 x 15 = 360

48 port VDSL 48 x 15 = 720

72 port ADSL 72 x 15 = 1080

48 port SHDSL 48 x 15 = 720

G1100/G1100 2G One CXU

24 port VDSL 24 x 14 = 336

48 port VDSL 48 x 14 = 672

72 port ADSL 72 x 14 = 1008

48 port SHDSL 48 x 14 = 672

M1100/M1100 2G/G1100/ G1100 2G Two CXUs

24 port VDSL 24 x 14 = 336

48 port VDSL 48 x 14 = 672

72 port ADSL 72 x 14 = 1008

48 port SHDSL 48 x 14 = 672

Table 3 Maximum Line Capacity of hiX5635


M600/G600 2G/G600R 2G One/Two CXUs

24 port VDSL 24 x 8 = 192

48 port VDSL 48 x 8 = 384

48 port ADSL 48 x 8 = 384

72 port ADSL 72 x 8 = 576

48 port SHDSL 48 x 8 = 384


30

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1ede

System Overview

Table 5 lists the maximum line capacity of hiX 5625

Table 6 lists the maximum line capacity of hiX 5622:

The following different network scenarios with and without subtending of network elements are possible:

• Point-to-point networks • Ring networks or meshed networks. • Meshed networks.

The network topology at the subtending interfaces can be point-to-point tree.

3.1 SURPASS hiX 5622/25/30/35 as Part of Carrier Ethernet SolutionsThe hiX 5622/25/30/35 is a network element which includes the necessary service adaptation functions to support the delivery of all types of applications over Ethernet/IP networks.

The main components of a next generation broadband network are: the DSL customer premises equipment, IP/Ethernet DSLAM, Ethernet aggregation layers multi-service


M400/G400 2G/G400R 2G

One CXU

24 port VDSL 24 x 5 = 120

48 port VDSL 48 x 5 = 240

72 port ADSL 72 x 5 = 360

48 port SHDSL 48 x 5 = 240

Two CXUs

24 port VDSL 24 x 4 = 96

48 port VDSL 48 x 4 = 192

72 port ADSL 72 x 4 = 288

48 port SHDSL 48 x 4 = 192

G400/G400R One/Two CXUs

24 port VDSL 24 x 4 = 96

48 port VDSL 48 x 4 = 192

72 port ADSL 72 x 4 = 288

48 port SHDSL 48 x 4 = 192



G200 2G/G200S 2G One CXU

24 port VDSL 24 x 2 = 48

48 port VDSL 48 x 2 = 96

48 port ADSL 48 x 2 = 96

72 port ADSL 72 x 2 = 144

48 port SHDSL 48 x 2 = 96


31


Id:0900d805805f1ede

edge routers, broadband remote access servers (BRAS) and home entertainment network (video and content delivery solution). The hiX 5622/25/30/35 is one element of this end-to-end solution; however Nokia Siemens Networks is able to provide the complete next generation broadband network and video integration solution where full interoperability is ensured.

The hiX 5622/25/30/35 DSLAM operates as a multiplexer which consolidates the traffic originating from a number of subscriber lines to a feeder interface connected to the Ethernet/IP network. The subscriber lines can be ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+/VDSL2 and SHDSL lines.

Access Integrator Ethernet (ACI-E) is the management system for all pieces of the solu-tion. It enables the operators to benefit from the whole feature set supported by the products. ACI-E EM (Element Manager) GX R2.8 supports FCAPS-functionality (fault management, configuration management, accounting management, security manage-ment and performance management). Mass provisioning tables, topological maps and wide network alarm tables are further value added services that facilitates operators daily work.

Figure 9 Network Architecture with hiX 5622/25/30/3 (Example)

ACI-E can also be integrated into any existing network management platform via SNMP or CORBA northbound interface, providing the wide feature set offered by the element manager.

3.2 System ArchitectureThe basic configurations are:

hiX 5635 with shelves:– M1100/M1100 2G – M1200– G1100/G1100 2G – 16 slot splitter shelf for ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+/VDSL2 splitter.

Voice over IP

ManagementACI-E

SURPASShiX 5622/25/30/35

SHDSL

VDSL2

CPE

BRAS

IP edgeCPE

IP

ISPs

ADSL2+

ADSL2+

ADSL2/ADSLCPE

Aggregation switch

ASPs(e.g. video)

32

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1ede

System Overview

hiX 5630 with shelves:– M600– G600 2G/G600R 2G– 8-slot splitter shelf for ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+/VDSL2 splitter.

hiX 5625 with shelves:– M400– G400/G400R/G400 2G/G400R 2G– the same splitter shelf like for hiX 5630.

hiX 5622 with shelves:– G200 2G/G200S 2G– the same splitter shelf like for hiX 5630.

1. hiX 5635 System ArchitectureThe following figure shows the architecture of the hiX 5635 shelf M1200:

Figure 10 hiX 5635 System Architecture with M1200 (Example)

The following figure shows the architecture of the hiX 5635 shelf M1100/M1100 2G:

Uplink

Gig

aBit

star

ADSL2+

CXU_BEthernetelectricalor optical

SHDSL

M1200

IU_VDSL48P/48IADSL2+1)

Interface UnitsCommon Interface Field

CXU_B

ADSL2+1)

1) IU_VDSL24, IU_VDSL24P, IU_VDSL48P and IU_VDSL48I support switchover to ADSL2+

IU_VDSL24/24P

IU_ADSL48/72

IU_SHDSL48VDSL2/

VDSL2/

!Empty slots must be equipped with blank panels.

33


Id:0900d805805f1ede

Figure 11 hiX 5635 System Architecture with M1100/M1100 2G (Example)

The general slot assignment of G1100 and G1100 2G is the same like M1100. There-fore, the G1100 and G1100 2G are not shown in a special figure here. The main purpose of G1100 and G1100 2G is the preparation for Multiservice Access Network (MSAN) applications.

The following figure shows the 16-slot splitter shelf:

Figure 12 hiX 5635 Splitter Shelf

2. hiX 5630 System ArchitectureThe following figure shows the architecture of the hiX 5630 shelf M600.

CXU_B21 Interface units

Fan Units

PM_1R

PM_UPL

Uplink

Gig

aBit

star

ADSL2+

Ethernetelectricalor optical

SHDSL

M1100/M1100 2G

IU_VDSL48P/48I

ADSL2+1)


IU_VDSL24/24P

IU_ADSL72

IU_SHDSL48 CXU_B1/CXU_B2/CXU_B21/CXU_B3

VDSL2/

ADSL2+1)VDSL2/

34

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1ede

System Overview

Figure 13 hiX5630 System Architecture with M600 (Example)

The following figure shows the architecture of the hiX 5630 shelf G600 2G.

Figure 14 hiX5630 System Architecture with G600 2G (Example)

The following figure shows the architecture of the hiX 5630 shelf G600R 2G.

CXU_C Interface Units

CIU Fan Unit

Uplink

Gig

aBit

star

ADSL2+


SHDSL

M600

IU_VDSL48P/48I

ADSL2+1)IU_VDSL24/24P

IU_ADSL48/72

IU_SHDSL48 CXU_C/CXU_C2/CXU_B21/


CXU_B3

VDSL2/

VDSL2/ADSL2+1)

CXU_B21Fan Unit

Interface Units

PM_UPL PM_1R

Uplink

Gig

aBit

star

ADSL2+


SHDSL

G600 2G

IU_VDSL48P/48I

ADSL2+1)


IU_VDSL24/24P

IU_ADSL72

IU_SHDSL48CXU_C2CXU_B21CXU_B3

VDSL2/

ADSL2+1)VDSL2/

35


Id:0900d805805f1ede

Figure 15 hiX5630 System Architecture with G600R 2G (Example)

The following figure shows the 8-slot splitter shelf:

Figure 16 hiX5630 8-Slot Splitter Shelf

3. hiX 5625 System ArchitectureThe following figure shows the architecture of the hiX 5625 shelf M400:

Figure 17 hiX5625 System Architecture with M400 (Example)

Splitter units can be used inside the M400 shelf, in separate splitter shelves or special splitters in the MDF. Note that, in case of using the splitters, maximum 4 interface units can be equipped in the M400 shelf.

The splitter shelf used for M400 is the same like for M600.

CXU_B21Fan Unit

Interface Units

PM_R

Uplink

Gig

aBit

star

ADSL2+


SHDSL

G600R 2G

IU_VDSL48P/48I

ADSL2+1)


IU_VDSL24/24P

IU_ADSL72

IU_SHDSL48CXU_C2CXU_B21CXU_B3

VDSL2/

ADSL2+1)VDSL2/

CXU_C CIU Fan Unit

Interface UnitsSplitter Units

Uplink

Gig

aBit

star

ADSL2+


SHDSL

M400

IU_VDSL48P/48I

VDSL2/ADSL2+1)


IU_VDSL24/24P

IU_ADSL72

IU_SHDSL48 CXU_CCXU_C2CXU_B21CXU_B3

VDSL2/ADSL2+1)

36

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1ede

System Overview

The following figure shows the architecture of the hiX 5625 shelf G400:

Figure 18 hiX5625 System Architecture with G400 (Example)

The general slot assignment of G400 2G is the same like G400. Therefore, the G400 2G is not shown in a special figure here.

The following figure shows the architecture of the hiX 5625 shelf G400R:

Figure 19 hiX5625 System Architecture with G400R (Example)

The general slot assignment of G400R 2G is the same like G400R. Therefore, the G400R 2G is not shown in a special figure here.

Splitter units can be used inside the G400/G400R/G400 2G/G400R 2G shelf, in separate splitter shelves or special splitters in the MDF. Note that, in case of using the splitters, maximum 3 interface units can be equipped in the G400/G400R/G400 2G/G400R 2G shelf.

The splitter shelf used for G400/G400R/G400 2G/G400R 2G is the same like for M600.

4. hiX 5622 System ArchitectureThe following figure shows the architecture of the hiX 5622 shelf G200 2G:

CXU_B21Fan Unit

Interface Units

PM_UPL PM_1R

Uplink

Gig

aBit

star

ADSL2+


SHDSL

G400

IU_VDSL48P/48I

ADSL2+1)


IU_VDSL24/24P

IU_ADSL72

IU_SHDSL48CXU_CCXU_B21CXU_B3

VDSL2/

ADSL2+1)VDSL2/

CXU_B21Fan Unit

Interface Units

PM_R

Uplink G

igaB

it st

ar

ADSL2+


SHDSL

G400R

IU_VDSL48P/48I

VDSL2/ADSL2+1)


IU_VDSL24/24P

IU_ADSL72

IU_SHDSL48CXU_CCXU_B21CXU_B3

VDSL2/ADSL2+1)

37


Id:0900d805805f1ede

Figure 20 hiX5622 System Architecture with G200 2G (Example)

The general slot assignment of G200S 2G is the same like G200 2G. Therefore, the G200S 2G is not shown in a special figure here.

Splitter units can be used in separate splitter shelves or special splitters in the MDF.

The splitter shelf used for G200 2G/G200S 2G is the same like for M600.

3.3 Slot NumberingDifferent slot numbering is used for the following purposes, see also Table 7 to Table 17: • The management operating system ACI-E uses the same slot numbering like the

label on the shelf. • The commands of the Command Line Interface (CLI commands) can use the slot

numbers S1 to S17 for IUs. “S” means that this CLI command is valid for all ports of the IU. For configuring individual ports, you can find further information for slot numbering in the “Operate CLI” manual.

• A part of the virtual MAC address (vMAC) contains the slot number 1 to 17 (depen-dent on the shelf).

• In the case of ANCP, the slots on which IUs can be plugged-in are serially numbered.

hiX 5635 - M1200:

CXU_B21Fan Unit

Interface Units

PM_UPL 2G PM_1R 2G

Uplink

Gig

aBit

star


G200 2G

ADSL2+1)


IU_VDSL24/24P/48P/48I

VDSL2/

SHDSLADSL2+/

CXU_B21/CXU_B3

IU_ADSL72/IU_SHDSL48

Label on the Shelf

Type of plug-in Unit

Slotnumber of the IU in the CLI

Slotnumber in the vMAC

Slotnumber in the case of ANCP

217 IU S17 17 16

216 IU S16 16 15

215 IU S15 15 14

214 IU S14 14 13

213 IU S13 13 12

212 IU S12 12 11

211 IU S11 11 10

210 (CXU)/IU S10 10 9

Table 7 Slotnumbering on the M1200

38

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1ede

System Overview

hiX 5635 - M1100:

209 CXU

208 IU S8 8 8

207 IU S7 7 7

206 IU S6 6 6

205 IU S5 5 5

204 IU S4 4 4

203 IU S3 3 3

202 IU S2 2 2

201 IU S1 1 1

Label on the Shelf





118 PM_UPL

117 PM_1

116 IU S16 16 15

115 IU S15 15 14

114 IU S14 14 13

113 IU S13 13 12

112 IU S12 12 11

111 IU S11 11 10

110 (CXU)/IU S10 10 9

109 CXU

108 IU S8 8 8

107 IU S7 7 7

106 IU S6 6 6

105 IU S5 5 5

104 IU S4 4 4

103 IU S3 3 3

102 IU S2 2 2

101 IU S1 1 1


Label on the Shelf





Table 7 Slotnumbering on the M1200 (Cont.)

39


Id:0900d805805f1ede

hiX 5635 - M1100 2G:

hiX 5635 - G1100:

Label on the Shelf





118 PM_UPL 2G/ PM_ONU 2G

117 PM_1R 2G

116 IU S16 16 15

115 IU S15 15 14

114 IU S14 14 13

113 IU S13 13 12

112 IU S12 12 11

111 IU S11 11 10

110 (CXU)/IU S10 10 9

109 CXU

108 IU S8 8 8

107 IU S7 7 7

106 IU S6 6 6

105 IU S5 5 5

104 IU S4 4 4

103 IU S3 3 3

102 IU S2 2 2

101 IU S1 1 1

Table 9 Slotnumbering on the M1100 2G

Label on the Shelf





118 PM_UPL

117 PM_1

116 IU S16 16 14

115 IU S15 15 13

114 IU S14 14 12

113 IU S13 13 11

112 IU S12 12 10

111 IU S11 11 9

110 (CXU)

109 CXU

108 IU S8 8 8

107 IU S7 7 7

Table 10 Slotnumbering on the G1100

40

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1ede

System Overview

hiX 5635 - G1100 2G:

106 IU S6 6 6

105 IU S5 5 5

104 IU S4 4 4

103 IU S3 3 3

102 IU S2 2 2

101 IU S1 1 1

Label on the Shelf






117 PM_1R 2G

116 IU S16 16 14

115 IU S15 15 13

114 IU S14 14 12

113 IU S13 13 11

112 IU S12 12 10

111 IU S11 11 9

110 (CXU)

109 CXU

108 IU S8 8 8

107 IU S7 7 7

106 IU S6 6 6

105 IU S5 5 5

104 IU S4 4 4

103 IU S3 3 3

102 IU S2 2 2

101 IU S1 1 1

Table 11 Slotnumbering on the G1100 2G

Label on the Shelf





Table 10 Slotnumbering on the G1100 (Cont.)

41


Id:0900d805805f1ede

hiX 5630 - M600:

hiX 5630 - G600 2G:

Label on the Shelf





211 IU S10 8 8

210 IU S9 7 7

209 IU S8 6 6

208 IU S7 5 5

207 (CXU)

206 CXU

205 IU S4 4 4

204 IU S3 3 3

203 IU S2 2 2

202 IU S1 1 1

201 CIU-G


Label on the Shelf





201 IU S1 1 1

202 IU S2 2 2

203 IU S3 3 3

204 IU S4 4 4

205 CXU

206 CXU

207 IU S7 7 5

208 IU S8 8 6

209 IU S9 9 7

210 IU S10 10 8


212 PM_1R 2G


42

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1ede

System Overview

hiX 5630 - G600R 2G:

hiX 5625 - M400:

hiX 5625 - G400:

Label on the Shelf





201 IU S1 1 1

202 IU S2 2 2

203 IU S3 3 3

204 IU S4 4 4

205 CXU

206 CXU

207 IU S7 7 5

208 IU S8 8 6

209 IU S9 9 7

210 IU S10 10 8

211 PM_R 2G

Table 14 Slotnumbering on the G600R 2G

Label on the Shelf





207 IU S6 5 5

206 IU S5 4 4

205 IU S4 3 3

204 IU S3 2 2

203 (CXU)/IU S2 1 1

202 CXU

201 CIU-G


Label on the Shelf





201 IU S1 1 1

202 IU S2 2 2

203 CXU

204 CXU

205 IU S5 5 3

206 IU S6 6 4

207 PM_UPL

208 PM_1R

Table 16 Slotnumbering on the G400

43


Id:0900d805805f1ede

hiX 5625 - G400R:

hiX 5625 - G400 2G:

hiX 5625 - G400R 2G:

Label on the Shelf





201 IU S1 1 1

202 IU S2 2 2

203 CXU

204 CXU

205 IU S5 5 3

206 IU S6 6 4

207 PM_R

Table 17 Slotnumbering on the G400R

Label on the Shelf





201 IU S1 1 1

202 IU S2 2 2

203 CXU

204 (CXU)/IU S4 4 3

205 IU S5 5 4

206 IU S6 6 5


208 PM_1R 2G


Label on the Shelf





201 IU S1 1 1

202 IU S2 2 2

203 CXU

204 (CXU)/IU S4 4 3

205 IU S5 5 4

206 IU S6 6 5

207 PM_R 2G

Table 19 Slotnumbering on the G400R 2G

44

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1ede

System Overview

hiX 5622 - G200 2G:

hiX 5622 - G200S 2G:

3.4 Features of the hiX 5622/25/30/35

3.4.1 SystemThe hiX 5635 supports the following system features:

• 48 Gbit/s switching capability (redundant 24 Gbit/s switching fabric units: CXU_B/CXU_B1/CXU_B2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21)

• Slot capacity: 1 Gbit/s • 16 interface unit slots (M1200) • 15 interface unit slots (M1100/M1100 2G) • 14 interface unit slots (G1100/G1100 2G) • Fully redundant • 4 x 100/1000 Mbit/s Ethernet uplinks (CXU_B/CXU_B1)

The CXU_B/CXU_B1 contains 4 fixed electrical GE interfaces and 4 interfaces for optical GE uplinks. A maximum of 4 of these 8 possible uplinks can be used.

• 4 x 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet uplinks (CXU_B2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21)The CXU_B2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21 contains 4 interfaces for optical GE or electrical 1000BaseT interfaces.

• All types of interface units can be plugged into any interface unit slot of the M1200/M1100/M1100 2G/G1100/G1100 2G shelf.

• Splitters in separate shelves

Label on the Shelf





201 IU S1 1 1

202 IU S2 2 2

203 CXU


205 PM_1R 2G


Label on the Shelf





201 IU S1 1 1

202 IU S2 2 2

203 CXU


205 PM_1R 2G

Table 21 Slotnumbering on the G200S 2G

45


Id:0900d805805f1ede

The hiX 5630 supports the following system features:

• 24 Gbit/s switching capacity (redundant 12 Gbit/s switching fabric units: CXU_C/CXU_C2)

• 48 Gbit/s switching capacity (redundant 24 Gbit/s switching fabric units: CXU_B3/CXU_B21)

• Slot capacity: 1 Gbit/s • 8 interface unit slots • Fully redundant • 4 x 100/1000 Mbit/s Ethernet uplinks

The CXU_C contains 4 fixed electrical GE interfaces and 4 interfaces for optical GE uplinks. A maximum of 4 of these 8 possible uplinks can be used.

• 4 x 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet uplinks (CXU_C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21)The CXU_C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21 contains 4 interfaces for optical GE or electrical 1000BaseT interfaces.

• All types of interface units can be plugged into any interface unit slot of the M600/G600 2G/G600R 2G shelf.

• Splitters in separate shelves


• 24 Gbit/s switching capacity (redundant 12 Gbit/s switching fabric units: CXU_C/CXU_C2)

• 48 Gbit/s switching capacity (redundant 24 Gbit/s switching fabric units: CXU_B3/CXU_B21)

• Slot capacity: 1 Gbit/s • 5 interface unit slots for M400/G400 2G/ G400R 2G, 4 interface unit slots for

G400/G400R. • 4 x 100/1000 Mbit/s Ethernet uplinks (CXU_C)

The CXU_C contains 4 fixed electrical GE interfaces and 4 interfaces for optical GE uplinks. A maximum of 4 of these 8 possible uplinks can be used.

• 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet uplinks (CXU_C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21)The CXU_C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21 contains 4 interfaces for optical GE or electrical 1000BaseT interfaces.

• All types of interface units can be plugged into any interface unit slot of the M400/G400/G400R/G400 2G/ G400R 2G shelf.

• Splitters in separate shelves • Fully redundant


• 48 Gbit/s switching capacity (switching fabric units: CXU_B3/CXU_B21) • Slot capacity: 1 Gbit/s • 2 interface unit slots for G200 2G/G200S 2G. • 1000 Mbit/s Ethernet uplinks (CXU_B3/CXU_B21)

The CXU_B3/CXU_B21 contains 4 interfaces for optical GE or electrical 1000BaseT interfaces.

• All types of interface units can be plugged into any interface unit slot of the G200 2G/G200S 2G shelf.

• Splitters in separate shelves • Fully redundant

46

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1ede

System Overview

3.4.2 FunctionalitiesThe hiX 5622/25/30/35 provides the following functionalities:

• Enhanced L2 functionalities • EtherType-based tagging and switching • IEEE 802.1Q tagged frames supporting 4-k VLANs • EtherType-based forwarding • VLAN single/double tagging • VLAN stacking (Q-in-Q) • VLAN translation • Mixing of single-tagged and double-tagged traffic • VLAN mapping acc. to port, ATM VC, IP source and destination address • Multiple ATM PVCs per line (up to 8) • Managing 16-k MAC addresses in MAC table • Any L2 mode (tagged and untagged traffic per port) • Bridged mode N :1 and cross connect mode 1:1 support • Use of private IP addresses • IS-IS Routing • BGP Version 4 • Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing (CWDM) ring configuration • Move subscriber from one port to another • Flexible tagging and MAT for IU_SHDSL • Mobile backhauling • Link aggregation acc. to 802.3ad based on MAC or IP • Spanning tree (STP, RSTP and MSTP) • Support of static IP addresses • Flow control according to 802.3x • Ethernet ring protection (ERP) • Cascading based on electrical and optical Fast and Gigabit Ethernet interfaces • Multicast capabilities (IGMP v2/v3, IGMP Proxy, Snooping, termination, filtering)

– IGMP provider modes– IGMPv3 source specific multicast– IGMPv3 user statistics– IGMP statistics– Multicast Service Support with IPoA-to-IPoE interworking– Admission control for multicast traffic (IPTV)– Support of static join– Statistic configuration of multicast channels– Enhanced user statistic

• 1-k multicast groups • IGMPv3 Explicit Host Tracking (EHT) • PPPoE support, PPPoE intermediate agent (option 105), DHCP relay agent, DHCP

simplified relay agent and filtering • MAC address translation 1:1 for PPPoE and DHCP sessions • PPPoA support • PPPoA to PPPoE conversion • PPPoA to PPPoE interworking

47


Id:0900d805805f1ede

• RFC 2684 bridged (VC/LLC encapsulation) • IPoA support acc. RFC2684 (routed or dynamic) • IPoA with ARP handling • Strict Priority queueing and WFQ/WRR scheduling

– 4 queues per port if interface unit with IU_ADSL48-CNX is used.– 8 queues per port if interface units IU_ADSL72, IU_VDSL24/48 and

IU_SHDSL-A4 are used. IU_ADSL72-C1 and IU_ADSL72-D1 provides 4 queues/port with flat scheduling IU_SHDSL-A4 provides 8 queues/port with flat scheduling

• Traffic Management– Policing per DSL port– Policing per PVC– Policing per CoS– Policing per ARP, IGMP and DHCP– Shaping per service class– Shaping per port– Shaping per PVC– VLAN CoS and IP DSCP priority setting/mapping– 8 queues per port using flat scheme

• QoS/CoS mapping acc. to ingress port, 802.1q, 802.1p, ToS/DSCP, IP SA/DA, L4 info, ATM parameters

• QoS setting via usage of predefined 802.1p values • C-VLAN 802.1p copy to S-VLAN • ANCP support • Extended line parameter set for ANCP, DHCP option 82 and PPPoE IA • Access control lists based on port, MAC, Ethertype, L4 info • Double tagging for in-band management and ANCP • MAC address limitation per port • MAC/IP anti-spoofing • Routing between in-band management channel and out-of-band interface • Switching between inband management channel and outband interface • Single/dual ended line testing (SELT/DELT) • Performance management • Broadcast storm control. • OAM (F5 loopback, VC RDI) • Clock synchronization • Alarm history • Inventory export service • Uptime counter display.

3.4.3 InterfacesThe hiX 5622/25/30/35 system provides standardized interfaces, thus facilitating rapid and trouble-free integration into the existing network infrastructures.

Network InterfacesThe CXU_B/CXU_B1/CXU_C, the switch fabric unit, contains 4 fixed electrical GE inter-faces and 4 service slots for SFP modules providing optical GE uplink. A maximum of 4 of these 8 possible uplinks can be used:

48

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1ede

System Overview

• Electrical, up to 4 x Ethernet 100/1000Base-T interfaces IEEE 802.3z compliant • Optical, up to 4 x Ethernet 1000Base-LX SMF or 1000Base-SX MMF interface IEEE

802.3z compliant, or up to 4 x Ethernet 1000Base-ZX SMF Cisco standard.

The CXU_B2/CXU_C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21, contains 4 external optical GE interfaces for SFP modules providing optical GE uplink. CXU_B2/CXU_C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21 can also have electrical GE interfaces at the uplink with appropriate SFP-modules.

The following different optical SFP modules are available and can be inserted into the dedicated slots of the CXU. Each SFP module contains one port.

SFP module Product number Description

SFP GB-550m V50017-U362-K500 SFP GB Multi Mode-550m, 850nm SFP with one optical GE multi mode (550m) interface, data rate 1.25 Gbit/s, -5/+70 °C (LC Connector) - Preferred of 550m SFP

SFP GB-550m V50017-U365-K500 SFP GB Multi Mode-550m, 850nm SFP with one optical GE multi mode (550m) interface, data rate 1.25 Gbit/s,-40/+85 °C (LC Connector) - in case of outdoor use.

SFP GB-10km V50017-U363-K500 SFP GB Mono Mode- 10 km, 1310nm SFP with one optical GE mono mode (10 km) interface, data rate 1.25 Gbit/s,-5/+70 °C (LC Connector) - Preferred of 10km SFP

SFP GB-10km V50017-U361-K500 SFP GB Mono Mode- 10 km, 1310nm SFP with one optical GE mono mode (10 km) interface, data rate 1.25 Gbit/s,-40/+85 °C (LC Connector) - in case of outdoor use.

SFP GB-20km V50017-U366-K500 SFP GB Mono Mode-20 km, 1310nm SFP with one optical GE mono mode (20 km) interface, data rate 1.25 Gbit/s,-40/+85 °C (LC Connector)

SFP GB-40km V50017-U367-K500 SFP GB Mono Mode-40 km, 1310nm SFP with one optical GE mono mode (40 km) interface, data rate 1.25 Gbit/s,-40/+85 °C (LC Connector)

SFP GB-80km V50017-U368-K500 SFP GB Mono Mode- 80 km, 1550nm SFP with one optical GE mono mode (80 km) interface, data rate 1.25 Gbit/s,-5/+70°C (LC Connector)

SFP GE-10km V50017-U461-K500 SFP GE - 10 km, 1310nm DUPLEX (10 km)

SFP GE-20km V50017-U369-K500 SFP GE - 20 km, 1550nm SFP with one optical GE (20 km) interface, data rate 1.25 Gbit/s,-5/+70°C

SFP GE-80km, outdoor V50017-U469-K500 SFP GE Mono Mode- 80 km, 1550nm SFP with one optical GE mono mode (80 km) interface, data rate 1.25 Gbit/s,-40/+85°C

Table 22 SFP Modules for CXUs

Pos. Product number of the SFP module

(CWDM Transceiver) Outdoor

Temperature range: -40 °C to +85 °C

Product number of the CWDM Splitter

Outdoor Temperature range:

-40 °C to +85 °C

Center wave-length

Clasp Color Code

1 V50017-U3447-K500 V50017-Q2247-K822 1471 nm Gray

2 V50017-U3449-K500 V50017-Q2249-K822 1491 nm Violet

Table 23 SFP Modules and Splitters for CWDM Ring Configuration

49


Id:0900d805805f1ede

Subscriber InterfacesThe following interfaces on the subscriber side are supported:

• The ports on the IU_ADSL48/IU_ADSL72 can be configured for support:– ADSL functionality (ITU-T G.992.1)– ADSL2 functionality (ITU-T G.992.3)– ADSL2+ functionality (ITU-T G.992.5)

Functional details are listed in the Sections Interface Unit IU_ADSL72 and Inter-face Unit IU_ADSL48.

• The ports on the IU_SHDSL48 can be configured for support:– SHDSL.bis– SHDSL (2-wire/4-wire) functionality (ITU-T G.991.2, 2004)

• The ports on the IU_VDSL24/24P and IU_VDSL48P can be configured per port to support:– VDSL2 functionality (ITU-T G992.3)– ADSL2+ in accordance with ITU-T G992.5.

Management InterfacesThere are the following interfaces for management:

• Console/Telnet command line interface (CLI) • Outband management via Ethernet 10/100Base-T • Inband management via the uplink interface (SNMP v2c/v3) • CPE management via subscriber ports.

3.4.4 Customer Premises EquipmentThe hiX 5622/25/30/35 supports ADSL, ADSL2, ADSL2+, SHDSL,VDSL2. That means that hiX 5622/25/30/35 is compatible with already installed CPEs which comply with the corresponding standards.

The CPEs are selected in line with the requirements of the customer and vary on project base. For further detail information about compatibility, additional documents are available.

3 V50017-U3451-K500 V50017-Q2251-K822 1511 nm Blue

4 V50017-U3453-K500 V50017-Q2253-K822 1531 nm Green

5 V50017-U3455-K500 V50017-Q2255-K822 1551 nm Yellow

6 V50017-U3457-K500 V50017-Q2257-K822 1571 nm Orange

7 V50017-U3459-K500 V50017-Q2259-K822 1591 nm Red

8 V50017-U3461-K500 V50017-Q2261-K822 1611 nm Brown






-40 °C to +85 °C

Center wave-length

Clasp Color Code

Table 23 SFP Modules and Splitters for CWDM Ring Configuration (Cont.)

50

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

4 Rack and ShelvesThe SURPASS hiX 5625/30/35 shelves M400, M600 and M1200 are designed for indoor operation only with an expanded temperature range of -25 °C to +60 °C. The expanded temperature range of G400/G400R/G400 2G/G400R 2G/G600 2G/ G600R 2G/G200 2G is from -25 °C to 70 °C. The temperature range of G200S 2G is from -25 °C to 55 °C.The expanded temperature range of M1100/ M1100 2G/G1100/G1100 2G is in dependency of the used fan tray, the range is also from -25 °C to 70 °C. The M400, M600 and G200S 2G can be used in 19’’ as well as in ETSI indoor racks and outdoor shelters.

The outdoor shelters can be installed at non-weather protected locations with environ-mental conditions according to ETSI EN 300 019-1-4: Class 4.1 (temperature range -33 °C to +40 °C with a typical increase of +15 °C by sun radiation).

There are 1.0-meter and 1.7-meter shelters for hiX ONU, the Supervision and Manage-ment Unit (SMU) realizes the management and the supervision of the infrastructure within the ONU. The SMU provides the functions of: battery management, supervision of the shelter temperature and fan management,Infrastructure alarms as well as Imple-mentation of a Ethernet hub for maintenance purposes. For detailed information about SMU, refer to Supervision and Management Unit.

An M400/M600/G200S 2G shelf and one or two splitter shelves can be installed in 19’’ as well as in ETSI racks, but the shelf needs an enhanced mounting depth. Therefore there can be any restrictions for rack doors. You can use a modified door to prevent unauthorized access, and to protect against damage.

Note the following restrictions:

• Minimum free space above the shelf: 50 mm • Minimum free space below the shelf: 25 mm • Slot size (pitch): 25 mm • Air flow direction: air inlet on the underside of the fan shelf

air outlet on the top side of the shelf

Optionally a baffle, mounted above the shelf, leads the hot air off the rack at the front or the rear side.

The shelf is a front access shelf, meaning the interface connections are located on the front of the plug-in modules. The DSL interfaces of the basic shelf connect the splitter shelves via DIN connectors. The splitter shelves are connected via DIN connectors with the main distribution frame of the PSTN exchange to enable telephone services (POTS/ISDN) to pass through the copper wire pairs, with a/b interfaces. For standard cabling, two suitable dummy-splitters can be used for every equipped IU_ADSL72 for Annex I/J or IU_SHDSL48.

Connection to the IP network uses the optical or electrical connectors directly on the CXU. A console interface for CLI access as well as an RJ-45 interface for outband management is provided on the CXU. All hiX 5625/30/35 shelves can be equipped with up to two CXUs.

4.1 RackThe following components can be installed in the rack, see Figure 21:

51

System Description Rack and Shelves

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

• One terminal and fuse panel • When both the shelf and the splitter shelves are equipped:

– One shelf with fan unit– Up to two splitter shelves (splitter shelves with 16 slots, see 4.11)

• When only the shelves are equipped without the splitter shelves: • Up to two power supply units hiX PS 48/30 (K1196) (only necessary if no external

power supply is available), see Section 4.12.The power supply units hiX PS 48/30 can only be used for ETSI racks.

Following pictures show examples for rack configuration.

Figure 21 Rack Equipping (Example with G1100, M1100, M1200)

G1100 shelf

Fan unit

G1100 shelf/

Fan unit

Fuse and Terminal Panel

Baffle

G1100 shelf

Fan unit

Terminal Panel

splitter shelf

splitter shelf M1100 shelf/

M1100 shelf/M1100 shelf/

M1200 shelf

M1200 shelffM1200 shelf

52

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

Figure 22 Rack Equipping (Examples for hiX 5630 and hiX 5625)

4.2 Basic Shelf M1200

4.2.1 Design The M1200 has 17 slots available for plug-in units. Figure 24 shows the slot assign-ments and diagram of the M1200.

Blank panels have to be used for empty slots to fulfill EMC requirements.


M600 shelf

Fuse and

M600 shelf

Variant with only Variant with Integrated

M600 shelf


splitter shelf

splitter shelf

Power supply unit

Power supply unit

Variant with ADSL2+

M400/G400 shelf

Terminal Panel

M400/G400 shelf

M400/G400 shelf

hiX PS 48/30 1)

hiX PS 48/30 1)

1) only necessary if no external power supply is available

and splitter shelvesVDSL2 splitterADSL2+/VDSL2

!There must be a space of at least 200 mm between M400 respectively M600 shelves! The space between the highest shelf and the terminal and fuse panel must also be at least 200 mm!

53


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Figure 23 M1200 shelf equipped with IU_ADSL72 and CXU_Bs

4.2.2 EquippingThe M1200 has 17 slots available for plug-in units, see Figure 24. Table 24 lists the com-patible plug-in units.

Designation Description

CXU_B 4x 1 GigE uplinks , 4 slot blank SFP, 24 Gbit/s switching capacity

IU_ADSL48 48-Port ADSL2+ interface unit (Annex A) (Conexant)

IU_ADSL72 72-port ADSL2+ interface unit (Annex A / POTS) (Infineon)72-port ADSL2+ interface unit (Annex B / ISDN) (Infineon)72-port ADSL2+ CG-D interface unit (Annex A / POTS) (Infineon)72-port ADSL2+ CG-D interface unit (Annex B / ISDN) (Infineon)72-port ADSL2+ interface unit (ADL WIN Annex I) (Infineon)72-Port ADSL2+ interface unit (Annex A) with Convergate D and Geminax-Max V2.1, optimized hybrid

IU_SHDSL48 48-Port SHDSL interface unit (Conexant)bonding, bis and wetting current support

48-Port SHDSL Service Module (Infineon)– Annex A/B: Standard Mode ANSI/ETSI for 2.3 Mbps– Annex F/G: Enhanced Mode ANSI/ETSI for 5.7 Mbps (enhanced bit rate

and power)– SHDSL.bis– Simultaneous support of 2-wire and 4-wire

Table 24 M1200 Plug-in Unit Compatibility

54

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

Figure 24 M1200 Slot Allocation

• Mounting slot 210 can be equipped with a second central switching unit CXU_B instead of an interface unit. This CXU_B is used as redundant unit (for 1+1 protec-tion). The two CXU_Bs communicate each other using controlling signals.

• A mandatory fan module on the bottom of the shelf is used to dissipate the heat gen-erated by the different boards.

4.2.3 ConnectionsThe external interfaces are located on the Common Interface Field (CIF) module on the top of M1200, see Figure 25.

Table 25 lists the common interface field of the M1200 and their location.

IU_VDSL24 24-port VDSL2/ADSL2+ interface unit

ADSL2+ profiles can be used instead of VDSL profiles for the individual ports

IU_VDSL24P 24-Port VDSL2 Service Module VDSL2/ADSL2+ over POTS




IU_VDSL48I 48-Port VDSL2 interface unit for VDSL2/ADSL2+ over ISDN


FAN-5635 Fan module


Table 24 M1200 Plug-in Unit Compatibility (Cont.)

Slot203

IU 1)

Slot204

IU 1)

Slot205

IU 1)

Slot206

IU 1)

Slot207

IU 1)

Slot208

IU 1)

Slot209

CXU_B

Slot210

CXU_B

Slot211

IU 1)

Slot212

IU 1)

Slot213

IU 1)

Slot214

IU 1)

Slot215

IU 1)

Slot216

IU 1)

Slot217

IU 1)

Slot202

IU 1)

Slot201

IU 1)

Fan unit

1) IU_ADSL48, IU_ADSL72, IU_SHDSL48, IU_VDSL24, IU_VDSL24P, IU_VDSL48P, IU_VDSL48I

orIU 1)

Connection Description

X62 to X64 Alarm input and output on the CIF

Table 25 Common Interface Field (CIF) of the M1200

55


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Figure 25 CIF Module Connectors on the Top of M1200

All plug-in units in the M1200 shelf are supplied with a voltage in the range of 40.5 V to 72 V according to ETS 300 132-2. The power is connected to the main EMC filter and over-voltage protection on the backplane via 3W3 D-Sub connectors; see Figure 25, Figure 26, Table 26 and Sections 4.2.4.

Figure 26 M1200 Power Supply 3W3 Connector

The positive pole of the power supply voltage will be used as the GND potential on the backplane. The negative pole will be distributed as MUP1 and MUP2.

RJ-45 Assignment:

X65 Metallic Test Access

X66 to X68 Metallic Test Access (MTA)

MUP1/MUP2 Power input with redundancy

Pin Mains power supplyMUP1

Mains power supplyMUP2

Signal description Electrical interface

A1 - - Not connected -

A2 M48V1 M48V2 Negative input voltage

48 to 60 V DC voltage

max. 40 A

A3 P48V1 P48V2 Return of negative input voltage

Connected to GND_S outside of the shelf on the fuse panel.

Table 26 M1200 Power Supply 3W3 Connectors


Table 25 Common Interface Field (CIF) of the M1200 (Cont.)

M1200

101 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9

ALARMIN

1...4

ALARMIN

5...8

ALARMOUT1...3

TAP MTACTRL

MASTER

MTACTRL

SLAVE

RSUCTRL

(-) (+)48/60V

max.40A

(-) (+)48/60V

max.40A

X62 X63 X64 X65 X66 X67 X68 MUP1 MUP2

A1 A2 A3

(−) (+)48V/60V

max. 40A

56

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

Figure 27 RJ45 Connector

Pin Connector A1 (X62)Alarm inputs, connector 1

1 ALARM_IN1

2 ALARM_IN2

3 ALARM_IN3

4 ALARM_IN4

5 -

6 -

7 -

8 GND

Table 27 M1200 Connector X62

Pin Connector A2 (X63)Alarm inputs, connector 2

Connector A3 (X64)Alarm outputs

1 ALARM_IN5 ALARM_OUT1_A

2 ALARM_IN6 ALARM_OUT1_B

3 ALARM_IN7 ALARM_OUT2_A

4 ALARM_IN8 ALARM_OUT2_B

5 - ALARM_OUT3_A

6 - ALARM_OUT3_B

7 - -

8 GND GND

Table 28 Connectors X63, X64

Pin Connector A4 (X65)Test access point

Connector A5 (X66)MTA control interface, master

port

1 TAP_A -

2 TAP_B -

3 - MTA_CTRL_M_TXD

4 - GND

Table 29 M1200 Connectors X65 and X66

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

57


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

4.2.4 Power SupplyThe power inputs to the shelf must be protected by circuit breakers in the terminal panel of the rack.

The power supplied to the shelf is passed first through the DC filter. For redundant power supply, the second power supply input has to be used.

Power is then supplied to the plug-in units through the backplane. The M1200 shelf has a decentralized power supply concept. DC/DC converters on the individual plug-in units convert the input power to the proper voltages. All plug-in units are hot-swappable; the power input is fuse-protected.

Table 31 lists the electrical characteristics of the M1200.

5 - GND

6 - MTA_CTRL_M_RXD

7 - -

8 - -

Pin Connector A6 (X67)MTA control interface, slave

port

Connector A7 (X68)Relay switching unit control

interface

1 - -

2 - -

3 MTA_CTRL_S_TXD RSU_CTRL_TXD

4 GND GND

5 GND GND

6 MTA_CTRL_S_RXD RSU_CTRL_RXD

7 - -

8 - -

Table 30 M1200 Connectors X67 and X68

Pin Connector A4 (X65)Test access point

Connector A5 (X66)MTA control interface, master

port

Table 29 M1200 Connectors X65 and X66 (Cont.)

Characteristic Value

Nominal power supply 48 V / 60 V DC

DC power input tolerance 40.5 V to 72 V DC

Max power consumption 1900 W

Circuit breaker 40 A

Table 31 M1200 Electrical Characteristics

58

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

4.3 Basic Shelves M1100 and M1100 2GThe system hiX 5635 can be housed in the shelf M1100. Due to the different require-ments of the IP-DSLAM application the shelf will be available in two variants, M1100 and M1100 2G.

g The name extension “2G” indicates a specific type of power connector on power modules that differs to those used for subracks through former releases of system hiX 5635. If not particularly mentioned, the following description apply for both subrack variants M1100 and M1100 2G, and the designations “M1100” and “subrack” always stands for both types.

4.3.1 Design The M1100 has 16 slots available for plug-in units. Figure 28 shows the slot assign-ments and diagram of the M1100.

Figure 28 M1100 Shelf Equipped with IU_ADSL72 (14 x) and CXU_B1s

59


Id:0900d805805f1c2e



CXU_B1 4x 1 GigE uplinks , 4 slot blank SFP, 24 Gbit/s switching capacity


CXU_B3 4x 1 GigE uplinks , 4 slot blank SFP, redundant 24 G switching fabric, external synchronization, prepared for virtual routing

CXU_B21 4x 1 GigE uplinks , 4 slot blank SFP, redundant 24 G switching fabric, external synchronization and timing over packet

IU_ADSL72 72-port ADSL2+ interface unit (Annex A / POTS) (Infineon)72-port ADSL2+ interface unit (Annex B / ISDN) (Infineon)72-port ADSL2+ CG-D interface unit (Annex A / POTS) (Infineon)72-port ADSL2+ CG-D interface unit (Annex B / ISDN) (Infineon)72-port ADSL2+ interface unit (ADL WIN Annex I/J) (Infineon)72-Port ADSL2+ Service Module (Annex A) with Convergate D and Geminax-Max V2.1, optimized hybrid

IU_SHDSL48 48-Port SHDSL Service Module (Conexant)bonding, bis and wetting current support

48-Port SHDSL Service Module (Infineon)– Annex A/B: Standard Mode ANSI/ETSI for 2,3 Mbps– Annex F/G: Enhanced Mode ANSI/ETSI for 5.7 Mbps (enhanced

bit rate + power)– SHDSL.bis– Simultaneous Support of 2-wire and 4-wire









PM_1 (not for M1100 2G) Power module, 1 DC interface

PM_UPL (not for M1100 2G) Power module, 1 DC interface, alarm inputs and outputs, MTA ports, test access point

PM_1R 2G (for M1100 2G) Power module, replaceable slide-in module, 1 DC interface

PM_UPL 2G ETSI (for M1100 2G)

Power module with user plane, 1 DC interface, alarm inputs and outputs, MTA ports, fan control, different front panel solution

PM_ONU 2G (for M1100 2G) Power module with user plane, 1 DC interface, alarm inputs, MTA ports, fan control, different front panel solution

FAN-5635 Fan module


60

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

Figure 29 M1100 Slot Allocation (Example)

For M1100 2G: PM_1R 2G must be equipped instead of PM_1 and PM_UPL 2G/PM_ONU 2G must be equipped instead of PM_UPL.

• Mounting slot 110 can be equipped with a second central switching unit CXU instead of an interface unit. This CXU is used as redundant unit (for 1+1 protection). The two CXUs communicate each other using controlling signals.


4.3.3 ConnectionsConnection to the IP network uses the optical or electrical connectors directly on the CXU. A console interface for CLI access as well as an RJ-45 interface for outband man-agement is provided on the CXU.

Power ModulesThe power modules of M1100 are PM_1 and PM_UPL, see sections 8.1 and 8.2. The power modules of M1100 2G are PM_1R 2G and PM_UPL 2G/PM_ONU 2G, see sections 8.3, 8.4 and 8.5. The following table list the power module connectors of M1100.

Slot103

IU 1)

Slot104

IU 1)

Slot105

IU 1)

Slot106

IU 1)

Slot107

IU 1)

Slot108

IU 1)

Slot109

CXU

Slot110

CXU

Slot111

IU 1)

Slot112

IU 1)

Slot113

IU 1)

Slot114

IU 1)

Slot115

IU 1)

Slot116

IU 1)

Slot117

Slot102

IU 1)

Slot101

IU 1)

Fan unit

1) IU_ADSL72, IU_SHDSL48, IU_VDSL24, IU_VDSL24P, IU_VDSL48P, IU_VDSL48I

#Bor

PM_1

Slot118

PM_U

PL#AIU 1)


External Alarm Alarm input and output on the PM_UPL/PM_UPL 2G Alarm input on the PM_ONU 2G

Test Access Point Line tests on the PM_UPL/PM_UPL 2G/PM_ONU 2G

MTA Control Metallic Test Access (MTA) on the PM_UPL/PM_UPL 2G

Power Supply Power input on the PM_1/PM_1R 2G and PM_UPL/PM_UPL 2G/PM_ONU 2G

Table 33 Power Module Connectors of M1100

61


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

4.3.4 Power SupplyThe power inputs to the shelf must be protected by circuit breakers in the terminal panel of the rack. The power supplied to the shelf is passed first through the DC filter.

For redundant power supply, the second power supply input has to be used.

The following table lists the electrical characteristics of the M1100.

4.4 Basic Shelves G1100 and G1100 2GThe system hiX 5635 can be housed in the shelf G1100. Due to the different require-ments of the IP-DSLAM application the shelf will be available in two variants, G1100 and G1100 2G.

g The name extension “2G” indicates a specific type of power connector on power modules that differs to those used for subracks through former releases of system hiX 5635. If not particularly mentioned, the following description apply for both subrack variants G1100 and G1100 2G, and the designations “G1100” and “subrack” always stands for both types.

4.4.1 Design Shelf G1100 is to be located indoor at temperature-controlled locations, e. g. telecom-munication buildings or rooms. The G1100 has 16 slots available for plug-in units. Blank panels have to be used for empty slots to fulfill EMC requirements.

The following figure shows the slot assignments and diagram of the G1100:







62

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

Figure 30 G1100 Shelf Equipped with IU_ADSL72 (14 x) and CXU_B1s

4.4.2 EquippingThe G1100 has 16 slots available for plug-in units, see Figure 31. Table 35 lists the com-patible plug-in units.





CXU_B21 4x 1 GigE uplinks , 4 slot blank SFP, redundant 24 G switching fabric, external synchronization and timing over packet

IU_ADSL72 72-port ADSL2+ interface unit (Annex A / POTS) (Infineon)72-port ADSL2+ interface unit (Annex B / ISDN) (Infineon)72-port ADSL2+ CG-D interface unit (Annex A / POTS) (Infineon)72-port ADSL2+ CG-D interface unit (Annex B / ISDN) (Infineon)72-port ADSL2+ interface unit (ADL WIN Annex I/J) (Infineon)72-Port ADSL2+ interface unit (Annex A) with Convergate D and Geminax-Max V2.1, optimized hybrid

Table 35 G1100 Plug-in Unit Compatibility

63


Id:0900d805805f1c2e


48-Port SHDSL interface unit (Infineon)– Annex A/B: standard mode ANSI/ETSI for 2,3 Mbps– Annex F/G: enhanced mode ANSI/ETSI for 5.7 Mbps (enhanced

bit rate and power)– SHDSL.bis– Simultaneous support of 2-wire and 4-wire



IU_VDSL24P 24-Port VDSL2 Service Module VDSL/ADSL2+ over POTS


IU_VDSL48P 48-Port VDSL2 Service Module VDSL/ADSL2+ over POTS




PM_1 (not for G1100 2G) Power module, 1 DC interface

PM_UPL (not for G1100 2G) Power module, 1 DC interface, alarm inputs and outputs, MTA ports, test access point

PM_1R 2G (for G1100 2G) Power module, replaceable slide-in module, 1 DC interface

PM_UPL 2G ETSI (for G1100 2G)


PM_ONU 2G (for G1100 2G) Power module with user plane, 1 DC interface, alarm inputs, MTA ports, fan control, different front panel solution

FAN-5635 Fan module


Table 35 G1100 Plug-in Unit Compatibility (Cont.)

64

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

Figure 31 G1100 Slot Allocation (Example)

For G1100 2G: PM_1R 2G must be equipped instead of PM_1 and PM_UPL 2G/PM_ONU 2G must be equipped instead of PM_UPL.

• Mounting slot 109 needs to be equipped with a central switching unit CXU. • Mounting slot 110 can be equipped with a second central switching unit CXU. This

CXU is used as redundant unit (for 1+1 protection). The two CXUs communicate each other using controlling signals.



Power ModulesThe power modules of G1100 are PM_1 and PM_UPL, see sections 8.1 and 8.2. The power modules of G1100 2G are PM_1R 2G and PM_UPL 2G/PM_ONU 2G, see sections 8.3, 8.4 and 8.5. The following table list the power module connectors of G1100.

Slot103

IU 1)

Slot104

IU 1)

Slot105

IU 1)

Slot106

IU 1)

Slot107

IU 1)

Slot108

IU 1)

Slot109

CXU

Slot110

CXU

Slot111

IU 1)

Slot112

IU 1)

Slot113

IU 1)

Slot114

IU 1)

Slot115

IU 1)

Slot116

IU 1)

Slot117

Slot102

IU 1)

Slot101

IU 1)

Fan unit

1) IU_ADSL72, IU_SHDSL48, IU_VDSL24, IU_VDSL24P, IU_VDSL48P, IU_VDSL48I

PM_1

Slot118

PM_U

PL#A #B


External Alarm Alarm input and output on the PM_UPL/PM_UPL 2G Alarm input on the PM_ONU 2G

Test Access Point Line tests on the PM_UPL/PM_UPL 2G/PM_ONU 2G

MTA Control Metallic Test Access (MTA) on the PM_UPL/PM_UPL 2G

Power Supply Power input on the PM_1/PM_1R 2G and PM_UPL/PM_UPL 2G/PM_ONU 2G

Table 36 Power Module Connectors of G1100

65


Id:0900d805805f1c2e



Table 37 lists the electrical characteristics of the G1100.


4.5.1 Design The M600 has 11 slots available for plug-in units. Figure 33 shows the slot assignments and diagram of the M600.


Figure 32 M600 Shelf Equipped With IU_ADSL72 (8 x) and CXU_Cs

The common interface unit (CIU or CIUG) of the shelf provides the following interfaces:

• Power connectors






Table 37 G1100 Electrical Characteristics

66

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

• External clock • External alarm interfaces • MTA interfaces



CXU_C 4x 1 GigE uplinks , 4 slot blank SFP, 12 Gbit/s switching capacity

CXU_C2 4x 1 GigE uplinks , 4 slot blank SFP, 12 Gbit/s switching capacity


CXU_B21 4x 1 GigE uplinks , 4 slot blank SFP, redundant 24 G switching fabric, external synchronization, timing over packet

IU_ADSL48 48-port ADSL2+ interface unit



48-Port SHDSL interface unit (Infineon)– Annex A/B: standard mode ANSI/ETSI for 2,3 Mbps– Annex F/G: enhanced mode ANSI/ETSI for 5.7 Mbps (enhanced

bit rate and power)– SHDSL.bis– Simultaneous support of 2-wire and 4-wire



IU_VDSL24P 24-Port VDSL2 interface unit for VDSL2/ADSL2+ over POTS


IU_VDSL48P 48-Port VDSL2 interface unit VDSL2/ADSL2+ over POTS




CIU_G THS CIU for hiX5625 and hiX5630 with fan control for 12V fans, optimized for T-Com

CIU_G WM CIU for hiX5625 and hiX5630 with fan control for 12V fans, world market application


67


Id:0900d805805f1c2e


• Mounting slot 206 needs to be equipped with a central switching unit CXU. • Mounting slot 207 is reserved to be equipped with a second central switching unit

CXU used as redundant unit (for 1+1 protection). The two CXUs communicate each other using controlling signals.

• The common interface unit at the bottom of the shelf contains all necessary inter-faces for power supply, alarm in- and output as well as the MTA connector.

• A mandatory fan module on the right side of the shelf is used to dissipate the heat generated by the different boards.


Table 39 lists the external interfaces of the CIU_G and their location.

CIUG-A3 CIU for hiX5625 and hiX5630 with fan control for 12V fans, reduced feature set for rural applicationsOnly one power access connector on front panel

FAN-5630-12V Fan module



IU 1)

IU 1)

IU 1)

IU 1)

IU 1)

IU 1)

IU 1)

IU 1)

CXU 2)

CXU

CIUG

Fan

Uni

t

1) IU_ADSL48, IU_ADSL72, IU_SHDSL48, IU_VDSL24, IU_VDSL24P, IU_VDSL48P, IU_VDSL48I

2) Redundant CXU

Slot210Slot209Slot208

Slot211


Slot207

Slot202

Slot203

Slot201


External Alarm Alarm input and output on the common interface unit

Metallic Test Access Metallic Test Access on the common interface unit

Table 39 External Interfaces of the CIU_G

68

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

The common interface unit (CIUG) contains two 3W3 D-Sub connectors for mains power supply (PWR_A and PWR_B) and eight RJ45 connectors for external alarms and MTA connection, see Section Common Interface Unit (CIUG for M400/M600).

All plug-in units in the M600 shelf are supplied with a voltage in the range of 40.5 V to 72 V according to ETS 300 132-2. The power is connected to the main EMC filter and overvoltage protection on the backplane via 3W3 D-Sub connectors.


The power supplied to the shelf is passed first through the DC filter. For redundant power supply, the second power supply input has to be used

Power is then supplied to the plug-in units through the backplane. The M600 shelf has a decentralized power supply concept. DC/DC converters on the individual plug-in units convert the input power to the proper voltages. All plug-in units are hot-swappable; the power input is fuse-protected.


4.6 Basic Shelves G600 2G and G600R 2GThe system hiX 5630 can be housed in the shelf G600. Due to the different requirements of the IP-DSLAM application the shelf will be available in two variants, G600 2G and G600R 2G.

4.6.1 Shelf G600 2G

4.6.1.1 DesignThe shelf G600 2G has 12 slots, 2 slots for central cards and 8 slots for IUs. Additionally, the shelf contains two special slots for the power modules PM_1R 2G and PM_UPL 2G ETSI/PM_ONU 2G. A fan unit will be equipped on the left side of the shelf in a special slot.

MTA Control Metallic Test Access (MTA) on the common interface unit

Power Supply Power input with redundancy on the common interface unit


Table 39 External Interfaces of the CIU_G (Cont.)







69


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

The G600 2G is equipped with two power modules, PM_1R 2G and PM_UPL 2G ETSI/PM_ONU 2G. The power module PM_1R 2G contains the power path for the first power supply voltage.The following main functions are performed by the PM_UPL_R 2G ETSI/PM_ONU 2G:

• Power supply interface • Fan control interface • Test bus interface (TAP) • Out-band CLI interface • Front access for alarm interfaces • LED signaling

4.6.1.2 EquippingThe G600 2G has 10 slots available for plug-in units. The following table lists the compatible plug-in units.


CXU_C2 4x 1 GigE uplinks, 4 slot blank SFP, 12 Gbit/s switching capacity

CXU_B3 4x 1 GigE uplinks, 4 slot blank SFP, redundant 24 G switching fabric, external syn-chronization, prepared for virtual routing

CXU_B21 4x 1 GigE uplinks, 4 slot blank SFP, redundant 24 G switching fabric, external syn-chronization, timing over packet



48-Port SHDSL interface unit (Infineon)– Annex A/B: interface unit ANSI/ETSI for 2,3 Mbps– Annex F/G: interface unit ANSI/ETSI for 5.7 Mbps (enhanced bit rate and

power)– SHDSL.bis– Simultaneous support of 2-wire and 4-wire









SPT-24-4B3T VDSL splitter unit, 24 ports, front access

Table 41 G600 2G Plug-in Unit Compatibility

70

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

• A mandatory fan module on the left side of the shelf is used to dissipate the heat generated by the different boards. The following figure shows the equipping:

4.6.1.3 ConnectionsConnection to the IP network uses the optical or electrical connectors directly on the CXU. A console interface for CLI access as well as an RJ-45 interface for outband management is provided on the CXU.

Power ModulesThe power modules of G600 2G are PM_1R 2G, PM_UPL 2G and PM_ONU 2G, see sections 8.3, 8.4 and 8.5. The following table list the power module connectors of G600 2G.

PM_1R 2G Power module, replaceable slide-in module, 1 DC interface

PM_UPL 2G ETSI Power module with user plane, 1 DC interface, alarm inputs and outputs, MTA ports, fan control, different front panel solution

PM_ ONU 2G Power module with user plane, 1 DC interface, alarm inputs, MTA ports, fan control, different front panel solution

FAN_G600 2G Fan unit for shelf G600 2G

FAN_G600 DF 2G Fan unit for shelf G600 2G with dust filter

Slot 213 G600 2G Fan Unit

Slot 201 IU #1

Slot 202 IU #2

Slot 203 IU #3

Slot 204 IU #4

Slot 205 CXU #A

Slot 206 CXU #B

Slot 207 IU #5

Slot 208 IU #6

Slot 209 IU #7

Slot 210 IU #8

Slot 211/212 PM_UPL 2G ETSI/PM_ONU 2G PM_1R 2G


Table 41 G600 2G Plug-in Unit Compatibility (Cont.)


External Alarm Alarm input and output on the PM_UPL 2G Alarm input on the PM_ONU 2G

Test Access Point Line tests on the PM_UPL 2G/PM_ONU 2G

MTA Control Metallic Test Access (MTA) on the PM_UPL 2G

Power Supply Power input on the PM_1R 2G and PM_UPL 2G/PM_ONU 2G

Table 42 Power Module Connectors of G600 2G

71


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

4.6.1.4 Power SupplyThe power inputs to the shelf must be protected by circuit breakers in the terminal panel of the rack.


The following table lists the electrical characteristics of the G600 2G.

4.6.2 Shelf G600R 2G

4.6.2.1 DesignThe shelf G600R 2G has 11 slots, 2 slots for the both central cards and 8 slots for the IUs. Additionally, the shelf contains a special slot for the power module PM_R 2G. A fan unit will be equipped on the left side of the shelf in a special slot.

G600R 2G shelf and the PM_R 2G is a special design for outdoor ONU applications. PM_R 2G can control Heat Exchanger and only one power supply path is used. Further-more, special alarm connectors are used.

The shelf G600R 2G contains the power module PM_R 2G.The following main functions are performed by the PM_R 2G:

• Power supply interface • Shelf fan control • Heat exchanger fan control • Test bus interface (TAP) • Ethernet switch for controlling of the MTA functionality in the RDAC • Out-band serial interface • Interface for environmental sensor • Front access for alarm input interfaces • LED signaling

4.6.2.2 EquippingThe G600R 2G has 10 slots. The following table lists the compatible plug-in units.






Table 43 G600 2G Electrical Characteristics


CXU_C2 4x 1 GigE uplinks, 4 slot blank SFP, 12 Gbit/s switching capacity

Table 44 G600R 2G Plug-in Unit Compatibility

72

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

• A mandatory fan module on the left side of the shelf is used to dissipate the heat generated by the different boards.





48-Port SHDSL interface unit (Infineon)– Annex A/B: standard mode ANSI/ETSI for 2,3 Mbps– Annex F/G: enhanced mode ANSI/ETSI for 5.7 Mbps (enhanced bit rate and






IU_VDSL48P 48 Port VDSL2 interface unit for VDSL2/ADSL2+ over POTS





PM_R 2G Power module with user plane for ONU (RDAC) application, 1 DC interface, alarm contacts, fan control, Ethernet switch

FAN_G600 2G Fan unit for shelf G600R 2G

FAN_G600 DF 2G Fan unit for shelf G600R 2G with dust filter


Table 44 G600R 2G Plug-in Unit Compatibility (Cont.)

73


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

4.6.2.3 ConnectionsConnection to the IP network uses the optical or electrical connectors directly on the CXU. A console interface for CLI access as well as an RJ-45 interface for outband man-agement is provided on the CXU.

Power ModulesThe power module of G600R 2G is PM_R 2G, see section 8.6.

4.6.2.4 Power SupplyThe power inputs to the shelf must be protected by circuit breakers in the terminal panel of the rack.The power supplied to the shelf is passed first through the DC filter. For redundant power supply, the second power supply input has to be used. The following table lists the electrical characteristics of the G600R 2G.


Slot 201 IU #1

Slot 202 IU #2

Slot 203 IU #3

Slot 204 IU #4

Slot 205 CXU #A

Slot 206 CXU #B

Slot 207 IU #5

Slot 208 IU #6

Slot 209 IU #7

Slot 210 IU #8

Slot 211 PM_R 2G


External alarm Alarm input and output on the PM_R 2G

Ethernet interfaces The PM_R 2G contains a 4port Ethernet switch to provide two Ethernet links for the controlling of the MTAS and the test head.

Test access point Line tests on the PM_R 2G

Power supply Power input on the PM_R 2G

Interface for environmental Sensor

measure the ambient humidity an external sensor can be connected to the PM_R 2G

Serial interface Serial Interface to the Dial-back Modem

Table 45 Power Module Connectors of G600R 2G





Table 46 G600R 2G Electrical Characteristics

74

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves


4.7.1 Design The M400 has 7 slots available for plug-in units. Figure 34 shows the slot assignments of the M400.

Figure 34 M400 shelf equipped with IU_ADSL72 (4 x) and CXU_C

The common interface unit (CIUG) of the shelf provides the following interfaces: • Power connectors • External clock • External alarm interfaces • MTA interfaces





Table 46 G600R 2G Electrical Characteristics (Cont.)

PWR RUN ER RADSL_72IU

LINE 1-36 LINE 37-72



PWR RUN ER R

ADSL_72IU




SURPASS hiX 5625

FAN

CXU_C LNK

ACT

LNK

ACT

CONSOLE MGMTPorts

1 2 3 4

Port1GE-opt.- Port2 Port3 Port4 Port1100/1000BT- Port2 Port3 Port4

CRIT MAJ MIN PWR RUNERR

T 3 ALM_IN ALM_OUT TAP MTA_M MTA_S MTA_C

CIU

PWR_A 30 A/24 A-48 V/-60 V

PWR_B 30 A/24 A-48 V/-60 V(-) (+) (-) (+)


CXU_C 4x 1 GigE uplinks , 4 slot blank SFP, 12 Gbit/s switching capacity

CXU_C2 4x 1 GigE uplinks , 4 slot blank SFP, 12 Gbit/s switching capacity

CXU_B3 4x 1 GigE uplinks , 4 slot blank SFP, redundant 24 G switching fabric, external syn-chronization, prepared for virtual routing


75


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

• A mandatory fan module on the right side of the shelf is used to dissipate the heat generated by the different boards.

CXU_B21 4x 1 GigE uplinks , 4 slot blank SFP, redundant 24 G switching fabric, external syn-chronization, timing over packet

IU_ADSL72 72-port ADSL2+ interface unit (Annex A) (Conexant)72-port ADSL2+ interface unit (Annex A / POTS) (Infineon)72-port ADSL2+ interface unit (Annex B / ISDN) (Infineon)72-port ADSL2+ CG-D interface unit (Annex A / POTS) (Infineon)72-port ADSL2+ CG-D interface unit (Annex B / ISDN) (Infineon)72-port ADSL2+ interface unit (ADL WIN Annex I/J) (Infineon)72-Port ADSL2+ interface unit (Annex A) with Convergate D and Geminax-Max V2.1, optimized hybrid













CIU_G THS CIU for hiX5625 and hiX5630 with fan control for 12V fans

CIU_G WM CIU for hiX5625 and hiX5630 with fan control for 12V fans, world market application

CIUG-A3 CIU for hiX5625 and hiX5630 with fan control for 12V fans, reduced feature set for rural applications, only one power access connector on front panel

FAN-5625 Fan module



76

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves



Table 48 lists the external interfaces of the M400 and their location

The common interface unit (CIU_G) contains two 3W3 D-Sub connectors for mains power supply (PWR_A and PWR_B) and eight RJ45 connectors for external alarms and MTA connection, see Section Common Interface Unit (CIU/CIUG for M400/M600).

All plug-in units in the M400 shelf are supplied with a voltage in the range of 40.5 V to 72 V according to ETS 300 132-2. The power is connected to the main EMC filter and over-voltage protection on the backplane via 3W3 Sub-D connectors.

4.7.4 Power SupplyEach M400 shelf includes two power inputs (+/-48/60 VDC#1 and +/-48/60 VDC#2). The two connectors for mains power supply are located on the CIUG (MUP1 and MUP2). The second power input on the CIUG must be used for a redundant power

IU 1)

Slot

206 IU 1)

IU 1)

IU 1)

CXU 2) / IU 1)


Slot202Slot201

CXU

CIUG

Fan

Uni

t

1) IU_ADSL72, IU_SHDSL48, IU_VDSL24, IU_VDSL24P, IU_VDSL48P, IU_VDSL48I2) Redundant CXU

Slot

207


Power supply Power input and redundant power input on common interface unit CIUG

External clock supply RJ45 connector for the T3 clock o on the common interface unit CIUG

External alarms Alarm inputs on the common interface unit CIUG

Alarm outputs on the common interface unit CIUG

Metallic Test Access Metallic Test Access on the common interface unit

MTA control Metallic Test Access (MTA) on the common interface unit CIUG

Table 48 Interfaces of the CIU_G

77


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

supply. Both power inputs are connected to the local power supply by separate fuses, located in the fuse panel outside the M400.

The supply voltage is potential free. To ensure that the EMC requirements are met, the backplane has a filter unit with the EMC filters for input voltages. An overvoltage protec-tion is located behind the EMC filter unit to minimize the voltage peaks caused by surges on the DC input.

All plug-in units are fed redundantly via separate power lines (MUP_1 and MUP_2).

Additional, each CXU_C generates a 3.3 V supply voltage for feeding the I2C devices located on the plug-in units and the backplane. This voltage is supplied redundantly.

Power is supplied to the plug-in units through the backplane. The shelf M400 has a decentralized power supply concept. DC/DC converters on the individual plug-in units convert the input power to the proper voltages. All plug-in units are hot-swappable; the power input is fuse-protected. The power inputs to the shelf must be protected by circuit breakers in the fuse panel.


4.8 Basic Shelves G400, G400 2G, G400R and G400R 2GThe system hiX 5625 can be housed in the shelf G400. Due to the different requirements of the IP-DSLAM application the shelf will be available in four variants, G400/G400 2G/G400R and G400R 2G.

g The name extension “2G” indicates a specific type of power connector on power modules that differs to those used for subracks through former releases of system hiX 5625.

4.8.1 Shelf G400/G400 2G

4.8.1.1 DesignThe shelf G400/G400 2G has 6 slots, 2 slots for central cards and 4 slots for IUs. Additionally, the shelf contains two special slots for the power modules. In the G400 2G, an additional IU can be plugged-in instead of the second central card (only possible, if on slot 203 no CXU_C is used as central card) A fan unit will be equipped on the left side of the shelf in a special slot. The fan unit FAN_G400 DF with dust filter or the fan unit FAN_G400 without dust filter can be equipped in the G400. The fan unit FAN_G400 DF 2G with dust filter or the fan unit FAN_G400 2G without dust filter can be equipped in the G400 2G.







78

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

Figure 36 G400/G400 2G shelf equipped with IU_ADSL72 (4 x) and CXU_Cs (2x)

The G400 is equipped with two power modules, PM_1R ANSI and PM_UPL ANSI (If G400 is used for ETSI application, the power modules are PM_1R ETSI and PM_UPL_R ETSI). The power module PM_1R ANSI/PM_1R ETSI contains the power path for the first power supply voltage. The G400 2G is equipped with two power modules, PM_1R 2G and PM_UPL 2G ETSI/PM_ONU 2G. The power module PM_1R 2G contains the power path for the first power supply voltage.

The following main functions are performed by the PM_UPL ANSI/PM_UPL_R ETSI/ PM_UPL 2G ETSI/PM_ONU 2G: • Power supply interface • Fan control interface • Test bus interface (TAP) • External synchronization by redundant BITS interfaces (only for ANSI application) • Out-band TL1 interface for ANSI / CLI interface for ETSI • Front access for alarm interfaces • LED signaling

4.8.1.2 EquippingThe G400/G400 2G has 6 slots available for plug-in units, see Figure 36. Table 50 lists the compatible plug-in units.


CXU_C 4x 1 GigE uplinks, 4 slot blank SFP, 12 Gbit/s switching capacity


Table 50 G400/G400 2G Plug-in Unit Compatibility

79


Id:0900d805805f1c2e















PM_1R ANSI (for G400)

Power module, ANSI, replaceable slide-in module, 1 DC interface

PM_UPL ANSI (for G400)

Power module with user plane, ANSI, 1 DC interface, alarm contacts, BITS, fan control

PM_1R ETSI (for G400)

Power module, ETSI, T3, replaceable slide-in module, 1 DC interface

PM_UPL_R ETSI (for G400)


PM_1R 2G (for G400 2G)

Power module, replaceable slide-in module, 1 DC interface

PM_UPL 2G ETSI (for G400 2G)


PM_ONU 2G (for G400 2G)

Power module with user plane, 1 DC interface, alarm inputs, MTA ports, fan control, different front panel solution

FAN_G400 Fan unit for shelf G400

FAN_G400 DF Fan unit for shelf G400 with dust filter




Table 50 G400/G400 2G Plug-in Unit Compatibility (Cont.)

80

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

• A mandatory fan module on the left side of the shelf is used to dissipate the heat generated by the different boards. The following figure shows the equipping for G400 ETSI application:

• A mandatory fan module on the left side of the shelf is used to dissipate the heat generated by the different boards. The following figure shows the equipping for G400 2G ETSI application:


Power ModulesThe power modules of G400 are PM_1R ANSI and PM_UPL ANSI, (for ETSI application, the power modules are PM_1R ETSI and PM_UPL_R ETSI). The design of PM_1R ANSI/ETSI is similar to PM_1, see section 8.1. The design of PM_UPL ANSI and PM_UPL_R ETSI is similar to PM_UPL, see section 8.2. The following table list the power module connectors of G400.

Slot 209 G400 Fan Unit

Slot 201 IU

Slot 202 IU

Slot 203 CXU #A

Slot 204 CXU #B

Slot 205 IU

Slot 206 IU

Slot 207/208 PM_UPL ETSI PM_1R ETSI


Slot 201 IU

Slot 202 IU

Slot 203 CXU #A

Slot 204 CXU #B or IU 1)

Slot 205 IU

Slot 206 IU

Slot 207/208 PM_UPL 2G ETSI/PM_ONU 2G PM_1R 2G

1) If slot 203 is equipped with an CXU_C, it is not allowed to equip slot 204 with an IU.


External Alarm Alarm input and output on the PM_UPL ANSI/ PM_UPL_R ETSI

Test Access Point Line tests on the PM_UPL ANSI / PM_UPL_R ETSI

MTA Control Metallic Test Access (MTA) on the PM_UPL ANSI / PM_UPL_R ETSI


81


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

The power modules of G400 2G are PM_1R 2G and PM_UPL 2G/PM_ONU 2G, see sections 8.3, 8.4 and 8.5. The following table list the power module connectors of G400 2G.



Table 53 lists the electrical characteristics of the G400G400 2G.

4.8.2 Shelf G400R/G400R 2G

4.8.2.1 DesignThe shelf G400R/G400R 2G has 6 slots, 2 slots for the both central cards and 4 slots for the IUs. Additionally, the shelf contains a special slot for the power module PM_R/PM_R 2G. In the G400R 2G, an additional IU can be plugged-in instead of the second central card (only possible, if on slot 203 no CXU_C is used as central card). A fan unit will be equipped on the left side of the shelf in a special slot.

Power Supply Power input on the PM_1R ANSI/ PM_1R ETSI and PM_UPL ANSI/ PM_UPL_R ETSI


External Alarm Alarm input and output on the PM_UPL 2G Alarm input on the PM_ONU 2G

Test Access Point Line tests on the PM_UPL 2G/PM_ONU 2G

MTA Control Metallic Test Access (MTA) on the PM_UPL 2G

Power Supply Power input on the PM_1R 2G and PM_UPL 2G/PM_ONU 2G

Table 52 Power Module Connectors of G400 2G


Table 51 Power Module Connectors of G400 (Cont.)






Table 53 G400/G400 2G Electrical Characteristics

82

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

G400R/G400R 2G shelf and the PM_R/PM_R 2G is a special design for outdoor ONU applications. PM_R/PM_R 2G can control Heat Exchanger and only one power supply path is used. Furthermore, special alarm connectors are used.

Figure 37 G400R/G400R 2G shelf equipped with IU_ADSL72 (4 x) and CXU_Cs (2x)

The shelf G400R/G400R 2G contains the power module PM_R/PM_R 2G.The following main functions are performed by the PM_R/PM_R 2G:

• Power supply interface • Shelf fan control • Heat exchanger fan control • Test bus interface (TAP) • Ethernet switch for controlling of the MTA functionality in the RDAC • Out-band serial interface • Interface for environmental sensor • Front access for alarm input interfaces • LED signaling

4.8.2.2 EquippingThe G400R/G400R 2G has 6 slots. Table 54 lists the compatible plug-in units.


CXU_C 4x 1 GigE uplinks, 4 slot blank SFP, 12 Gbit/s switching capacity



Table 54 G400R/G400R 2G Plug-in Unit Compatibility

83


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

• A mandatory fan module on the left side of the shelf is used to dissipate the heat generated by the different boards. The following figure shows the equipping for G400R application:









IU_VDSL48P 48 Port VDSL2 interface unit for VDSL2/ADSL2+ over POTS





PM_R (for G400R) Power module with user plane for ONU (RDAC) application, ANSI, 1 DC interface, alarm contacts, fan control, Ethernet switch

PM_R 2G (for G400R 2G)

Power module, 1 DC interface, alarm contacts, fan control, Ethernet switch

FAN_G400 Fan unit for shelf G400R

FAN_G400 DF Fan unit for shelf G400R with dust filter

FAN_G400 2G Fan unit for shelf G400R 2G

FAN_G400 DF 2G Fan unit for shelf G400R 2G with dust filter


Slot 201 IU

Slot 202 IU

Slot 203 CXU #A

Slot 204 CXU #B

Slot 205 IU

Slot 206 IU

Slot 207 PM_R


Table 54 G400R/G400R 2G Plug-in Unit Compatibility (Cont.)

84

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

• A mandatory fan module on the left side of the shelf is used to dissipate the heat generated by the different boards. The following figure shows the equipping for G400R 2G application:


Power ModulesThe power module of G400R/G400R 2G is PM_R/PM_R 2G, see section 8.6.

4.8.2.4 Power SupplyThe power inputs to the shelf must be protected by circuit breakers in the terminal panel of the rack.The power supplied to the shelf is passed first through the DC filter. For redundant power supply, the second power supply input has to be used. Table 56 lists the electrical characteristics of the G400R/G400R 2G.


Slot 201 IU

Slot 202 IU

Slot 203 CXU #A

Slot 204 CXU #B or IU 1)

Slot 205 IU

Slot 206 IU

Slot 207 PM_R 2G

1) If slot 203 is equipped with an CXU_C, it is not allowed to equip slot 204 with an IU.


External alarm Alarm input and output on the PM_R/PM_R 2G

Ethernet interfaces The PM_R/PM_R 2G contains a 4port Ethernet switch to provide two Ethernet links for the controlling of the MTAS and the test head.

Test access point Line tests on the PM_R/PM_R 2G

Power supply Power input on the PM_R/PM_R 2G

Interface for environmental Sensor

measure the ambient humidity an external sensor can be connected to the PM_R/PM_R 2G

Serial interface Serial Interface to the Dial-back Modem

Table 55 Power Module Connectors of G400R/G400R 2G





Table 56 G400R/G400R 2G Electrical Characteristics

85


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

4.9 Basic Shelves G200 2G and G200S 2GThe system hiX 5622 can be housed in the shelf G200. Due to the different requirements of the IP-DSLAM application the shelf will be available in two variants, G200 2G and G200S 2G

g If not particularly mentioned, the following description apply for both subrack variants G200 2G and G200S 2G, and the designations “G200” and “subrack” always stands for both types.

The G200 may be installed in indoor-racks as well as outdoor-shelters.

4.9.1 Shelf G200

4.9.1.1 DesignThe shelf G200 has 5 slots, see Figure 38, 1 slot for central cards and 2 slots for IUs. Additionally, the shelf contains two special slots for the power modules PM_1R 2G and PM_UPL 2G ETSI/PM_ONU 2G. A fan unit will be equipped on the left side of the shelf in a special slot. The fan unit FAN_G200 DF with dust filter or the fan unit FAN_G200 without dust filter can be equipped. The shelf G200 2G is prepared for ANSI applications.

Figure 38 hiX 5622 in the subrack G200

The G200 is equipped with two power modules, PM_1R 2G and PM_UPL 2G ETSI/PM_ONU 2G. The power module PM_1R 2G contains the power path for the first power supply voltage.The following main functions are performed by the PM_UPL 2G ETSI/PM_ONU 2G:

• Power supply interface • Fan control interface • Test bus interface (TAP) • External synchronization by redundant BITS interfaces (only for ANSI application) • Out-band CLI interface • Front access for alarm interfaces • LED signaling



Table 56 G400R/G400R 2G Electrical Characteristics (Cont.)

86

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

4.9.1.2 EquippingTable 57 lists the compatible plug-in units.

• A mandatory fan module on the left side of the shelf is used to dissipate the heat generated by the different boards. The following figure shows the equipping for ETSI application:

















PM_1R 2G Power module, replaceable slide-in module, 1 DC interface

PM_UPL 2G ETSI Power module with user plane, 1 DC interface, alarm inputs and outputs, MTA ports, fan control, different front panel solution

PM_ONU 2G Power module with user plane, 1 DC interface, alarm inputs, MTA ports, fan control, different front panel solution



FAN_G200S 2G Fan unit for shelf G200S 2G

Table 57 G200 Plug-in Unit Compatibility

87


Id:0900d805805f1c2e


The power modules of G200 are PM_1R 2G and PM_UPL 2G ETSI/PM_ONU 2G, see sections 8.3, 8.4 and 8.5.



Table 59 lists the electrical characteristics of the G200.


Slot 201 IU #1

Slot 202 IU #2

Slot 203 CXU

Slot 204/205 PM_UPL 2G/PM_ONU 2G PM_1R 2G


External Alarm Alarm input and output on the PM_UPL 2G ETSI Alarm input on the PM_ONU 2G

Test Access Point Line tests on the PM_UPL 2G ETSI/PM_ONU 2G

MTA Control Metallic Test Access (MTA) on the PM_UPL 2G ETSI

Power Supply Power input on the PM_1R 2G and PM_UPL 2G ETSI/PM_ONU 2G







Table 59 G200 Electrical Characteristics

88

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

4.10 Technical Data

4.10.1 Shelves for ETSI Application (M1200/M1100/M1100 2G/G1100/G1100 2G/M600/G600 2G/ G600R 2G/M400/G400/G400R/G400 2G/G400R 2G)The M1200/M600/M400 shelf will be located indoor at temperature-controlled locations with environmental conditions according to ETSI EN 300 019-1-3: Class 3.1E and an expanded temperature range of -25 °C to +60 °C.

The expanded temperature range of G400/G400R/G400 2G/G400R 2G/G600 2G/ G600R 2G/G200 2G is from -25 °C to 70 °C. The temperature range of G200S 2G is from -25 °C to 55 °C.The expanded temperature range of M1100/ M1100 2G/G1100/G1100 2G is in dependency of the used fan tray, the range is also from -25 °C to 70 °C.

Environmental conditionsEMC requirements acc. ETSI EN 300 386

Climate– Transport: acc. ETSI EN 300 019-1-2: Class 2.3– Storage: acc. ETSI EN 300 019-1-1: Class 1.3E

The plug-in units not yet housed in racks or shelters must be unequipped for transpor-tation (no units).

EMC and CE conformityFulfill the requirements:

– ETSI EN 300 386 v1.3.2– DTAG 1TR9 Edition 09.2001 Revision 06.2002– ETSI ES 201 468 v1.2.1

Product safetyEN 60950-1:2001

Power supply48 V/60 V

Tolerance: 40.5 V to 72 V

4.10.2 Shelves for ANSI Application (G400/G400R)Environmental conditions

The equipment developed for hiX5625 is designed according to:

• The G400/G400R and the equipped boards fulfill the requirements for NEBS level 3 in ANSI according to GR-63-CORE [7] and GR-1089-CORE [6].

• The G400R fulfills the requirements for NEBS level 3 according to GR-487-CORE [4] and GR-2834-CORE [5].

Environmental conditions

89


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

• ClimateThe shelf and the boards fulfill the environmental requirements according to GR-63-CORE 20 section 4.1 (temperature range -40 °C +70 °C) for storage and transportation.

• In indoor racksFor stand-alone scenarios the shelves G400 and G400R will be located indoor attemperature-controlled locations (telecom buildings, equipment rooms) with environmental conditions according to GR-63-CORE section 4.1 (long-term temperature range +5 °C +40 °C, short-term temperature range -5 °C +50 °C), the observance of environmental requirements has to be tested according to GR-63-CORE section 5.1.

• In outdoor sheltersThe shelf G400R can be mounted in an outdoor shelter. The shelter will be located at non-weatherprotected locations with environmental conditions according to GR-487-CORE section 2.2 (-40 °C +46 °C), the observance of environmental requirements has to be tested according to GR-487-CORE section 3.26.

The plug-in units not yet housed in racks or shelters must be unequipped for transpor-tation (no units).

EMC GR-1089-CORE sections 2 and 3

Product safetyGR-1089-CORE section 7 and CSA C22.2 Nr. 950-95

Over-voltage and lightning protectionGR-1089-CORE section 4 and 5

4.10.3 Mechanics

Mechanics(M1200)

– Number of slots: 17– Dimensions without mounting brackets (W x H x D): 449 mm x 571.1 mm x 279 mm– Shelf size including cables and mounting brackets (W x H x D): 482 mm x 571.1 mm

x max. 331 mm– Minimum free space above shelf: 100 mm– Minimum free space below shelf: 25 mm– Plug-in unit nominal spacing: 25 mm– Heat transfer

– Air inlet: on the underside of fan shelf,– Air outlet: on the top side of the shelf

Mechanics (M1100/M1100 2G/G1100/G1100 2G)

– Number of slots:18 – Dimensions without mounting brackets (W x H x D): 444.5 mm x 536 mm x 268 mm

90

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

– Shelf size including mounting brackets and cables (W x H x D): 482 mm x 536 mm x max. 331 mm

– Shelf size including cables and mounting bracket for installation in ETSI rack (W x H x D): 535 mm x 536 mm x max. 331 mm

– Minimum free space above shelf:100 mm– Minimum free space below shelf:25 mm– Plug-in unit nominal spacing:25 mm– Heat transfer

– Air inlet: - on the front side of fan shelf– Air outlet: on the top side of the shelf

Mechanics(M600)

– Number of slots 11– Dimensions without mounting brackets (W x H x D): 449 mm x 311 mm x 279 mm– Shelf size including mounting brackets and cables: 483 mm x 311 mm x 331 mm– Shelf size including cables and mounting brackets for installation in ETSI rack (W x

H x D): 535 mm x 311 mm x 331 mm– Minimum free space above shelf: 100 mm– Minimum free space below shelf: 25 mm– Plug-in unit nominal spacing: 25 mm– Heat transfer

– Air inlet: on the left side of the fan shelf– Air outlet: on the right side of the shelf

Mechanics (M400)

– Number of slots: 7– Dimensions without mounting brackets (W x H x D): 449 mm x 222 mm x 279 mm– Shelf size including mounting brackets and cables: 483 mm x 222 mm x 331 mm– Shelf size including cables and mounting brackets for installation in ETSI rack (W x

H x D): 535 mm x 222 mm x 331 mm– Minimum free space above shelf: 100 mm– Minimum free space below shelf: 25 mm– Plug-in unit nominal spacing: 25 mm– Heat transfer

– Air inlet: on the left side of the fan shelf,– Air outlet: on the right side of the shelf

Mechanics (G600 2G/G600R 2G)

– Number of slots (G600 2G): 12– Number of slots (G600R 2G): 11– Dimensions without mounting brackets (W x H x D): 496 mm x 324 mm x 279 mm– Shelf size including mounting brackets and cables (W x H x D): 533 mm x 324 mm

x max. 331 mm– Minimum free space above shelf: 100 mm– Minimum free space below shelf: 25 mm

91


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

– Plug-in unit nominal spacing: 25 mm– Heat transfer


Mechanics (G400/G400R/G400 2G/G400R 2G)

– Number of slots (G400/G400 2G): 8– Number of slots (G400R/G400R 2G): 7– Dimensions without mounting brackets (W x H x D): 496 mm x 224 mm x 279 mm– Shelf size including mounting brackets and cables (W x H x D): 533 mm x 224 mm



Mechanics (G200 2G)

– Number of slots: 5– Dimensions without mounting brackets (W x H x D): 496 mm x 124 mm x 266 mm– Shelf size including mounting brackets and cables (W x H x D): 533 mm x 124 mm



Mechanics (G200S 2G)

– Number of slots: 5– Dimensions without mounting brackets (W x H x D): 446 mm x 102 mm x 266 mm– Shelf size including mounting brackets and cables (W x H x D): 483 mm x 102 mm



4.11 Splitter UnitsTo combine narrowband and ADSL, VDSL broadband signals onto the subscriber line, the hiX 5635/30/25 can use splitter units. In the customer premises, CPE splitters are necessary.

92

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

The splitters are not required if MDF splitters or SHDSL interface units are used. If split-ters are required two 24-port splitters have to be configured for each 48-port ADSL2+ interface unit, and two 36-port splitters have to be configured for each 72-port ADSL2+ interface unit.If splitters are required one 24-port splitter has to be configured for each 24-port VDSL2 interface unit.

For standard cabling, two suitable dummy-splitters can be used for every equipped IU_SHDSL48.

Figure 39 Splitter Application with IU_ADSL72 (Example)

The following ADSL splitters (SPT) are available:

The following VDSL splitters are available:

SPT36

IU_ADSL72

CXU

72 x ADSL

36 x ADSL

36 x POTS

SPT36

36 x ADSL

36 x POTS

Splitter hiX 5625/30/35

IU

72 x POTS72 X ADSL over POTS


SPT-24-600 24-Port splitter – 600 Ω POTS

SPT-36-600 36-Port splitter – 600 Ω POTS

SPT-24-600-BT 24-Port splitter – 600 Ω POTS with 16 kHz billing tone

SPT-36-600-BT 36-Port splitter – 600 Ω POTS with 16 kHz billing tone

SPT-24-ETSI 24-Port splitter – ETSI POTS complex (270 Ω + 750 Ω // 150 nF)

SPT-36-ETSI 36-Port splitter – ETSI POTS complex (270 Ω + 750 Ω // 150 nF)

SPT-36-2B1Q 36-Port splitter – ISDN 2B1Q (135 Ω )

SPT-36-4B3T 36-Port splitter – combo ISDN 4B3T (150 ) and ETSI POTS complex (220 Ω + 820 Ω // 150 nF)

SPT-V24-ISDN-2B1Q VDSL2 Splitter 24-port for ISDN 2B1Q in ADSL splitter format

SPT-V24-POTS-600 VDSL2 Splitter for POTS 600 Ohm in ADSL splitter format

SPT-V24-POTS-ETSI VDSL2 Splitter 24-port for POTS ETSI in ADSL splitter format

SPT-Dummy-36 36-Port splitter – for specific configurations for ADSL2+ and SHDSL boards

Table 60 ADSL Splitter Units


SPT-24-4B3T-C 24-Port Splitter - 4B3T CPT

SPT-V24-ISDN-2B1Q VDSL2 Splitter 24-port for ISDN 2B1Q in ADSL splitter format

SPT-V24-POTS-600 VDSL2 Splitter for POTS 600 Ohm in ADSL splitter format

Table 61 VDSL Splitter Unit

93


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Figure 40 shows the connectors of the VDSL splitter unit with front access design.

Figure 40 Splitter Unit (Example for SPT-24-4B3T-C)

Figure 41 shows the connectors of the splitter unit with front access design.

Figure 41 Splitter Unit (Example for SP36-4B3T)

The splitter unit has the same connector assignments as the connected interface unit.

For 24-port splitter units, see Section Interface Unit IU_ADSL48 (IU_ADSL48).

For 36-port splitter units, see Section Interface Unit IU_ADSL72 (IU_ADSL72).

The splitters are purely passive units which do not require a power supply. All splitter units use DIN connectors for DSLAM connection.

The splitter shelves can be used together with M1200/M1100/G1100/M600/M400 shelf. The number of required splitters is depending on the number of ADSL2+/VDSL2 inter-face units. For each ADSL2+ interface unit 2 splitter units are required. For each VDSL2 interface unit one splitter unit is required.

According to the interface unit type (DSL type and number of ports per DSL unit, ITU Standardization for different Annexes) there are different POTS and ISDN splitter units available.

The following splitter shelves are available:

Splitter Shelf with 16-Splitter Units

SPT-V24-POTS-ETSI VDSL2 Splitter 24-port for POTS ETSI in ADSL splitter format


Table 61 VDSL Splitter Unit (Cont.)

94

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

Figure 42 Splitter Shelf with 16 Splitters

Characteristics:

• 17-slot splitter shelf:– 16 slots for splitter units– 1 slot with blank panel

• Max. 36 ports x 16 slots = 576 ports • 483 mm x 440 mm x 261 mm (W x H x D)



Characteristics:

• 8 slots for splitter units (horizontal type) • Max. 36 ports x 8 slots = 288 Ports • 483 mm x 222 mm x 261 mm (W x H x D).

SP

T

201

Slot

1

SP

T

202

Slot

2

SP

T

203

Slot

3

SP

T

204

Slot

4

SP

T

205

Slot

5

SP

T

206

Slot

6

SP

T

207

Slot

7

SP

T

208

Slot

8

Bla

nk p

anel

209

Slot

9

SP

T

210

Slo

t 10

SP

T

211

Slo

t 11

SP

T

212

Slo

t 12

SP

T

213

Slo

t 13

SP

T

214

Slo

t 14

SP

T

215

Slo

t 15

SP

T

216

Slo

t 16

SP

T

217

Slo

t 17

SPT201Slot 1

SPT202Slot 2

SPT203Slot 3

SPT204Slot 4

SPT205Slot 5

SPT206Slot 6

SPT207Slot 7

SPT208Slot 8

95


Id:0900d805805f1c2e



Characteristics:

• 4 slots for splitter units (horizontal type) • Max. 36 ports x 4 slots = 144 Ports • 483 mm x 148 mm x 261 mm (W x H x D).

4.12 AC/DC Converter hiX PS 48/30 (K1196)

4.12.1 OverviewThe AC/DC converter FLPS 48/30 is used as power supply unit in ONUs.

The FLPS 48/30 can only be used for ETSI racks!

g For this application, only the RFI interface is used for control and signalling. For the RFI mode, the address 0 must be set on the Can bus address switch, see Figure 48

The following interfaces of the hiX PS 48/30 are used for hiX 5625/30/35, see Figure 45:

Figure 45 Interfaces of the hiX PS 48/30

SPT201Slot 1

SPT202Slot 2

SPT203Slot 3

SPT204Slot 4

Ue

N

L172 V to276 V AC

gn Mains

hiX PS 48/30

Ua 55 V

rt Fault

DC fusepanel

Signaling/control

AC/DC converterVoltage regulator

Balanced modulator

AC fuse panel with

overvoltage-protectionPE

RFI interface

hiX 5625/30/35 alarm

interface

96

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

• AC input (3 pins) input voltage Ue

To protect the input voltage, an external circuit-breaker of 16 A is required. It guarantees optimum protection across the entire input voltage range from 172 V to 276 V.

• DC output (4 pins) output voltage Ua

• Parallel signalling interface RFI (12 pins)All signal and control lines exit via a 12-pin connector, see Figure 49

The output voltage is earth-free, overload and short-circuit proof. No temperature sensor is used for this application. Therefore the FCM voltage is constant 55.0 VDC

The connectors for AC input and DC output as well as for control and signaling (signaling interface RFI) are inside the FLPS 48/30 and are visible when the front panel is removed, see also Figure 46.

The connectors for AC input and DC output as well as for control and signalling (signal-ling interface RFI) are inside the hiX PS 48/30 and are visible when the front panel is removed, see also Figure 47.

To increase the output or create redundancy, two AC/DC converters hiX PS 48/30 can be switched in parallel. For that, connection 5 of the 12-pin plug connector of both AC/DC converters hiX PS 48/30 must be connected to one another by means of an external control line (Current Share, see Figure 49)

4.12.2 Control and SignalingWithout activation of inputs ECM or BTM the hiX PS 48/30 is in the float charging mode (FCM). This is the as-delivered mode.

Faults in the hiX PS 48/30 are signalled via the RFI interface and are, at the same time, indicated by two LEDs, see Figure 46 and Table 62.

g For the hiX 5625/30/35 standard cabling, the RFI interface is not used! The alarms are forwarded to the operating system only if contacts 9, 10 and 12 of the signal connector (contacts “Mains failure”, “Failure 48 V” and “Common connec-tion”, see Figure 49) are connected with the RJ45 connectors “Alarm input” of the Common Interface Field (CIF), see CIF Module Connectors on the Top of M1200

The RFI interface is brought out by a 12-pin connector (signal contacts RFI) for connec-ting the signalling and control lines. The pin assignment of this plug connector is shown in Figure 49.

97


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Figure 46 shows the front view of the hiX PS 48/30 with the LEDs “Mains” and “Fault”:

Figure 46 AC/DC Converter hiX PS 48/30 (with front panel)

4.12.3 ConnectorsAssignment of the Connectors

LED “Fault” (red) LED “Mains” (green) Criteria for RFI mode

on on For the AC/DC converter hiX PS 48/30 a self test is just per-formed or at least one of the following faults or states occurs:

– Fan failure– Internal failure – DC overvoltage– DC undervoltage – Overtemperature – AC/DC converter hiX PS

48/30 is locked

on off AC overvoltage or undervolt-age

flashing 0.5 Hz on not used

on flashing 2 Hz Battery test mode (BTM) is active 1)

flashing 2 Hz on Enhanced charge mode (ECM) is active 1)

flashing 0.5 Hz 10 % pulse duty ratio (pulse interval to pulse duration)

on not used

off on No failure In case of a missing/faulty tem-perature sensor, there is no indication!

1) not used for hiX 5625/30/35

Table 62 LED Status

Mains

FaultDC ON

DC OFFSURPASS hiX PS 48/30

98

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

Figure 47 AC/DC Converter hiX PS 48/30 (without front panel)

CAN bus address switchThe CAN bus address must be set with the address switch, see Figure 48. The CAN bus address switch is located on the top of the hiX PS 48/30, see Figure 47

Figure 48 Address Settings for RFI Mode

Signal Contacts RFI All signal and control lines exit via a 12-pin connector, see Figure 49.

8

1 on off

green

redDC ON

DC Off

LEDs

L PE N

AC Fan Fan

1

- - + +

DCFan

CAN-in CAN-outRFI12

DC-OutputSignal Connector RFIAC-Input On/Off Switch(signal contacts)

CAN bus address switch:

20

21

22

23

OFF (0)ON (1)

4321

Address of the first AC/DC converter unit = 0 The second AC/DC converter must also get the address 0.

256267278

245

Address 0 corresponds to the delivery state.

99


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Figure 49 Assignment of Signal Connector RFI and Relay Contacts

4.12.4 Technical DataMechanical dimensions

– Dimension (W x H x D): 535 mm x 75 mm x 220 mm

that means only used for ETSI racks

Input parameters

– Nominal AC voltage: 230 VAC

– Input voltage range Ue: 172 VAC to 276 VAC

– Frequency range fe of the input voltage Ue: 47.5 Hz to 63 Hz– Switch-on current Ieeineff: Ieeineff < Ie nenn

– Total harmonic distortion: according to EN 61000-3-2– Undervoltage switch-off point Ueunt: 157 V ±3 %– Undervoltage reconnect point Ueunth: 167 V ±3 %– Overvoltage switch-off point Ueüb: 286 V ±3 %– Overvoltage reconnect point Ueübh: 276 V ±3 %– Efficiency at Ue = 230 V: >= 90,0 %

Control line

free, not used

PT1000; GND; L+

PT 1000

Parallel operation (Current Share)

free, not used

TTL inputBattery test mode (BTM)

TTL inputEnhanced charge

GND; L+

Relay contact 1Mains failure

Relay contact 2Failure 48 V

free

Common connectionfor relay contacts

mode (ECM)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

10 Ω0.125 W

10

12

9 Mains failure

Failure 48 V

Common connection

100

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

• The switch-on current Ieein of the FLPS 48/30 is rated in such a way that series cir-cuitbreakers with 16 A characteristic curve type “C” at Ueunth = 167 V 3% (undervolt-age reconnect point) are not triggered.

• The effective switch-on current Ieeineff may not exceed the input current at nominal load.

• The hiX PS 48/30 switches off in the event of input overvoltage and input undervolt-age

Output parametersDC output voltage Ua without temperature sensor: Ua= -55.0 V

4.13 Supervision and Management UnithiX 5625/30/35 can be installed in outdoor shelters, there are following shelter types:

• 1.0-meter shelter for hiX ONU 600 FTTC (with hiX 5630) or for hiX ONU 1000 FTTC (with hiX 5635)

• 1.7-meter shelter for hiX ONU 600 FTTC (with hiX 5630), for hiX ONU1000 FTTC (with hiX 5635) or hiX ONU 2000 FTTC (with hiX 5635)

The number of broadband subscribers is the main difference between hiX ONU 600 FTTC, hiX ONU 1000 FTTC and hiX ONU 2000 FTTC. hiX ONU 600 FTTC provides Iacces for up to 576 broadband subscribers, hiX ONU 1000 FTTC up to 1008 broad-bandsubscribers and hiX ONU 2000 FTTC up to 2016 broadband subscribers.

The shelters are developed for non-weather protected locations in outdoor applications.

The hiX 5630/5635 shelves provide xDSL services. The broadband payload is transmit-ted via the Gigabit Ethernet interface of the CXU of hiX 5630/5635. The access termi-nation is implemented by a splice cassette or optionally by an ODF.

An AC/DC power supply system provides the hiX ONUs with power from the AC mains and charges the stationary lead batteries at the same time. These batteries (VRLA/AGM) have to bypass all AC mains failures.

The AC unit (ACU) accesses physically to the mains. It has single-phase and three-phase inputs, contains breakers and overvoltage-protection components.

The DC unit (DCU) distributes the DC power.One solution of battery management is to use the additional module Supervision Management Unit (SMU) with extended battery management features.

For detailed information about SMU, refer to the SMU User Manual, see Section Document Structure.

4.13.1 OverviewThe Supervision and Management Unit (SMU) realizes the management and the super-vision of the infrastructure within the ONU.

101


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Figure 50 General View SMU

The SMU provides the following functions: • Battery management (realized by the SMU itself and the external measuring module

which is connected via the CAN interface)– Measuring of the battery voltage and of the charging/discharging current by an

external measuring shunt.– Measuring the battery temperature by an external temperature sensor– Deep discharging protection and checking, if there a battery is available and is

connected.– Calculation of the current charging state (available battery capacity at the

moment) as well as battery capacity of fully charged batteries (decreasing of the absolute battery capacity due to ageing until to the end of the life time)

– Recording and storage the number and the duration of mains failures and deep discharges

• Supervision of the shelter temperature and fan management by a further (second) external temperature sensor

• Infrastructure alarmsThe SMU detects, processes and signals all internal (for example battery manage-ment) and external infrastructure alarms (for example fan, door)

• Implementation of a Ethernet hub for maintenance purposes

The configuration is performed by SNMP via the Ethernet connection and the internet protocol (IP/UDP).

4.13.2 InterfacesThe SMU provides the following interfaces, see Figure 50. • 4 x Ethernet hub interfaces (10BaseT)

– One interface for the connection to the ONU which is accomodated in the same rack/shelter as the SMU

DIP (S10,S11)covered, backwards

Height 44 mm

Fan-IF (X5, 2x 3 pole)

Alarm-IF (X10, 2x10 pole;X11, 2x6 pole)

I2C-IF (X13_1/2, X12_2,3x SUB-D, 9 pole)

CAN_IF (X12_1, SUB_D 9 pole)

Ethernet-Hub (X6)Relay-IF (X4, 2x3 pole)

Power supply control IF (X3, 1x 4 pole)DC-IF (X1, X2, 2x3W3

102

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

– Two interfaces for further equipment, for example feeder– One interface for connecting an LCTEach physical Ethernet interface is supervised by two LEDs, which give information about the network state (data/link): a yellow LED for Rx and a green LED for display-ing the link state

• Alarm interface with 26 alarm contacts (20 x single-pole, 6 x two-pole) • Fan interfaces

– For controlling the top fan with temperature controlled operating voltage for all fans

– With alarm inputs for failure signaling of the single fans– With interfaces for fan controlling in the shelves and– With FAN_CTRL interface for the temperature dependent speed control of the

fan units in the shelves and in the roof • 3 x I2C interfaces for receivining/sending data from external temperature sensors

and further external units, for example name plate data of plug-in units or power supply units

• CAN interface for connecting the external CAN-Combi-module and of power supply units with CAN interface for controlling these power supply units (for example hiX PS 48/30)

• Interface “Power supply control” for controlling of power supply units with RFI inter-face (for example FLPS 48/6)

• Interface for controlling the deep discharge protection relay (Relay-IF)

4.13.3 Supervision

4.13.3.1 External AlarmsThe SMU provides up to 20 one pole and up to 6 two pole alarm interfaces (connector X10 and X11). Table 68 and Table 69 show the pin assignment of the connectors.

The alarm interfaces are configurable by the management system.

One Pole External Alarms, Low-active (L) or High-active (H):

Signal Alarm name Meaning Aktivation

AL1_01 Ext1 Not used 1)






AL1_07 Ext7 Not used

AL1_08 Ext8 Not used


AL1_10 Ext10 Top-fan #1 faulty H-active

Table 63 SMU One Pole External Alarms

103


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Two Pole External Alarms:The additional two-pole alarms AL2_21 to AL2_26 (Ext21 to Ext26) are not used.

4.13.3.2 Internal Alarms




AL1_14 Ext14 Over voltage protection failure H-active

AL1_15 Ext15 Door 1 is opened H-active



AL1_18 Ext18 Filter is dirty - value 1 L-active

AL1_19 Ext19 Filter is dirty - value 2 L-active


1) via CAN-bus as internal alarm, see Table 64

Signal Alarm name Meaning Aktivation

Table 63 SMU One Pole External Alarms (Cont.)

Number Alarm name Meaning

1 Fwe Flash write Error

2 Fan Not used (hardware fault / temperature Problem

3 ShelterTemperature Shelter temperature to high

4 NoSoftware No software is started

5 Power Mains failure (the system operates with backup batteries)

6 SumAlarm Sum alarm for all power supply and battery alarms

7 NoBattery Battery is not available

8 BattDdtr Deep discharge threshold of the battery is reached

9 BattCactc Momentary available capacity threshold crossed (under-run of the capacity threshold)

10 BattLoadCurrent Not used (Load current is out of range)

11 BattCifcstc Capacity threshold in fully charged state is crossed (under-run of the capacity threshold)

12 BattVoltage1 Battery voltage < 50.4 V



15 BattParamFile No battery parameter file available

16 BattBalance Not used (battery voltage is unbalanced)

17 I2c1 Shelter temperature sensor faulty or not connected

Table 64 SMU Internal Alarms

104

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

18 I2c2 Battery temperature sensor faulty or not connected

19 I2c3 Not used (power supply hiX PS48/6 #1 faulty)



22 I2c6 Not used

23 Can1 Can-Combi-Module faulty, switched off or not connected

24 Can2 Power supply hiX PS48/30 #1 faulty, switched off or not connected






30 BattOvervoltage Battery voltage exceeds user-defined upper threshold

31 BattUndervoltage Battery voltage falls short of user-defined lower threshold

32 BattMaxTemp Battery temperature exceeds user-defined upper threshold

33 BattMinTemp Battery temperature falls short of user-defined upper threshold

34 BattMaintenance Battery maintenance is due

35 BattBlock11 Block 1 of battery-string 1 defective








Number Alarm name Meaning

Table 64 SMU Internal Alarms (Cont.)

105


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

4.13.4 Control Elements

Figure 51 Front View SMU

Figure 52 SMU Ethernet Ports

The pin assignment of connector X6 is shown in Table 72.

Figure 53 Rear View of SMU with Switches S10 and S11

LEDs yellow/green

Fan Alarm (single) Alarm (dual) I2C-IF2

I2C-IF3 I2C-IF1

CAN-IFAMP

Ethernet 10Base-T Batt.-Relay PS-control PDC-1 PDC-2

P48V, 1,5A(-) (+)

P48V, 1,5A(-) (+)

SMURx Link

DC-Interface 2 x 3W3

Power supplycontrolinterface Combicon1 x 4pole

RelayinterfaceCombicon2 x 3pole

Ethernet-HubRJ45 jack,4 x 8pole

CAN-interfaceSUB-D,jack9pole

Name plate

I2C-Interface3 x SUB-D,jack9pole

AlarminterfaceCombicon2 x 10pole,2 x 6pole

FaninterfaceCombicon2 x 3pole

MAC address

AMP AMP AMP12

1920

12

1112

X10 X11 X13_2X13_1

X12_2X12_1

X6 X4 X1 X2X5

12

56

12

56

X3

1 4

LEDs H1 (green/red)

green-H22yellow-H21

Rx Link

ETH-Port 1 ETH-Port 2 ETH-Port 3 ETH-Port 4State LEDs

green-H24yellow-H23

green-H26yellow-H25

green-H28yellow-H27

C B AD

Connector X6 (4 x 8pole RJ45):

Enclosure of DIL switchesS10 and S11

S10S11

1 2 3 4

ON

S10

Switch S10: Default Position 1 to 4: OFFSwitch S11: Default Position 1 to 4: OFF (see Table 5)

1 2 3 4

ON

S11Description:Switch x: at OFF

x

ONOFF

S10 und S11 are below an enclosure at the rear side of the SMU

106

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

Delivery status:All slides of the DIL switches S10 and S11 are set OFF.

4.13.5 Connector Pin Assignments

Connector X5, Fan Interface (2 x 3pole Combicon)

!There are no setttings necessary at the DIL switch S10 for the power supply

hiX PS48/30

AC/DC Type ECM-ModeSlide position of the DIL switch S10

BTM-ModeSlide position of the DIL switch S10

FLPS 48/6 Slide 4 at ON Slide 2 at ON

Remark: All not used slides of the DIL switch S10 must be set off

Table 65 Settings DIL switch S10

Slide S11 Switch closed (ON) (Bit=0) Switch opened (OFF) (Bit=1)

1 With top and shelf fan Only top fan 1)

2 Shelf fan ON/OFF 2) Shelf fan always minimum rotation speed1)3)

3 Temperature threshold for fans +45 °C +60 °C 1)

4 Reserved Reserved1)

1) Delivery status2) ON/OFF: Shelf fan ((only if slide is ON) / top fans are switched off at appropriate temperatures3) Shelf fan (only if slide 1 is ON runs always at least with minimum rotation speed/operating voltage

Top fan is switched on if necessary. This setting is necessary at third party equipments for security reasons

Table 66 Settings DIL Switch S11

Upper row:Pin 2 4 6

Signal MUB_FAN DFAN_AL1 DFAN_AL2

Lower row:Pin 1 31) 5

Signal PUP_FAN FAN_CTRL DFAN_AL3

1) FAN_CTRL is only used for the optional shelf fan S42023-A840-A14. The setting of the DIL switchS11 determines, if the shelf fan is used, see Table 66

Table 67 SMU Connector X5

107


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Connector X10, One Pole External Alarms (2 x 10pole Combicon)

Connector X11 of the Alarm Interface (Two Pole External Alarms, 2 x 6pole Com-bicon)

Connector X13_1, X13_2 and X12_2, I2C Interface (3 x Sub-D 9pole) and Connector X12_1, CAN Interface (Sub-D 9pole)

Figure 54 SMU Connectors X12_1, X12_2, X13_1 and X13_2

Upper row:Pin 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20

Signal AL1_11 AL1_12 AL1_13 AL1_14 AL1_15 AL1_16 AL1_17 AL1_18 AL1_19 AL1_20

Lower row:Pin 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19

Signal AL1_01 AL1_02 AL1_03 AL1_04 AL1_05 AL1_06 AL1_07 AL1_08 AL1_09 AL1_10


Alarm name Ext21 Ext22 Ext23 Ext24 Ext25 Ext26

Upper row: Pin 2 4 6 8 10 12

Signal AL2_21M AL2_22M AL2_23M AL2_24M AL2_25M AL2_26M

Lower row: Pin 1 3 5 7 9 11

Signal AL2_21P AL2_22P AL2_23P AL2_24P AL2_25P AL2_26P


Pin Signal name Description

1 I2C_VCC VCC-Pin (3.3 V)

2 GND Ground

3 SDA 2 wire data input/output

4 SCL 2 wire serial clock

5 GND_S Shelf ground

6 −

7 −

8 −

9 −

Table 70 SMU Connectors X13_1, X13_2 and X12_2

5 1

9 6

108

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

Connector X6, Ethernet Hub (4 x 8pole RJ45)

Figure 55 SMU RJ45 Connector X6

The placement of the Ethernet ports at the SMU is shown in Figure 51.

Pin Signal name Description

1 −

2 CAN_L CAN_L bus (dominant low)

3 GND_CAN Ground CAN

4 EM_OFF 1)

5 GND_S Shelf ground

6 CAN_M CAN ground

7 CAN_H CAN_L bus (dominant high)

8 GND 1) Ground

9 CAN_P Positive supply voltage

1) Pin 4 and Pin 8 are connected within the connector of the connection cable, to switch over the deepdischarge threshold of the batteries from 43.2 V to 40 V. The software controls the battery management in this case.

Table 71 SMU Connector X12_1

Pin D C B A

1 RXP1 RXP2 RXP3 RXP4

2 RXN1 RXN2 RXN3 RXN4

3 TXP1 TXP2 TXP3 TXP4

4 − − − −

5 − − − −

6 TXN1 TXN2 TXN3 TXN4

7 − − − −

8 − − − −


8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

109


Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Connector X4, Control signal Battery Relay (2 x 3pole Combicon):

Connector X3, Controll Interface Power Supply (4pole Combicon):

Connector X1 and X2 of the DC Interface (2 x 3W3):

Figure 56 SMU 3W3 Connector

4.13.6 Technical Data

Upper row:Pin 2 4 6

Signal BATT_R1M BATT_R2M BATT_R3M

Lower row:Pin 1 3 5

Signal BATT_R1P BATT_R2P BATT_R3P


Pin 1 2 3 4

Signal VOMOD ECM BTM PUP


Pin A1 A2 A3

Signal − MUP1 PUP

Signal − MUP2 PUP

Table 75 SMU Connector X1 and X2

A1 A2 A3

(-) (+)

Interfaces

10BaseT Ethernet interface 4

I2C bus interface 3

Fan interface 1

CAN bus interface 1

Voltages, Power

Input voltage range (MUP1, MUP2) - 36 V to - 75 V

Fan supply voltage (PUP_FAN, MUB_FAN) + 36 V to + 56 V

110

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1c2e

Rack and Shelves

Range of Deep discharge protection thresh-oldDefault value DDP thresholdEmergency cut-out by hardware

User defined - 41.5 VDC to 45.5 VDC

- 43.2 VDC- 42 VDC

Maximum available fan power 28 W (56 V, 0.5 A)

Power dissipation at maximum fan power 11 W

Power consumption if fans are passive 5 W + 6.5 W per active 100 A battery relay

Power consumption at maximum fan power 39 W + 6.5 W per active 100 A battery relay

Maximum possible power consumption 58.5 W (maximum fan power, all 100 A battery relays are active)

Environmental Conditions

Operation climatic requirements ETS 300 019-1-4 V2.1.2, class 4.1(- 33°C to + 40°C)ETSI EN 3000 019-2-2 V2.2.2, class T4.1

Storage climatic requirements ETS 300 019-1-1 V2.14, class 1.2ETSI 300 019-2-1 V2.1.2, class T1.2

Transportation climatic requirements ETS 300 019-1-2 V2.1.4, class 2.3ETSI EN 300 019-2-2 V2.1.2, class T2.3

Product safety EN 60950

EMC, CE sign requirements ETSI EN 300 386additional the DTAG requirements 1TR9ETSI EN 300 386-2

Acoustic noise ETS 300 753

Mechanics

Board size (HxWxD) 50 mm x 465/515 mm x 239 mm

Maximum components height on compo-nent side

33 mm

Maximum components height on solder side

5 mm

111

System Description Central Switch Units

Id:0900d8058060a3d1

5 Central Switch Units

5.1 Central Switch Units CXU_B/CXU_B1/CXU_C

5.1.1 OverviewThe CXU_B/CXU_B1/CXU_C is the hiX 5625/30/35 central switch fabric unit. CXU is used to control the plug-in units of hiX 5625/30/35 shelves. CXU_B/CXU_B1 is the central switch fabric unit of hiX 5635, CXU_C is used for hiX 5630 and hiX 5625. The board of CXU_C is based and compatible to the CXU_B, the main difference is the switching capacity.

Figure 57 Interfaces of the CXU_B/CXU_B1/CXU_C

The CXU_B/CXU_B1/CXU_C consists of the following functional blocks:

• Broadband part • Controller core • Power supply and fan control

Broadband partThe broadband part provides the uplink interfaces and the system internal data inter-faces to the interface units within the shelf. All internal data interfaces are based on gigabit Ethernet. The distribution of Ethernet frames between uplink and system inter-faces is provided by a layer 2 switch.

The broadband part contains the following components:

• Layer 2 switch

Broadband part

Controllercore

Power supplyDC/DC converter

Fan control

UplinkL2 switchGE matrix

Backplane External Interfaces

GE Star4 x GE optical/

10/100 bT (TMN)

RS232

-48 V

electrical

Internalvoltages

and fanalarms

Power

Slot addr.

Fan supply

T3in

Fan alarm

Redund.control

112

System Description

Id:0900d8058060a3d1

Central Switch Units

• Ethernet uplink interfaceThe CXU uplink consists of 4 Ethernet interfaces (port 1 to 4). Each of them is alter-natively provided as optical Gigabit (1000Base-LX/SX/ZX) or electrical Fast or Gigabit Ethernet (100/1000Base-T) interface.

• GE star interfaceThe GE star is the system internal data interface to all interface units. It is imple-mented as a set of point-to-point links between the CXU and each interface unit slot.

• GE switching matrixThe GE switching matrix provides redundancy switching between the uplink inter-face (located on both CXUs) and the Layer 2 switch (located on the currently active CXU).

Controller coreThe CXU_B/CXU_B1/CXU_C contains the central controller function for all interface units in the shelf and for the configuration and control of the CXU_B/CXU_B1/CXU_C on-board components.

The CXU_B/CXU_B1/CXU_C controller provides the communication to the external TMN so as the internal communication to all interface units in the shelf. The system internal communication is implemented as inband communication over the GE star data interface.

The CXU controller core performs the following functions:

• Internal communication to all shelf interface units over the GE star data interface • Central controller functions for all plug-in units in the shelf • Central SW maintenance (including SW download) for all plug-in units in the shelf • Central HW maintenance (including reset generation, plug-in detection and remote

inventory) for all plug-in units in the shelf • Onboard configuration, maintenance and supervision for the

CXU_B/CXU_B1/CXU_C • Connection handling for the hiX 5635/hiX 5630/hiX 5625 system • Collection of remote inventory data from all shelf boards (I2C) • Initialization and configuration of all network element components • Generation and collection of external alarms • Reset generation for all plug-in units in the shelf • Protection switching control for line and plug-in unit redundancy • Collection of performance monitoring data • Onboard fault detection (online, diagnosis, routing)

Power supply and fan controlThe power supply unit generates all internal voltages used on the CXU_B/CXU_B1/CXU_C by DC/DC converting.

The power supply / fan control block consists of a DC/DC converter for the generation of unit internal voltages . For CXU_B/CXU_B1, there’s one controlled DC/DC converter for the power supply of each one fan group.

(For CXU_B/CXU_B1) The power supply block provides controlled power feeding for the fans. The fan control block adjusts the DC voltage for fan operation, depending on measurement results of the shelf temperature. The supply voltage for both fan groups (and therefore their rotational speed) is regulated, depending on the shelf temperature. This means, that the operation of fans is supervised.

113


Id:0900d8058060a3d1

The redundant power input of the DC/DC converter for the generation of unit internal voltages is obtained by a diode combination from the two redundant mains power supply inputs (MUP1 and MUP2 of the mains power connectors on the top of M1200; MUP1 and MUP2 of the mains power connectors on the CIUG of M600/M400, provided by the power supply units.

The DC/DC converter provides a power-on reset signal which is used for the generation of the cold reset for the board controller .

5.1.2 Interface LayoutFigure 58 shows the LEDs and connectors of the CXU_B/CXU_B1 (for hiX 5635) with front access design, Figure 59 shows the LEDs and connectors of the CXU_C (for hiX 5630/hiX 5625) with front access design

114

System Description

Id:0900d8058060a3d1


Figure 58 LEDs and Connectors on CXU_B/CXU_B1

CXU_B

RJ45 connector

1

2

ACT LNK1

GE

-opt.7

8

9

10

CRITMAJMINPWRRUNERR

100/1000BT

CO

NS

O. LN

K A

CT

RJ45 connector

RJ45 connector

RJ45 connector

optical connector

optical connector

optical connector

optical connector

RJ45 connector

RJ45 connector

Ports

TXRX

TX

TX

RX

RX

RX

TX

green LED “LNK”

yellow LED “ACT”

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

Ports

2

1

3

4

115


Id:0900d8058060a3d1

Figure 59 LEDs and Connectors on CXU_C

LED signaling is described in the following tables:

• Operating status LEDs of CXU, see Table 76 • Port status LEDs on the CXU for port1 to port 4, see Table 77 • Status LEDs on the CXU for the TMN interface (RJ45 connector 2), see Table 77 • Alarming LEDs on the CXU, see Table 78

Operating Status LEDs on CXUThe central switch unit CXU_B/CXU_B1/CXU_C is equipped with three LEDs to indicate the operating status of the unit. The meaning of the LEDs is shown in Table 76.

Port status LEDs on CXU for port 1 to port 4CXU also uses LEDs to indicate the status of each Ethernet uplink interface (port 1 to 4). There are two LEDs for each port. These LEDs are used for line uplink information such as link integrity and traffic activity. The green LED “LNK” displays the line link status. The meaning of the LEDs is shown in Table 77

CXU_C - interfaces GE-optical ports 1 to 4GE/FE electrical ports 1 to 4

LED-Indica-

power

minor alarm

major alarm

citical alarm

error

CXU_C ist running

(green)

(yellow)

(red)

(red)

(red)

(green)

Color: Meaning:

1) The “Link” LEDs display the line link status of optical/electrical interfaces 1 to 4: Link Up -> LED ON Link Down -> LED OFF

2) The “ACT” LEDs show whether a transmit or receive activity is present on the Ethernet line. The LED function is configurable, the default setting is to drive on the LED both for receive and transmit activity presence.

ACT-LEDs (yellow)1)

2)

Console RS232TMN10/100Base-

Status LEDs

CRIT

MAJ

MIN

PWR

RUN

ERR

LED:

SFP is not plugged

LNKACT

LNKACT

CONSOLE MGMT Ports

1 2 3 4

Port1GE-opt.- Port2 Port3 Port4 Port1100/1000BT- Port2 Port3 Port4CXU

_C

CR

ITM

AJ

MIN

PWR

RU

NER

R

LINK-LEDs (green)

SFP is plugged

PWR(green)

RUN(green)

ERR(red)

Status

On On On The unit is active, but there is a partial error.

Off The unit is active and reporting no errors.

Blinking On Start-up diagnostics are running or loading in partial error mode.

Off Loading after start-up diagnostics have been completed without an error. The RUN LED continues to blink on the pro-tection CXU until a switch-over occurs.

Off On A severe error has occurred.

Off The unit is locked.

Off Off Off The unit is not supplied with power.

Table 76 CXU Operating Status LEDs

116

System Description

Id:0900d8058060a3d1


Status LEDs on CXU for the TMN interfaceThe TMN interface connector (RJ45 connector 2) includes two LEDs to indicate the status of the TMN interface. The green LED “LNK” displays the line link status. The meaning of the LEDs is shown in Table 77.

Alarm status LEDs on CXUThe alarm situation of the complete system is indicated by three LEDs on the CXU_B /CXU_B1/CXU_C. The meaning of the LEDs is shown in Table 78.

5.1.3 Technical DataPhysical layout

Interface parameter

Max power consumption

Color Label Status Description

Green LNK On Link Up

Off Link Down

Yellow ACT - Indicates whether a transmit or receive activity is present on the Ethernet line.Default setting: this LED is on for receive and transmit activity.

Table 77 Status LEDs on CXU


Red CRIT On A critical alarm occurred.

Off No critical alarm reported.

Red MAJ On A major alarm occurred.

Off No major alarm reported.

Red MIN On A minor alarm occurred.

Off No minor alarm reported.

Table 78 Alarm Status LEDs on CXU

Dimensions (W x H x D) 25 mm x 390 mm x 235 mm

Ethernet i/f for Uplink (optical) 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX

Ethernet i/f for Uplink (electrical) 100/1000Base-T

Ethernet i/f for local management 10/100Base-T

Serial i/f, CLI RS232

CXU_B 45 W

CXU_B1 35 W

CXU_C 30 W

117


Id:0900d8058060a3d1

5.2 Central Switch Units CXU_B2/C2/B3/B21

5.2.1 OverviewThe CXU_B2/CXU_C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21 is the central switch fabric unit. CXU is used to control the plug-in units of the shelves. CXU_B2/B3/B21 is the central switch fabric unit of hiX 5635, CXU_B3/B21 is used for hiX 5622, CXU_C2/B3/B21 is used for hiX 5630 and hiX 5625.

CXU_B2The CXU_B2 is a central switching and controlling unit of shelves M1100/M1100 2G and G1100/G1100 2G, Next figure depicts a hierarchical block diagram.

Figure 60 Interfaces of the CXU_B2

CXU_C2The CXU_C2 is a central switching and controlling unit of shelves M600, M400 and G600 2G/G600R 2G. Next figure depicts a hierarchical block diagram.

Broadband part

Controllercore


L2/L3 switchGE matrix



RS232

FE TMN

-48 V

electrical

Internalvoltages

Slot addr.

T3in

Redund.control

Clocksynchronization

SYNC

118

System Description

Id:0900d8058060a3d1


Figure 61 Interfaces of the CXU_C2

CXU_B3/CXU_B21The CXU_B3/CXU_B21 is a central switching and controlling unit of shelves M1100/M1100 2G, G1100/G1100 2G, M600, M400, G600 2G/G600R 2G, G400/G400R/G400 2G/G400R 2G and G200 2G/G200S 2G, next figure depicts a hierarchical block diagram.

Broadband part

Controllercore





RS232

FE TMN

-48 V

electrical

Internalvoltages

Slot addr.

T3in

Redund.control


SYNC

Fan controlFan alarm

Fan control out

119


Id:0900d8058060a3d1

Figure 62 Interfaces of the CXU_B3/CXU_B21

The memory size of CXU_B3/CXU_B21 is 512 Mbyte, it’s bigger than 256 Mbyte RAM of CXU_B2/C2.

CXU_B21 has extended Synchronization possibilities (Synchronous Ethernet) and is identical to CXU_B2 in other parts.

CXU_B3 also has extended Synchronization possibilities (Synchronous Ethernet and HW preparation for Timing over Packet).

The CXU_B2/CXU_C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21 consists of following functional blocks:

• Broadband partThe broadband part provides the uplink interfaces and the system internal data inter-faces to the interface units within the shelf. All internal data interfaces are based on Gigabit Ethernet. The distribution of Ethernet frames between uplink and system interfaces is provided by a Layer 2 switch.– Layer 2/3 Switch– Clocking– Uplink Interface

The uplink interface consists of up to 4 SFP modules. The uplink interface can be adapted by different SFPs on special applications. Optical SFPs for short and long haul are available, the electrical type (1000BaseT) can also be used.

• Controller Core The CXU_B2/CXU_C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21 contains the central controller function for all interface units in the shelf and for the configuration and control of the CXU_B2/CXU_C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21 on-board components.The CXU_B2/CXU_C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21 controller provides the communication to the external TMN so as the internal communication to all interface units in the

Broadband part

Controllercore





RS232

FE TMN

-48 V

electrical

Internalvoltages

Slot addr.

T3in

Redund.control


SYNC

120

System Description

Id:0900d8058060a3d1


shelf. The system internal communication is implemented as inband communication over the GE star data interface.The CXU controller core performs the following functions: • Internal communication to all shelf interface units over the GE star data interface • Central controller functions for all plug-in units in the shelf • Central SW maintenance (including SW download) for all plug-in units in the

shelf • Central HW maintenance (including reset generation, plug-in detection and

remote inventory) for all plug-in units in the shelf • Onboard configuration, maintenance and supervision for the

CXU_B2/CXU_C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21 • Connection handling for the hiX 5635/hiX 5630/hiX 5625/hiX 5622 system • Collection of remote inventory data from all shelf boards (I2C) • Initialization and configuration of all network element components • Generation and collection of external alarms • Reset generation for all plug-in units in the shelf • Protection switching control for line and plug-in unit redundancy • Collection of performance monitoring data • Onboard fault detection (online, diagnosis, routing)

• Clock synchronizationThe network timing reference clock (NTR) is derived from a receive reference clock by a synchronized counter. The reference clocks is selectable , sources are:– External synchronization interfaces (T3 or BITS1/BITS2)– Received signal at uplink port 0 (acc ITU 8261, Synchronous Ethernet networks

option). For CXU_B2/C2: received signal at uplink port 0 or port 1 can be used as synchronization source. For CXU_B21/B3: two of the four uplink ports can be chosen as synchronization source (one as primary source, the other one as sec-ondary source.)

• Power supply The power supply unit generates all internal voltages used on the board by DC/DC converting.The redundant power input of the DC/DC converter for the generation of unit internal voltages is obtained by a diode combination from the two redundant mains power supply inputs, provided by the power supply units.

In addition to above blocks, CXU_C2 has an interface to the CIU for fan control/alarm-ing. See Figure 61 Interfaces of the CXU_C2

5.2.2 Interface LayoutFigure 63 shows the LEDs and connectors of the CXU_B2/CXU_C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21 with front access design.

121


Id:0900d8058060a3d1

Figure 63 LEDs and Connectors on CXU_B2/C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B22

LED signaling is described in the following tables:

• Operating status LEDs of CXU, see Table 79 • Port status LEDs on the CXU for port1 to port 4, see Table 80 • Status LEDs on the CXU for the TMN interface (RJ45 connector 2), see Table 80 • Alarming LEDs on the CXU, see Table 81

Operating Status LEDs on CXUThe central switch unit CXU_B2/CXU_C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21 is equipped with three LEDs to indicate the operating status of the unit. The meaning of the LEDs is shown in Table 79.

Port status LEDs on CXU for port 1 to port 4CXU also uses LEDs to indicate the status of each Ethernet uplink interface (port 1 to 4). There are two LEDs for each port. These LEDs are used for line uplink information such as link integrity and traffic activity. The green LED “LNK” displays the line link status. The meaning of the LEDs is shown in Table 80

CXU_B2 - interfaces GE-optical/electrical ports 1 to 4

LED-Indication

ACT-LEDs (yellow)1)

2)

Console RS232TMN10/100Base-T

Status LEDs

SFP is not plugged

CONSOLE LINKACT Ports Port1GE-opt.- Port2 Port3 Port4

CXU

CR

ITM

AJ

MIN

PW

RR

UN

ER

R

LINK-LEDs (green)

SFP is plugged

1 2 3 4LINKACTLINKACTLINKACT LINKACT

1) The “Link” LEDs display the line link status of optical interfaces 1 to 4: Link Up -> LED ON Link Down -> LED OFF

2) The “ACT” LEDs show whether a transmit or receive activity is present on the Ethernet line. The LED function is configurable, the default setting is to drive on the LED both for receive and transmit activity presence.

power

major alarm

citical alarm

error

CXU_C2 ist running

(green)

(yellow)

(red)

(red)

(red)

(green)

Color: Meaning:

CRIT

MAJ

MIN

PWR

RUN

ERR

LED:

2 3 41

PWR(green)

RUN(green)

ERR(red)

Status




Off Loading after start-up diagnostics have been completed without an error. The RUN LED continues to blink on the pro-tection CXU until a switch-over occurs.




Table 79 CXU Operating Status LEDs

122

System Description

Id:0900d8058060a3d1


Status LEDs on CXU for the TMN interfaceThe TMN interface connector (RJ45 connector 2) includes two LEDs to indicate the status of the TMN interface. The green LED “LNK” displays the line link status. The meaning of the LEDs is shown in Table 80.

Alarm status LEDs on CXUThe alarm situation of the complete system is indicated by three LEDs on the CXU_B2/CXU_C2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21. The meaning of the LEDs is shown in Table 81.


Interface parameter



Green LNK On Link Up

Off Link Down

Yellow ACT - Indicates whether a transmit or receive activity is present on the Ethernet line.Default setting: this LED is on for receive and transmit activity.

Table 80 Status LEDs on CXU


Red CRIT On A critical alarm occurred.

Off No critical alarm reported.

Red MAJ On A major alarm occurred.

Off No major alarm reported.

Red MIN On A minor alarm occurred.

Off No minor alarm reported.

Table 81 Alarm Status LEDs on CXU


Ethernet i/f for Uplink (optical) 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX

Ethernet i/f for local management 10/100Base-T

Serial i/f, CLI RS232

CXU_B2 30,5 W

CXU_C2 27,7 W

CXU_B3 35,8 W

CXU_B21 31,0 W

123

System Description Interface Units

Id:0900d80580588505

6 Interface Units

6.1 Interface Units IU_ADSL72

6.1.1 OverviewThe interface units IU_ADSL72 are functionally located between the CXU and the external passive splitter units or connect directly to the MDF. Via splitter this enables the system to provide simultaneous POTS (Annex A) or ISDN (Annex B) with ADSL services on the same line. ADSL failure does not affect POTS and ISDN services and vice versa.

The IU_ADSL72 is available in the following variants:

Figure 64 IU_ADSL72 Interfaces

The IU_ADSL72 Annex I/J can be used in applications without POTS/ISDN services (all digital mode ADSL), i.e. without splitters. The missing narrowband services allow an extended lower transmission range for data (Annexes I and J).

Name Product number Description Network pro-cessor

ADSLtransceiver

IU_ADSL72 (-B1) Annex A S50010-M1498-B101 72 ADSL2+/ADSL2/ADSL ports POTS WintegraWinArrow 117

InfineonGeminax-D Max (V1.2)IU_ADSL72 (-B1) Annex B S50010-M1499-B101 72 ADSL2+/ADSL2/ADSL ports ISDN

IU_ADSL72-ADL (-A1) Annex I S50028-Q2038-A1 72 ADSL2+/ADSL2 splitterless application

IU_ADSL72 (-C1) Annex A S50010-M1498-C1 72 ADSL2+/ADSL2/ADSL ports POTS InfineonConverGate-D

InfineonGeminax-D Max (V1.3)IU_ADSL72 (-C1) Annex B S50010-M1499-C1 72 ADSL2+/ADSL2/ADSL ports ISDN

IU_ADSL72 (-D1) Annex A S50010-M1498-D1 72-ADSL2+/ADSL2/ADSL ports POTS InfineonGeminax-D Max (V2.1)IU_ADSL72 (-D1) Annex B S50010-M1499-D1 72-ADSL2+/ADSL2/ADSL ports POTS

IU_ADSL72 (-D1) Annex J S50028-Q2038-D1 72-ADSL2+/ADSL2 splitterless application

Table 82 IU_ADSL72 Interface Units

BackplaneExternal Interfaces

ADSLtransceiver

1

36

37

72Power supply

DC/DC converter

-48 VInternal

voltages

ADSL2+/ADSL2/ADSL

Network processor

Resetlogic

Temperat.sensor

GEaggreg.

GE star (Serdes)

from CXUControllercore

Wettingcurrent

1)1) only on IU_ADSL72-ADL

Linedriver

124

System Description

Id:0900d80580588505

Interface Units

For lightning protection, the ADSL interface unit supports the standard ITU-T K.20 (07/2003) basic level.

IU_ADSL72 Annex B plug-in units are compatible with the following ISDN line codes:

• 2B1Q • 4B3T

For IU_ADSL72 type for Annex A, the ports on the IU_ADSL72 can be configured for support of:

• ADSL functionality (ITU-T G.992.1) • ADSL2 functionality (ITU-T G.992.3) including Annex L • ADSL2+ functionality (ITU-T G.992.5)

For IU_ADSL72 type for Annex B, the ports on the IU_ADSL72 can be configured for support of:

• ADSL functionality (ITU-T G.992.1) • ADSL2 functionality (ITU-T G.992.3) • ADSL2+ functionality (ITU-T G.992.5)

For IU_ADSL72 type for Annex I/J, the ports on the IU_ADSL72 can be configured for support of:

• ADSL2 functionality (ITU-T G.992.3) • ADSL2+ functionality (ITU-T G.992.5)

ADSLUnder the ADSL standards ADSL ports can reach in downstream direction 32 kbit/s to about 8128 kbit/s data rate and 32 kbit/s to about 1300-1400 kbit/s data rate (dependent of the used modem) in upstream direction. The line rates are set with a 32 kbit/s granu-larity. The IU_ADSL72 plug-in units support an upstream rate of up to 1024 kbit/s.

ADSL2The IU_ADSL72 type for Annex A and the IU_ADSL72 type for Annex B support ADSL2 under ITU-T G.992.3 (Annex A respectively Annex B). This enables ADSL ports to reach in downstream direction 32 kbit/s to about 11,000 kbit/s data rate and 32 kbit/s to about 1500 kbit/s data rate in upstream direction. The line rates are set with a 4 kbit/s granu-larity.

Under ADSL2 the IU_ADSL72 type for Annex A also supports G.992.3 Annex L (long-reach). Annex L you can use to extend the reach of a POTS connection (in conjunction with Annex A), by increasing the PSD transmit level (dBm/Hz) and decreasing the used frequency band width. The IU_ADSL72 type for Annex A supports Annex L mode 1 and mode 2 which have different upstream band width and PSD level (mode 2 uses less band width). Annex L mode is designed for long reach only, on loop length < 4500 m (depends on noise situation) the data rate up/down is less than with Annex A mode.

Under ADSL2 the IU_ADSL72 type for Annex A also supports G.992.3 Annex M (extended upstream), mask M1 to M9. This enables ADSL ports to reach in upstream direction 32 kbit/s to about 3000 kbit/s, data rate in downstream direction stays like in Annex A mode. The line rates are set with a 4 kbit/s granularity.

The IU_ADSL72 type for Annex J supports ADSL2 under ITU-T G.992.3 Annex J (All Digital Mode). In Annex J mode the upstream band is extended and starts at 3 kHz. No splitter is used and therefore no voice band service is possible. This enables ADSL ports to reach in downstream direction 32 kbit/s to about 11,000 kbit/s data rate and 32 kbit/s

125


Id:0900d80580588505

to about 3000 kbit/s data rate in upstream direction. The line rates are set with a 4 kbit/s granularity.

ADSL2+The IU_ADSL72 type for Annex A and the IU_ADSL72 type for Annex B support ADSL2+ under ITU-T G.992.5 (Annex A respectively Annex B). This enables ADSL ports to reach in downstream direction 32 kbit/s to about 25,000 kbit/s data rate and 32 kbit/s to about 1500 kbit/s data rate in upstream direction. The line rates are set with a 8 kbit/s granularity.

The IU_ADSL72 type for Annex J supports ADSL2+ under ITU-T G.992.5 Annex J (All Digital Mode). In Annex J mode the upstream band is extended and starts at 3 kHz. No splitter is used and therefore no voice band service is possible. This enables ADSL ports to reach in downstream direction 32 kbit/s to about 25,000 kbit/s data rate and 32 kbit/s to about 3000 kbit/s data rate in upstream direction. The line rates are set with a 8 kbit/s granularity.

ADSL2 and ADSL2+ in the hiX 5622/25/30/35 implementation has the following limitations

• No support of packet mode • No support of STM mode • Only single latency path is supported (to be configurable per port if fixed or inter-

leaved mode). • No dynamic rate re partitioning

Dynamic rate re partitioning require dual latency to function.

Summary of supported ADSL modes according to the standards

Annex Valid for Brief Description and Applications

A ADSL,ADSL2,ADSL2+

ADSL full rate over POTS. It is applicable for those networks where the operator is already offering POTS service on existing copper lines.

B ADSL,ADSL2,ADSL2+

ADSL full rate over ISDN. It is applicable for those networks where the operator is already offering ISDN service on existing copper lines.

I ADSL2,ADSL2+

This annex is relevant for those ADSL2 lines which do not have the narrowband signal underneath and which shall be spectral compatible with ADSL service type Annex A. Annex I defines the “All Digital Mode ADSL” without the use of a splitter. Annex I is available only for IU_ADSL72-ADL (-A1).

J ADSL2,ADSL2+

This annex is relevant for those ADSL2 lines which do not have the narrowband signal underneath and which shall be spectral compatible with ADSL service type Annex B. Annex J defines the “All Digital Mode ADSL” without the use of a splitter.

M ADSL2 (overPOTS only)

ADSL system with extended upstream bandwidth, operating in the frequency band above POTS (EU ADSL).

L ADSL2 (overPOTS only)

This annex is called Reach Extended ADSL2 (READSL2) or Long Reach ADSL2 operating in the frequency band above POTS (RE ADSL). It is relevant only for ADSL2 over POTS service. This is applicable for very long copper loops. Annex A is optimized for higher data rates whereas Annex L is optimized for longer loops. The hardware for Annex A and Annex L is the same. The selection between the normal and long reach mode will be automatically if the service type Annex L is configured together with Annex A.

Table 83 ADSL Annexes

126

System Description

Id:0900d80580588505

Interface Units

Service mode preferencesWhen configuring an IU_ADSL72 line you can let the modem determine the service mode used according to the capabilities of the NTs. When you configure the ADSL profile, you determine which service modes are available for that profile. The available service modes are as follows:

• For ADSL functionality, IU_ADSL72 plug-in units support the following standards:– ANSI T1.413 i2– ITU-T G.992.1 Annex A non overlap (ADSL full rate over POTS)– ITU-T G.992.1 Annex B non overlap (ADSL full rate over ISDN)– ETSI ETR 328

• For ADSL2 functionality, IU_ADSL72 plug-in units support the following standard– ITU-T G.992.3 Annex A non overlap (ADSL2 full rate over POTS)– ITU-T G.992.3 Annex B non overlap (ADSL2 full rate over ISDN)– ITU-T G.992.3 Annex I non overlap (All digital mode ADSL2 over POTS)– ITU-T G.992.3 Annex J non overlap (All digital mode ADSL2 over ISDN)– ITU-T G.992.3 Annex L M1 non overlap, ADSL2 long-reach over POTS (RE

ADSL M1). – ITU-T G.992.3 Annex L M2 non overlap, reduced upstream band width ADSL2

long-reach over POTS (RE ADSL M2) • For ADSL2+ functionality, IU_ADSL72 plug-in units support the following standard:

– ITU-T G.992.5 Annex A non overlap (ADSL2+ full rate over POTS)– ITU-T G.992.5 Annex B non overlap (ADSL2+ full rate over ISDN)– ITU-T G.992.5 Annex I non overlap (All digital mode ADSL2+ over POTS)– ITU-T G.992.5 Annex J non overlap (All digital mode ADSL2+ over ISDN)

If the CPE can support multiple service modes, the service mode preferences of the IU_ADSL72 chipset take precedence.

6.1.2 Interface LayoutFigure 65 shows the LEDs and connectors of the IU_ADSL72 with front access design.

Figure 65 LEDs and Connectors on IU_ADSL72

The interface unit IU_ADSL72 is equipped with three LEDs to indicate the operating status of the unit. The meaning of the LEDs is shown in Table 84.

127


Id:0900d80580588505


Interface parameter

6.2 Interface Unit IU_ADSL48

6.2.1 OverviewThe interface units IU_ADSL48 are functionally located between the CXU and the external passive splitter units or connect directly to the MDF. Via splitter units this enables the system to provide simultaneous POTS (Annex A) with ADSL services on the same line. ADSL failure does not affect POTS services and vice versa.

The IU_ADSL48 is available for Annex A

The ports on the IU_ADSL48 (ADSL2+) can be configured for support of:

• ADSL functionality (ITU-T G.992.1) Annex A • ADSL2 functionality (ITU-T G.992.3) Annex A • ADSL2+ functionality (ITU-T G.992.5) Annex A

PWR (green) RUN (green) ERR (red) Status

On On Off IU_ADSL72 is active and is not reporting any errors.

On IU_ADSL72 is active, but there is a hardware fault in IU_ADSL72.

Flashing Off IU_ADSL72 is starting up (startup phase).

Off Off IU_ADSL72 is locked.

Off Off Off IU_ADSL72 has no power.

Table 84 IU_ADSL72 Operating Status LEDs


Nominal impedance 100 Ω

Latency per port: fixed or interleaved mode


IU_ADSL72 S50010-M1498-B101 108 W

IU_ADSL72 S50010-M1499-B101 105 W

IU_ADSL72 S50010-M1498-C1 99 W

IU_ADSL72 S50010-M1499-C1 96 W

IU_ADSL72 S50010-M1498-D1 86 W

IU_ADSL72 S50010-M1499-D1 89 W

IU_ADSL72 S50028-Q2038-A1 109 W

IU_ADSL72 S50028-Q2038-D1 87 W

128

System Description

Id:0900d80580588505

Interface Units

ADSL2+ is provided for compatibility with ADSL2 and ADSL.

ADSLUnder the ADSL standards ADSL ports can reach in downstream direction 32 kbit/s to 8160 kbit/s data rate and 32 kbit/s to 896 kbit/s data rate in upstream direction. The line rates are set with a 32 kbit/s granularity. The IU_ADSL48 plug-in units support an upstream rate of up to 1024 kbit/s.

ADSL2The IU_ADSL48 plug-in units support ADSL2 under ITU-T G.992.3 Annex A. This enables ADSL ports to reach in downstream direction 32 kbit/s to 11,000 kbit/s data rate and 32 kbit/s to 1500 kbit/s data rate in upstream direction. The line rates are set with a 4 kbit/s granularity.

ADSL2+The IU_ADSL48 plug-in units support ADSL2+ under ITU-T G.992.5 Annex A. This enables ADSL ports to reach in downstream direction 32 kbit/s to about 25,000 kbit/s data rate and 32 kbit/s to 1024 kbit/s data rate in upstream direction. The line rates are set with a 8 kbit/s granularity.

ADSL2 and ADSL2+ in the hiX 5622/25/30/35 implementation has the following limitations

• No support of packet mode • No support of STM mode • Only single latency path is supported (to be configurable per port if fixed or inter-

leaved mode). • No dynamic rate repartitioning

Dynamic rate repartitioning require dual latency to function. • No support of all digital mode

Summary of supported ADSL modes according to the standards

Service mode preferencesWhen configuring an IU_ADSL48 line you can let the modem determine the service mode used according to the capabilities of the NTs. When you configure the ADSL profile, you determine which service modes are available for that profile.

The available service modes are as follows:

• For ADSL functionality, IU_ADSL48 plug-in units support the following standards:– ANSI T1.413– ITU-T G.992.1 Annex A non overlap (ADSL full rate over POTS)– ETSI ETR 328

• For ADSL2 functionality, IU_ADSL48 plug-in units support the following standard:– ITU-T G.992.3 Annex A non overlap (ADSL2 full rate over POTS)

Annex Valid for Brief Description and Applications

A ADSL,ADSL2,ADSL2+

ADSL full rate over POTS. It is applicable for those networks where the operator is already offering POTS service on existing copper lines.

Table 85 ADSL Annexes

129


Id:0900d80580588505

• For ADSL2+ functionality, IU_ADSL48 plug-in units support the following standard:– ITU-T G.992.5 Annex A non overlap (ADSL2+ full rate over POTS)

If the CPE can support multiple service modes, the service mode preferences of the IU_ADSL48 chipset take precedence.

6.2.2 Interface LayoutFigure 66 shows the LEDs and connectors of the IU_ADSL48 with front access design.

Figure 66 LEDs and Connectors on IU_ADSL48

The interface unit IU_ADSL48 is equipped with three LEDs to indicate the operating status of the unit. The meaning of the LEDs is shown in Table 86.


Interface parameter


On On Off IU_ADSL48 is active and is not reporting any errors.

On IU_ADSL48 is active, but there is a hardware fault in IU_ADSL48.

Flashing Off IU_ADSL48 is starting up (startup phase).

Off Off IU_ADSL48 is locked.

Off Off Off IU_ADSL48 has no power.

Table 86 IU_ADSL48 Operating Status LEDs



Latency per port: fixed or interleaved mode


130

System Description

Id:0900d80580588505

Interface Units

6.3 Interface Units IU_VDSL24, IU_VDSL24P, IU_VDSL48P and IU_VDSL48I

6.3.1 OverviewThe IU_VDSL24 and IU_VDSL24P are interface units which support 24 VDSL2 ports each, and can be configured also to operate in ADSL2+ mode. The IU_VDSL48P and IU_VDSL48I are interface units which support 48 VDSL2 ports each, and can be configured also to operate in ADSL2+ mode. The IU_VDSL24 and the IU_VDSL48I can be connected to a splitter unit to additionally transfer ISDN services via the subscriber line. The IU_VDSL24P and IU_VDSL48P can be used to additionally transfer POTS services.

The IU_VDSL24 and the IU_VDSL48I support VDSL2/ADSL2+ over ISDN profiles for each port, the IU_VDSL24P and IU_VDSL48P can be configured with VDSL2/ADSL2+ over POTS profiles.

The following table summarizes the different operating modes:

Interface Unit Product number Operating Mode

IU_VDSL24 (-A3) S50028-Q2028-A3 VDSL2 in accordance with ITU-G.993.2 Annex B

ADSL2+ in accordance with ITU-G.992.5 Annex B (ADSL2+ over ISDN)

IU_VDSL24P (-A1) S50028-Q2027-A1 VDSL2 in accordance with ITU-G.993.2 Annex A and Annex B

ADSL2+ in accordance with ITU-G.992.5 Annex A (ADSL2+ over POTS)

IU_VDSL48P (-A1) S50028-Q2066-A1 VDSL2 in accordance with ITU-G.993.2 Annex A and Annex B

ADSL2+ in accordance with ITU-G.992.5 Annex A (ADSL2+ over POTS)

IU_VDSL48I (-A2) S50028-Q2067-A2 VDSL2 in accordance with ITU-G.993.2 Annex B

ADSL2+ in accordance with ITU-G.992.5 Annex B (ADSL2+ over ISDN)

Table 87 IU_VDSL24/IU_VDSL24P/IU_VDSL48P/IU_VDSL48I Operating Modes

131


Id:0900d80580588505

Figure 67 IU_VDSL24/IU_VDSL24P Interfaces

Figure 68 IU_VDSL48P/IU_VDSL48I Interfaces

The VDSL2/ADSL2+ interfaces of IU_VDSL24 can be used for simultaneous transmis-sion of ISDN services with line codes: • 4B3T • 2B1Q.

If the CPE supports multiple operating modes, the operating mode set by the profile configured in the DSLAM has priority.

There are the following splitter units available:– SPT-24-4B3T (S50028-Q2057-A1)

Combo-splitter used both for the narrowband service, ISDN 4B3T, and for analog telephony, POTS (with complex impedance based on the German standard)

– SPT-24-ISDN (S50028-Q6000-A1) used for ISDN services with 2B1Q


VDSL2transceiver

Network processor

1

24 Power supplyDC/DC converter

-48 VInternal

voltages

VDSL2/ADSL2+1)

Resetlogic

Temperat.sensor

GEaggreg.

GE star (Serdes)


(Infineon Convergate-D)

(Infineon

Linedriver

Vinax 1.4)

1) no ADSL2+ on -A2


VDSL2transceiver

Network processor

1

48 Power supplyDC/DC converter

-48 VInternal

voltages

VDSL2/ADSL2+1)

Resetlogic

Temperat.sensor

GEaggreg.

GE star (Serdes)


(Infineon Convergate-D)

(Infineon

Linedriver

Vinax 2.2)

132

System Description

Id:0900d80580588505

Interface Units

– SPT-24-POTS-600 (S50028-Q6001-A1) used for POTS services with impedance of 600 Ohm

– SPT-24-POTS-ETSI (S50028-Q6002-A1) used for POTS services with complex impedance of 270 Ohm + 750 Ohm || 150 nF 2)

VDSL2 profiles:

The IU_VDSL24/IU_VDSL24P/IU_VDSL48P/IU_VDSL48I provides the following functions:

• Provision of 24 resp. 48 VDSL2 interfaces • Bandplan Annex A 998 D-32/EU32 or D-64/EU64, profile 8b and profile 17a 1)

• Bandplan Annex B 997 (B7-5), profile 8a for IU_VDSL24P (-A1) 1)

• Bandplan Annex B 998 (B8-6), profile 8b, and (B8-12), profile 17a 1)

• PSD shaping • RFI bands (up to 16 RFI bands at once, preconfigured or freely programmable) • Power reduction (upstream and downstream) • Adjustable minimum impulse noise protection (INP) • Adjustable maximum delay • Bitrate granularity (in accordance with standard, 8 kbit/s)

The main components of the unit are the VDSL2 modem, Ethernet switch and module controller. The Ethernet switch consolidates the data traffic of the 24/48 ports for transmission via the GE star architecture to the CXU. The module controller performs initialization, configuration and monitoring of all components involved in data transmission, and also provides for the management interface to CXU.

ADSL2+ profilesIn ADSL2+ in accordance with ITU-T G.992.5 Annex A and B, the downstream data rates for the ADSL2+ ports are between 32 kbit/s and approx. 25,000 kbit/s, while the upstream data rates are between 32 kbit/s and 1,500 kbit/s.

The following restrictions apply to ADSL2+ in the hiX 5622/25/30/35 implementation:

• Packet mode is not supported. • STM mode is not supported. • Only a single latency path is supported. • No dynamic rate adaptation during live operation (SRA). • No dynamic rate repartitioning.

Rate repartitioning is only necessary in the case of dual latency. • No customer-specific PSD shaping and transmit power control. • Only RFI bands based on WT-100 are supported (no free programming). • No low-power mode.

1) Further bandplans and profiles on demand.

2) Further splitter units on demand, only splitter units with decoupling capacitors allowed.

133


Id:0900d80580588505

6.3.2 Interface LayoutThe interface unit is equipped with three LEDs to indicate the operating status of the unit. The meaning of the LEDs is shown in the following table:

The following figures show the LEDs and connectors of the IU_VDSL24, IU_VDSL24P, IU_VDSL48P and IU_VDSL48I:

Figure 69 LEDs and Connectors on IU_VDSL24/IU_VDSL24P


On On Off Interface unit is active and is not reporting any errors.

On Interface unit is active, but there is a hardware fault in the interface unit.

Flashing Off Interface unit is starting up (startup phase).

Off Off Interface unit is locked.

Off Off Off Interface unit has no power.

Table 88 IU_VDSL24/IU_VDSL24P/IU_VDSL48P/IU_VDSL48I Operating Status LEDs

IUVDSL_24

PWRRUNERR

LINE

1 - 24

ABC

X104

1

134

System Description

Id:0900d80580588505

Interface Units

Figure 70 LEDs and Connectors on IU_VDSL48P/IU_VDSL48I

IUVDSL_48

PWRRUNERR

LINE

1 - 24

ABC

X104

1

LINE

25- 48

ABC

X105

1

135


Id:0900d80580588505

6.3.3 Technical DataInterface parameter (S50028-Q2028-A3 and S50028-Q2027-A1)

Interface parameter (S50028-Q2067-A2 and S50028-Q2066-A1)

Physical layout


Standard Configurable per port:

S50028-Q2028-A3 • VDSL2 in accordance with ITU-T G.993.2, bandplan 998 Annex B profile 8b (B8-6) and profile 17a (B8-12) 1)

• ADSL2+ in acc. with ITU-T G.992.5 Annex B

S50028-Q2027-A1 • VDSL2 in accordance with ITU-T G.993.2- bandplan 998 Annex B profiles 8b (B8-6) and

17a (B8-12) 1)

- bandplan 997 Annex B (B7-5) 1)

• ADSL2+ in acc. with ITU-T G.992.5 Annex A

Terminating resistor 100 ohms

Max. power consumption 76 W

Standard Configurable per port:

S50028-Q2067-A2 • VDSL2 in accordance with ITU-T G.993.2, bandplan 998 Annex B profile 8b (B8-6) and profile 17a (B8-12) 1)

• ADSL2+ in acc. with ITU-T G.992.5 Annex B

S50028-Q2066-A1 • VDSL2 in accordance with ITU-T G.993.2,– bandplan 998 Annex A D-32/EU32 or

D-64/EU64, profile 8a and profile 17a 1)

– bandplan 998 Annex B profile 8b (B8-6) and profile 17a (B8-12) 1)

• ADSL2+ in acc. with ITU-T G.992.5 Annex A

Terminating resistor 100 ohms

Max. power consumption 110 W


136

System Description

Id:0900d80580588505

Interface Units

6.4 Interface Units IU_SHDSL48

6.4.1 OverviewThe IU_SHDSL48 (-A1), IU_SHDSL48 (-A2) and IU_SHDSL48 (-A4) are 48-port SHDSL interface units which provide up to 48 SHDSL subscriber interfaces. They support both standards, the G.SHDSL (ITU-T G.991.2, 2001) and (ITU-T G.991.2, 2004). The traffic on the SHDSL links is terminated and aggregated on a GE (Gigabit Ethernet) uplink.

The following table gives an overview of the IU_SHDSL48 interface units:

Both IU_SHDSL48 provide the wetting current feature. In order to prevent corrosion of the wire, especially at locations where the wires are spliced, wetting current is fed into the line. Wetting current is a small DC current in the range up to 3 mA. It flows from a central current source on the IU_SHDSL48 to the CPE via the line and back to the IU_SHDSL48. The central current source can be switched on or off.

The IU_SHDSL48 consists of the following components:

• Microcontroller with flash EPROM and SDRAM • DC/DC converter • Clock unit • EEPROM • Reset logic • LEDs

Name Product number Description Network pro-cessor

SHDSLtransceiver

IU_SHDSL48 (-A1) S50028-Q2029-A1 48-port SHDSL.bis, bonding, bis and wetting current Connexant Columbia

Connexant G24

IU_SHDSL48 (-A2) S50028-Q2029-A2 48-port SHDSL, ITU-T G.991.2, 2004Annex A/B: Standard Mode ANSI/ETSI for 2.3 MbpsAnnex F/G: Enhanced Mode ANSI/ETSI for 5.7 Mbps (enhanced bit rate and power)SHDSL.bisSimultaneous support of 2-wire and 4-wire4 queues per port

Convergate-D Socrates

IU_SHDSL48 (-A4) S50028-Q2029-A4 48-port SHDSL, ITU-T G.991.2, 2004Annex A/B: Standard Mode ANSI/ETSI for 2.3 MbpsAnnex F/G: Enhanced Mode ANSI/ETSI for 5.7 Mbps (enhanced bit rate and power)SHDSL.bisSimultaneous support of 2-wire and 4-wire8 queues per port

Convergate-D Socrates

Table 89 IU_SHDSL48 Interface Units

137


Id:0900d80580588505

Figure 71 IU_SHDSL48 Interfaces

The SHDSL interface units support 2- and 4-wire mode according G.991.2 and M-pair mode with 1 and 2 pairs according G.991.2.

The IU_SHDSL48 (-A2)/IU_SHDSL48 (-A4) supports additionally:– ATM and EFM transport with up to 5.7 Mbps per line with non blocking aggregation

to system side, – N-wire / M-pair mode (N-wire / M-pair bonding with grouping up to 8 wires / 4 pairs)

for the transmission protocol ATM (corresponding to G.991.2), – Ethernet based multi-pair bonding (EFM bonding G.Bond/G.998.2) with up to

8 wires / 4 pairs for EFM (corresponding to G.998.2 / IEEE 802.3ah), – Synchronous clock distribution via SHDSL link (NTR), e.g. for mobile backhaul appli-

cations.

g Note: For configuring 4-wire and M-pair mode there have to be considered the rules related to the interface unit. IU_SHDSL48 (-A1) 2- to 4-wire, 1 to 2 pairs IU_SHDSL48 (-A2) 2- to 8-wire, 1 to 4 pairs IU_SHDSL48 (-A4) 2- to 8-wire, 1 to 4 pairs

6.4.2 EFM Bonding (G.Bond/G.998.2) for IU_SHDSL48 (-A2) and IU_SHDSL48 (-A4)EFM bonding of two, three or four copper pairs is supported on the IU_SHDSL48 (-A2) and the IU_SHDSL48 (-A4). EFM bonding is specified in ITU G.998.2 (which is based on IEEE802.3ah). With this bonding, a SHDSL.bis connection consisting of 4 copper pairs supports up to 22.4 Mbit/s total throughput.

Due to technical reasons only neighboring ports (that are connected to the same DSL chip) can be bonded.

g Note: The SHDSL PTM mode uses HDLC encapsulation of transported packets. For EFM bonding Clause 61.3.3 of 802.3ah-2004 specifies 64/65-octed encapsulation. The


SHDSLtransceiver

Network processor


-48 VInternal

voltages

SHDSL.bis/SHDSL

Resetlogic

Temperat.sensor

GEaggreg.

GE star (Serdes)


Wettingcurrent

1

24

25

48

138

System Description

Id:0900d80580588505

Interface Units

G.998.2 Recommendation is used in combination with the 64/65-octed encapsula-tion PTM-TC as defined in the DSL transceiver Recommendations G.991.2.

For the support of Mobile Backhauling or other business customer scenarios an Ethernet over Copper Service (EoC) is required. The EFM bonding is the most practical way to achieve a higher bandwidth than 5.7 Mbit/s available on a single copper pair. It provides a higher bandwidth efficiency for IP/Ethernet transport compared to the also available ATM mode with its M-pair bonding, because the ATM/AAL5 overhead can be avoided.

6.4.3 Interface LayoutFigure 72 shows the LEDs and connectors of the IU_SHDSL48 with front access design.

Figure 72 LEDs and Connectors on IU_SHDSL48

The interface unit IU_SHDSL48 is equipped with three LEDs to indicate the operating status of the unit. The meaning of the LEDs is shown in Table 90.

6.4.4 Technical DataPhysical Layout

Interface Parameter

PWR(green)

RUN(green)

ERR(red)

Status




Off Loading after start-up diagnostics have been completed without an error.




Table 90 IU_SHDSL48 Operating Status LEDs

Dimensions (W x H x D): 25 mm x 390 mm x 235 mm

References ETSI TS 101 524 [82] and ITU-T G.991.2 [53]

139


Id:0900d80580588505

Standards G.SHDSL (ITU-T G.991.2, 2001) and (ITU-T G.991.2, 2004)Annex A/B: Standard Mode ANSI/ETSI for data rates up to 2.3 MbpsAnnex F/G: Enhanced Mode ANSI/ETSI for data rates up to 5.7 Mbps (enhanced bit rate)

Physical line codes TC-PAM16 / UC-PAM16 / UC-PAM32


Payload data rate Annex A/B: 192 kbit/s to 2304 kbit/s (TC-PAM16) Annex F/G: > 2304 - 3840 kbit/s (UC-PAM16), 768 kbit/s to 5696 kbit/s (UC-PAM32)

The line rates are set with 64 kbit/s granularity (when using ATM-TC layer or ETH-TC).

Payload data rate range: n x 64 kbit/s + i x 8 kbit/s, with n= 3 to 89 and i = 0 -> 192 kbit/s - 5698 kbit/s.

In 4-wire mode: maximum payload data rate is 2 x 5696 kbit/s.In M-pair mode: maximum payload data rate is 2 x 5696 kbit/s for IU_SHDSL48 (-A1) 4 x 5696 kbit/s for IU_SHDSL48 (-A2) and 4 x 5696 kbit/s for IU_SHDSL48 (-A4).

SHDSL bonding Ethernet based multi pair bonding according to G.998.2 (2004), IEEE 802.3ah with IU_SHDSL48 (-A2)/IU_SHDSL48 (-A4) up to 4 pairs (maximum payload data rate = 4 x 5696 kbit/s)

Line range 3.0 km (TC-PAM16) 700 m at 5696 kbit/s with 49 SHDSL SELF NEXT PAM32 1.9 km at 2304 kbit/s with 49 SHDSL SELF NEXT on PE 0.4

Wetting current up to 3.3 mA

Max Power ConsumptionIU_SHDSL48 (-A1)

with wetting currentIU_SHDSL48 (-A2) tIU_SHDSL48 (-A4)

75 Wadditional about 5 W56 W56 W

140

System Description

Id:0900d80580588505

Interface Units

6.5 Interface Unit IU_10x1G

6.5.1 OverviewThe IU_10x1G interface unit provides downlink connections of up to 10 x 1 Gbps or 10 x 100 Mbps Ethernet interfaces via single-mode fiber. The Ethernet interfaces are realized by using SFP modules.

The upstream port is connected through the broadband backplane to the CXU. It provides a 10-Gbps interface.

The IU_10x1G interface unit fulfills the following functions: • Providing 10 x 1-Gbps/100-Mbps Ethernet downlink interfaces • Pluggable modules to adapt the interfaces to the transmission conditions • Communication with the CXU via an inband Ethernet management channel • Board maintenance (e.g. temperature management) • Support of layer-2 switch operation • Support of LAG groups • Support of IGMP snooping function and independent VLAN learning • Reset control triggered by

– CXU (external reset)– Power supply block (power-on reset)– SW command (warm start).

• I2C interface to provide remote inventory data to the CXU, stored in an serial EEPROM on the IU_10x1G, and to receive additional information about the CXU.

Ethernet Downlink InterfacesThe IU_10x1G board holds 10 optical 1-Gbps/100-Mbps Ethernet interfaces. SFP modules are available for optical transmission via single mode fiber.

All internal data interfaces are based on 10-Gbps interface. The 10-Gbps is the system internal data interface implemented as point-to-point links between the CXU and the interface units.

I2C

DC

BackplaneExternal interfaces

GE/10GE

LEDs

10 x downlinks1000Base-X optical/

control

100Base-X optical

141


Id:0900d80580588505

The Ethernet switch concentrates the received packets at the 10 x 1-Gbps interfaces in upstream direction and distributes the received data to the 10 x 1-Gbps interfaces in downstream direction.

Power SupplyThe unit can be supplied with a voltage in the range of −40.5 V to −72 V. The internal DC/DC power supply with two power inputs provides all necessary voltages for the board. The redundant power inputs MUP1 and MUP2 are decoupled by rectifiers.

Operating Status LEDsThe interface unit is equipped with 3 LEDs to indicate the operating status of the unit.

6.5.2 Interface LayoutFigure 73 shows the LEDs and connectors of the IU_10x1G.

PWR (green)

RUN(green)

ERR (red)

Status


Off The unit is active and reports no errors.


Off Loading after start-up diagnostics has been completed without an error.




Table 91 IU_10x1G Operating Status LEDs

142

System Description

Id:0900d80580588505

Interface Units

Figure 73 LEDs and Connectors on IU_10x1G


6.5.3.1 1-Gbps Ethernet Interface Optical

PWRRUNERR

IU_10x1G

Operating status LEDs

TXRX

TX

TX

RX

RX

RX

TX

7

8

9

10

TXRX

TX

TX

RX

RX

RX

TX

3

4

5

6

Connectors10 x 1-Gbps downlinks

TXRX

TXRX

1

2G

E

Type depending on used SFP moduleMax. number of SFP modulesInterface per SFP module

1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX101

1000Base-SX

Standard compliance IEEE 802.3z

Transmission mode full-duplex

Laser type class 1

Transmitter wavelength 770 nm to 860 nm

Transmission distancewith 62.5 μ m fiberwith 50 μ m fiber

300 m550 m

Path attenuation 7.5 dB

Output power range, average −9.5 dBm ±4 dBm

143


Id:0900d80580588505

6.5.3.2 100-Mbps Ethernet Interface Optical

Input sensitivityminimumtypical

−17 dBm−20 dBm

Connector LC

Cable type 62.5/125 μ m or 50/125 μ m multimode

1000Base-LX

Standard compliance IEEE 802.3z


Laser type class 1


Transmission distance 10 km

Path attenuation 10.5 dB

Output power range, average −9.5 dBm ±3 dBm

Input sensitivity, minimum −20 dBm

Connector LC

Cable type 9.5/125 μ m single mode

1000Base-ZX

Standard compliance Cisco


Laser type class 1

Transmitter wavelength 1550 nm


Path attenuation 23 dB

Output power range, average 0 dBm to 5 dBm

Input sensitivity, minimum −20 dBm to −23 dBm

Connector LC

Cable type 9/10 μ m single mode

Type depending on used SFP module

Max. number of SFP modulesInterface per SFP module

100Base-FX Transceiver with SGMII interface101

100Base-FX (2 km)

Standard compliance IEEE 802.3-2002


144

System Description

Id:0900d80580588505

Interface Units

6.5.3.3 Power Supply and Power Consumption

Laser type class 1


Transmission distancewith 62.5 μ m fiberwith 50 μ m fiber

2 km2 km

Extinction ratio 9 dB

Output power range, average −20 dBm ... -14 dBm

Input sensitivitymaximal −31.5 dBm

Connector LC

Cable type 62.5/125 μ m or 50/125 μ m multimode

100Base-FX (10 km)

Standard compliance IEEE 802.3ah-2004


Laser type class 1



Extinction ratio 9 dB

Output power range, average −15 dBm ... -8 dBm

Input sensitivity, minimum −31.5 dBm

Connector LC

Cable type 9.5/125 μ m single mode

Input power −40.5 V to −72 V

Depending on interface usageMax. power consumption about 55 W

Max. power dissipation, about 55 W

145

System Description Common Interface Unit (CIUG for M400/M600)

Id:0900d8058025f140

7 Common Interface Unit (CIUG for M400/M600)The M400/M600 shelf is equipped with a common interface unit with guarded input (CIUG).

The CIUG consists of three parts:

• Main power supply with EMC filter and incorrect polarity protection • Temperature-regulated fan control • Alarm interface

The following figure shows the front view of the CIUG with the external interfaces.

Figure 74 External Interfaces of the CIUG

The following table shows the individual interface functions:

7.1 Technical DataPhysical layout

MASTER

MTA-CTRLSLAVE(-) (+)

48/60Vmax.30A

CIUG - common interface unit (S50028-Q2063-A2)

ALM_IN ALM_OUT TAP/MTA_M/MTA_S/MTA_CCIU

G

PWR_A PWR_B T3

Test access point

Alarm out,1 to 3

Alarm in, 5 to 8Alarm in, 1 to 4

not supported

(-) (+)48/60V

max.30ALeft handle Right handle

Ports Name Connector Type

Description

1 T3 RJ45 Not supported.

2 ALM_IN 1 to 4

RJ45 Port for connecting external alarms (alarm inputs 1 to 8) Alarm information is switched to the CXU over the IC bus.

3 ALM_IN5 to 8

RJ45

4 ALM_OUT RJ45 Port for outputting internal alarms (alarm outputs 1 to 3). This interface provides internal system alarm signals for sig-naling via external alarm devices.

5 TAP RJ45 Interface to the internal test bus to connect external measurement equipment for testing interface units.

6 MTA_M RJ45 MTA master port (MTA_M). Interface for master control signals for the MTA line test.

7 MTA_S RJ45 MTA slave port (MTA_S)Interface for slave control signals for the MTA line test.

8 MTA_C RJ45 MTA port for relay switching (MTA_C)Interface for controlling external relay switching unit (RSU).

Table 92 External CIUG Interfaces

Dimensions ( W x H x D) 25 mm x 390 mm x 235 mm

146

System Description

Id:0900d8058025f140

Common Interface Unit (CIUG for M400/M600)

Power consumption

Power dissipation

7.2 CIUG-A3CIUG_A3 is the new introduced CIU for hiX5625 and hiX5630 with fan control for 12V fans, it has reduced feature set for rural applications. Compared with normal CIU_G, it has only one power access connector on front panel.

!The fan unit is powered by the CIUG. As a result, the power consumption of the fan unit is already included in the power con-sumption quoted for the CIUG.

Power consumption by the CIUG in M400 (including the power consumption of the fan unit)

Fan with minimum speed: 11 W Fan with maximum speed: 17 W

Power consumption by the CIUG in M600 (including the power consumption of the fan unit)

Fan with minimum speed: 12 W Fan with maximum speed: 25 W

Power dissipation of the CIUG <=5 W

147

System Description Power Modules

Id:0900d805805f1b0b

8 Power Modules

8.1 PM_1

Figure 75 Connectors on the PM_1

The power module PM_1 contains a power supply connector (connector type Sub-D 3W3), see Figure 76, and a RJ-45 connector, see Figure 77.

Power Supply Connector (3W3):

Figure 76 PM_1 Power Supply Connector

RJ-45 Connector Assignment:


The RJ45 connector assignment is shown in Table 94.



A1 - Not connected -

A2 M48V1 Negative input voltage 48 to 60 V DC voltage max. 40 A

A3 P48V1 Return of negative input voltage


Table 93 PM_1 Power Supply 3W3 Connectors

(+)(-

)

A1 A2 A3

(−) (+)48V/60V

max. 40A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

148

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1b0b

Power Modules

Pin RJ45 connector “T3”

1 T3_a

2 T3_b

3 -

4 -

5 T3_a

6 T3_b

7 -

8 -

Table 94 PM_1 RJ45 Connector

149


Id:0900d805805f1b0b

8.2 PM_UPL

Figure 78 Power Module PM_UPL

The power module PM_UPL contains a power supply connector (connector type Sub-D 3W3), see Figure 79, and RJ-45 connectors, see Figure 80.

150

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1b0b

Power Modules


Figure 79 PM_UPL Power Supply Connector



The RJ45 connector assignment is shown in Table 96 to Table 102.




A2 M48V2 Negative input voltage 48 to 60 V DC voltage max. 40 A 1)

A3 P48V2 Return of negative input voltage Connected to GND_S outside of the shelf on the fuse panel.

1) The power module can be equipped in different shelves. Therefore the power module has the same maximal current consumption like the shelf with the highest current consumption. The current consumption of the other shelves is less then the power module.

Table 95 PM_UPL Power Supply 3W3 Connectors

Pin Signal

1 ALARM_IN1

2 ALARM_IN2

3 ALARM_IN3

4 ALARM_IN4

5 -

6 -

7 -

8 GND

Table 96 External Alarm Inputs Connector #1 on PM_UPL

A1 A2 A3

(−) (+)48V/60V

max. 40A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

151


Id:0900d805805f1b0b

Pin Signal

1 ALARM_IN5

2 ALARM_IN6

3 ALARM_IN7

4 ALARM_IN8

5 -

6 -

7 -

8 GND

Table 97 External Alarm Inputs Connector #2 on PM_UPL

Pin Signal

1 ALARM_OUT1_A

2 ALARM_OUT1_B

3 ALARM_OUT2_A

4 ALARM_OUT2_B

5 ALARM_OUT3_A

6 ALARM_OUT3_B

7 -

8 GND

Table 98 Potential Free Two-pin Alarm Output Connector on PM_UPL

Pin Signal

1 TAP_A

2 TAP_B

3 -

4 -

5 -

6 -

7 -

8 -

Table 99 Test Bus Connector on PM_UPL

Pin Signal

1 CON1_M

2 CON2_M

Table 100 MTA Master Connector on PM_UPL

152

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1b0b

Power Modules

8.3 PM_1R 2G

Figure 81 Connectors on the PM_1R 2G

3 MTA_CTRL_M_TXD

4 GND

5 GND

6 MTA_CTRL_M_RXD

7 CON2_M

8 CON1_M

Pin Signal

1 CON1_S

2 CON2_S

3 MTA_CTRL_S_TXD

4 GND

5 GND

6 MTA_CTRL_S_RXD

7 CON2_S

8 CON1_S

Table 101 MTA Slave Connector on PM_UPL

Pin Signal

1 CON1_RSU

2 CON2_RSU

3 RSU_CTRL_TXD

4 GND

5 GND

6 RSU_CTRL_RXD

7 CON2_RSU

8 CON1_RSU

Table 102 Relay Switching Unit Control Connector on PM_UPL

Pin Signal

Table 100 MTA Master Connector on PM_UPL (Cont.)

(+)(-

)

153


Id:0900d805805f1b0b

The power module PM_1R 2G contains a power supply connector (connector type Sub-D 3W3), see Figure 82.


Figure 82 PM_1R 2G Power Supply Connector




A2 M48V1 Negative input voltage 48 to 60 V DC voltage max. 40 A / 8 A 1)



Table 103 PM_1R 2G Power Supply 3W3 Connectors

A1 A2 A3

(−) (+)48V/60V

max. 40A

154

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1b0b

Power Modules

8.4 PM_UPL 2G

Figure 83 Power Module PM_UPL 2G

The power module PM_UPL 2G contains a power supply connector (connector type Sub-D 3W3), see Figure 84, and RJ-45 connectors, see Figure 85.

155


Id:0900d805805f1b0b

Power Supply Connector (3W):

Figure 84 PM_UPL 2G Power Supply Connector



The RJ45 connector assignment is shown in Table 105 to Table 111







Table 104 PM_UPL 2G Power Supply 3W3 Connectors

Pin Signal

1 ALARM_IN1

2 ALARM_IN2

3 ALARM_IN3

4 ALARM_IN4

5 -

6 -

7 -

8 GND

Table 105 External Alarm Inputs Connector #1 on PM_UPL 2G

A1 A2 A3

(−) (+)48V/60V

max. 40A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

156

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1b0b

Power Modules

Pin Signal

1 ALARM_IN5

2 ALARM_IN6

3 ALARM_IN7

4 ALARM_IN8

5 -

6 -

7 -

8 GND

Table 106 External Alarm Inputs Connector #2 on PM_UPL 2G

Pin Signal

1 ALARM_OUT1_A

2 ALARM_OUT1_B

3 ALARM_OUT2_A

4 ALARM_OUT2_B

5 ALARM_OUT3_A

6 ALARM_OUT3_B

7 -

8 GND

Table 107 Potential Free Two-pin Alarm Output Connector on PM_UPL 2G

Pin Signal

1 TAP_A

2 TAP_B

3 -

4 -

5 -

6 -

7 -

8 -

Table 108 Test Bus Connector on PM_UPL 2G

Pin Signal

1 CON1_M

2 CON2_M

Table 109 MTA Master Connector on PM_UPL 2G

157


Id:0900d805805f1b0b

3 MTA_CTRL_M_TXD

4 GND

5 GND

6 MTA_CTRL_M_RXD

7 CON2_M

8 CON1_M

Pin Signal

1 CON1_S

2 CON2_S

3 MTA_CTRL_S_TXD

4 GND

5 GND

6 MTA_CTRL_S_RXD

7 CON2_S

8 CON1_S

Table 110 MTA Slave Connector on PM_UPL 2G

Pin Signal

1 CON1_RSU

2 CON2_RSU

3 RSU_CTRL_TXD

4 GND

5 GND

6 RSU_CTRL_RXD

7 CON2_RSU

8 CON1_RSU

Table 111 Relay Switching Unit Control Connector on PM_UPL 2G

Pin Signal

Table 109 MTA Master Connector on PM_UPL 2G (Cont.)

158

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1b0b

Power Modules

8.5 PM_ONU 2G

Figure 86 Power Module PM_ONU 2G

The power module PM_ONU 2G has a microprocessor to realize fan management, HEX control and the alarm-collector (ALCO) management. The update/upgrade of the controller software is described in the commissioning manual.

The PM_ONU 2G contains a power supply connector (connector type Sub-D 3W3), see Figure 87, and RJ-45 connectors, see Figure 88.

Power Supply Connector (3W):

Figure 87 PM_ONU 2G Power Supply Connector









Table 112 PM_ONU 2G Power Supply 3W3 Connectors

Test bus

Environment sensorAlarm interface

Power supply 48/60 V/max.40 AEthernet switch

I2C Heat exchanger

CLI console

CLK2 CLK1PWMSync. clock

A1 A2 A3

(−) (+)48V/60V

max. 40A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

159


Id:0900d805805f1b0b

The RJ45 connector assignment is shown in Table 105 to Table 111

• External Clock Interfaces “CLK1” and “CLK2”:

• Using the connector “CLI” (Command Line Interface), a TL1 (transaction language one) over RS232 controlling interface to the CLI may be accessed for outband connection. It is connected internally to the CXU.

Pin Signal

1 BITS1_A

2 BITS1_B

3 -

4 -

5 -

6 -

7 -

8 -

Table 113 External Clock Interface Connector “CLK1” on PM_ONU 2G

Pin Signal

1 BITS2_A

2 BITS2_B

3 -

4 -

5 -

6 -

7 -

8 -

Table 114 External Clock Interface Connector “CLK2” on PM_ONU 2G

Pin Signal

1 CON1_TL1

2 CON1_TL2

3 CLI_TX

4 GND

5 GND

6 CLI_RX

7 CON1_TL2

8 CON1_TL1

Table 115 Pinout “CLI” Connector on PM_ONU 2G

160

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1b0b

Power Modules

• External Interface for the PWM based Heat Exchanger (HEX):

• External Interface for I2C based Heat Exchanger (HEX):

• “TAP” connector:

• External Interface for the I2C based Alarm Collector (ALCO):

Pin Signal

1 PWM_FAN_OUT

2 PWM_FAN_IN

3 GND

4 HEX_FAN_AL1_IN

5 HEX_FAN_AL2_IN

6 HEX_FAN_AL1_OUT

7 HEX_FAN_AL2_OUT

8 PRES_HEX_PWM

Table 116 Pinout “HEX/PWM” Connector on PM_ONU 2G

Pin Signal

1 P3V3_EXT

2 GND

3 I_DAT_HEX

4 I_CLK_HEX

5 PRES_HEX

6 -

7 GND

8 -

Table 117 Pinout “I2C” Connector on PM_ONU 2G

Pin Signal

1 TESTBUS_A

2 TESTBUS_B

3 -

4 -

5 -

6 -

7 -

8 -

Table 118 Pinout “TAP” Connector on PM_ONU 2G

161


Id:0900d805805f1b0b

• External Interface for Environmental Sensors:

• 4-port 100 Base-T Ethernet switch:

Pin Signal

1 P3V3 EXT

2 GND

3 I_DAT_ALCO

4 I_CLK_ALCO

5 PRES_ALCO

6 -

7 GND

8 MUP

Table 119 “AL IF” Connector on PM_ONU 2G

Pin Signal

1 +5 V EXT

2 ANA_IN_1

3 ANA_IN_2

4 ANA_IN_3

5 -

6 -

7 -

8 GND

Table 120 Pinout “ENV.SENSOR” Connector on PM_ONU 2G

Pin Signal (port 1) Signal (port 2) Signal (port 3) Signal (port 4)

1 TX+_1 TX+_2 TX+_3 TX+_4

2 TX-_1 TX-_2 TX-_3 TX-_4

3 RX+_1 RX+_2 RX+_3 RX+_4

4 - - - -

5 - - - -

6 RX-_1 RX-_2 RX-_3 RX-_4

7 - - - -

8 - - - -

Table 121 Ethernet Switch “10/100bT” on PM_ONU 2G (Port 1 to 4)

162

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1b0b

Power Modules

8.6 PM_R/PM_R 2G

Figure 89 View to front panel of PM_R/PM_R 2G

The power module PM_R/PM_R 2G contains a power supply connector (connector type Sub-D 3W3), see Figure 90, and RJ-45 connectors, see Figure 91.


Figure 90 PM_R/PM_R 2G Power Supply Connector



The RJ45 connector assignment is shown in Table 123 to Table 128.

PM_R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ENV. SENSOR HEX CLI TAP 1 2 3 4

PWR

HEX

10/100bT(-) (+) 48vmax.15A ALARMS IN

FAN

Left handle Alarm in, 1 to 8

External Interface for Environmental SensorExternal Interface for Heat Exchanger Control

CLI InterfaceTest Access Point Ethernet Interfaces 1 to 4

LED Indication

Right handle




A2 M48V2 Negative input voltage 48 to 60 V DC voltage max. 25 A

A3 P48V2 Return of negative input voltage


Table 122 PM_R/PM_R 2G Power Supply 3W3 Connectors

PIN Signal

1 P5V

2 ANA_IN_1

Table 123 External Interface for Environmental Sensors X14/A

A1 A2 A3

(−) (+)48V/60V

max. 40A

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

163


Id:0900d805805f1b0b

3 ANA_IN_2

4 ANA_IN_3

5

6

7

8 GND

PIN Signal

1 PWM_FAN_IN

2 PWM_FAN_OUT

3 HEX_IDENT

4 HEX_FAN_AL1_IN

5 HEX_FAN_AL2_IN

6 HEX_FAN_AL1_OUT

7 HEX_FAN_AL2_OUT

8 GND

Table 124 External Interface for Heat Exchanger Control X14/B

PIN Signal

1

2

3 CLI_TX

4 GND

5 GND

6 CLI_RX

7

8

Table 125 CLI/TL1 Interface X14/C of PM_R/PM_R 2G

PIN Signal

1 TAP_A

2 TAP_B

3 to 8

Table 126 Test Bus Connector X14/D of PM_R/PM_R 2G

PIN Signal

Table 123 External Interface for Environmental Sensors X14/A (Cont.)

164

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1b0b

Power Modules

PIN Port#1 X15/A Port#2 X15/B Port#3 X15/C Port#4 X15/D

1 TX+_1 TX+_2 TX+_3 TX+_4

2 TX-_1 TX-_2 TX-_3 TX-_4

3 RX+_1 RX+_2 RX+_3 RX+_4

4

5

6 RX-_1 RX-_2 RX-_3 RX-_4

7

8

Table 127 Ethernet Ports#1 to 4, X15/A to D

PIN X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 X11 X12 X13

1 ALARM_IN1 ALARM_IN2 ALARM_IN3 ALARM_IN4 ALARM_IN5 ALARM_IN6 ALARM_IN7 ALARM_IN8

2 GND GND GND GND GND GND GND GND

Table 128 Alarm inputs#1 to 8 Connector X6 to X13

165

System Description Fan Units

Id:0900d8058060acb8

9 Fan UnitsEach shelf is equipped with a fan unit. The fan unit will be mounted inside at the bottom of the M1200/M1100/G1100 shelf or on the side of the M400/G400/G400R/G400 2G/ G400R 2G/M600/G600 2G/ G600R 2G/G200 2G/G200S 2G shelf.

The fan unit is connected with the power backplane via a cable. A 15 pole D-Sub con-nector is located on the front side of the fan unit.

Following fan units and dust filters are used in hiX 5622/25/30/35.

Product Name Part Number Description

FAN_G200 2G S50028-B3181-A1 Fan unit for shelf G200 2G

FAN_G200 DF 2G S50028-B3181-A2 Fan unit for shelf G200 2G with dust filter

FAN_G200S 2G S50028-B3191-A1 Fan unit for shelf G200S 2G

FAN_G400 S50028-B2141-A1 Fan unit for shelf G400/G400R

FAN_G400 DF S50028-B2141-A2 Fan unit for shelf G400/G400R with dust filter

FAN_G400 2G S50028-B3141-A1 Fan unit for shelf G400 2G/G400R 2G

FAN_G400 DF 2G S50028-B3141-A2 Fan unit for shelf G400 2G/G400R 2G with dust filter

FAN_G600 2G S50028-B3161-A1 Fan unit for shelf G600 2G/G600R 2G

FAN_G600 DF 2G S50028-B3161-A2 Fan unit for shelf G600 2G/G600R 2G with dust filter

FAN-5625 S50028-B2036-A1 Fan unit for shelf M400 (Vertical) (12Vdc)

FAN-5625-12V reduced noise

S50028-B2036-A2 Fan unit for shelf M400 (Vertical) (12Vdc) reduced noise

FAN-5630 S50028-B2037-A1 Fan unit for shelf M600 (Vertical) - Designed for Russia market

FAN-5630-12V S50028-B2038-A1 Fan unit for shelf M600 (Vertical) - Designed for replacing FAN-5630 release 1.0

FAN-5630-12V reduced noise

S50028-B2038-A2 Fan unit for shelf M600 (Vertical) reduced noise

FAN-5635 S50028-B2003-A1 Fan unit for shelf M1200 (Horizontal)

FAN-5635-DF S50028-B2003-A2 Fan unit for shelf M1200 - Horizontal type - Dust filter included

FAN-5635 Small S50028-B2104-A1 Fan unit for 16 slots shelves (M1100 and G1100), small version for normal temperature range (up to +45 °C)

FAN-5635 Large S50028-B2104-A2 Fan unit for 16 slots shelves (M1100 and G1100), large version for extented temperature range (up to +60 °C), no dust filter

FAN-5635 Large-DF S50028-B2104-A3 Fan unit for 16 slots shelves (M1100 and G1100), large version for extented temperature range (up to +45 °C) with dust filter

Dust filter C50165-A230-B169 Dust filter for hiX 5630 - Designed for Russia market

Vertical installation C50165-A230-B170 Vertical installation for hiX 5630 - Designed for Russia market

Dustcover SFP C39334-Z98-C1 dustcover SFP

Dustcover RJ45 C22334-Z8001-C268 dustcover RJ45

Table 129 Fans and Dust Filters

166

System Description

Id:0900d8058060acb8

Fan Units

9.1 M1200 Fan Unit

Figure 92 hiX 5635 Fan Unit (M1200)

Figure 93 Front View of Fan Unit for M1200 Shelf

Physical layout

Dimensions (W x H x D) 433 mm x 74.5 mm x 267 mm

Number of fans 6

Fan type PAPST 5298N/2H

Max power consumption 78 W @ 56 V fan supply voltage

167


Id:0900d8058060acb8

9.2 M1100/G1100 Fan Unit Small

Figure 94 hiX 5635 Fan Unit Small (M1100/G1100)

Figure 95 Front View of Fan Unit Small for M1100/G1100 Shelf

Physical layout

Fan shelf size (W x H x D) 445 mm x 59 mm x 267 mm

Number of fans 6

Fan type DELTA AFB1224VH (V39106-Z4002-A45)

Max Power consumption 50 W

168

System Description

Id:0900d8058060acb8

Fan Units

9.3 M1100/G1100 Fan Unit Large

Figure 96 hiX 5635 Fan Unit Large (S50028-B2104-A2/-A3)

Figure 97 Front View of Fan Unit Large for M1100/G1100 Shelf (S50028-B2104-A2)

Figure 98 Front View of Fan Unit Large for M1100/G1100 Shelf (S50028-B2104-A3)

Physical layout

Fan shelf size (W x H x D)

S50028-B2104-A2

445 mm x 75 mm x 267 mm

Fan shelf size (W x H x D)

S50028-B2104-A3

445 mm x 165 mm x 267 mm

169


Id:0900d8058060acb8

9.4 M600 Fan UnitThe fan unit will be mounted inside on the right side of the M600 shelf. The fan unit is connected with the power backplane via a connector.

Figure 99 hiX 5630 Fan Unit (S50028-B2038-A2) for M600 Shelf

Physical layout

Fan parameter

Number of fans 6

Fan type DELTA AFB1224SHE (V39106-Z4002-A55)

Max Power consumption 100 W


Number of fans 6

Fan speed 3600 RPM ± 15%

Air delivery 65 CFM

Max Power consumption 28.8 W @ 12 V fan supply voltage

AIR FLOW

Connectors

170

System Description

Id:0900d8058060acb8

Fan Units

9.5 M400 Fan UnitThe fan unit will be mounted at the right side of the M400 shelf.

Figure 100 hiX 5625 Fan Unit (S50028-B2036-A2) for M400 Shelf

Physical layout

Fan parameter

9.6 G400 Fan UnitThere are two kinds of fan units for G400/G400R shelf: FAN_G400 (S50028-B2141-A1) and FAN_G400 DF (S50028-B2141-A2). There are also two kinds of fan units for G400 2G/G400R 2G shelf: FAN_G400 2G (S50028-B3141-A1) and FAN_G400 DF 2G (S50028-B3141-A2). The fan unit will be mounted at the left side of the G400 shelf.


Number of fans 4

Max Power consumption 14.4 W (12 V fan)

AIR FLOW

Connectors

171


Id:0900d8058060acb8

Figure 101 hiX 5625 Fan Unit for G400/G400R/G400 2G/G400R 2G Shelf

Physical layout

Fan parameter

9.7 G600 2G Fan UnitThere are two kinds of fan units for G600 2G/G600R 2G shelf: FAN_G600 2G (S50028-B3161-A1) and FAN_G600 DF 2G (S50028-B3161-A2). The fan unit will be mounted at the left side of the G600 2G/G600R 2G shelf.

Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 mm x 186 mm x 258.5 mm

Number of fans 4

Max Power consumption 12 W (12 V fan)

172

System Description

Id:0900d8058060acb8

Fan Units

Figure 102 hiX 5630 Fan Unit for G600 2G/G600R 2G Shelf

Physical layout

Fan parameter

9.8 G200 2G Fan UnitThere are two kinds of fan units for G200 2G shelf: FAN_G200 2G (S50028-B3181-A1) and FAN_G200 DF 2G (S50028-B3181-A2). The fan unit will be mounted at the left side of the G200 2G shelf.

Dimensions (W x H x D) 72 mm x 277.5 mm x 285.5 mm

Number of fans 6


173


Id:0900d8058060acb8

Figure 103 hiX 5622 Fan Unit for G200 2G Shelf

Physical layout

Fan parameter


Number of fans 2


174

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

10 FunctionThe hiX 5622/25/30/35 provides the following functions: • Bridging • VLAN Tagging • Layer 2 Switching Scenarios • VLAN Protocol Stacks • IP over ATM (IPoA) and ARP Handling • EtherType-based Tagging and Switching • Mobile Backhauling • MAC Address Translation 1:1 • PPPoE Intermediate Agent • PPPoA to PPPoE Conversion • DHCP Relay Agent (Option 82) • Access Line Identification for DHCP/PPPoE/ANCP • Use of Private IP Addresses • Multicast and IGMP • IS-IS Routing • BGP Version 4 • ADSL Interface Configuration • VDSL2 Interface Configuration • SHDSL Interface Configuration • Rate Adaptation Modes • Spectral Shaping and RFI Bands • Dynamic Transmission Power Control • L2 Energy-Saving Status • Access Node Control Protocol (ANCP) • Traffic Management • Security • Flow Control • Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) • Link Aggregation • Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP) • Concentration and Cascading • Redundancy • CWDM Ring Configuration • Port Mirroring • Dual-Ended Line Test (DELT) • Single-Ended Line Test (SELT) • Internal Communication • Clock Synchronization • External Clock Synchronization • Remote Inventory • Temperature Controlling • Mass Software Upgrade • Switching between Inband Management Channel and Outband Interface

175

System Description Function

Id:0900d805805e0770

• Routing between Inband Management Channel and Outband Interface • Move of Subscriber from one Port to Another.

10.1 BridgingThe layer 2 switching is provided by the following two operation modes: • Residential Bridging • Cross-connect Mode

10.1.1 Residential BridgingThe hiX 5622/25/30/35 IP-DSLAM uses an advanced residential bridging technique supporting suitable features for telecommunication environment. The residential bridging provides secure and efficient network environment between DSL subscribers and the IP-DSLAM. Within the same VLAN, port isolation is guaranteed in upstream direction.

With residential bridging in downstream direction, the IP-DSLAM compares the destina-tion MAC address of unicast Ethernet frames with a MAC table. Then the frame is for-warded to the appropriate subscriber port. Frames with a so far unknown destination address are discarded.

In contrast to standard IEEE 802.1D Ethernet bridges which provide flooding to every port (i.e. DSL line), which is not secure in case of unicast flooding, and which would congest the available DSL capacity with unsolicited data, the IP-DSLAM’s user ports are blocked that never have requested any broadcast traffic. With IP-DSLAM, bridging of Ethernet frames to a DSL port is only possible, after a user has sent an Ethernet frame towards the network and makes his MAC address known to the IP-DSLAM in this way.

The forwarding database (FDB) or MAC address table is updated automatically on every received upstream packet. Every source MAC address of any Ethernet frame received from the user side is copied into this table, because this MAC address is definitely located at the customer premises.

The entries in the table are deleted after a certain time (default 300 seconds, configu-rable with ACI-E EM GX or CLI) unless re-used as source MAC address from any CPE. The MAC filter table contains 16-k addresses together for all ports. When exceeding this limit, a further MAC address cannot be learned before one older entry is deleted from the MAC table due to its age.

As long as a certain MAC address is in use, i.e. is associated to one DSL port and not aged, it must not be learned for another DSL port. This should at least for the duration of a session, prevent a MAC address from being hijacked by a malicious subscriber.

In residential bridging mode, filtering of broadcast, unicast and multicast frames is allowed for different configurable rules for the customer traffic forwarding; thus e.g. in downstream direction the broadcast messages can be prohibited from forwarding except ARP requests.

Since access to IP Ethernet based networks is the main application of hiX 5622/25/30/35, support of several IP-based mechanisms are provided.

At the CPE side, the IP packets are encapsulated and segmented into ATM cells or forwarded in Ethernet frames. The DSLAM terminates the ATM layer and forwards the Ethernet frames to the desired destinations. The DSLAM can also perform traffic classification, segregation/separation and prioritization based on different parameters.

176

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

Three major methods of address assignment are supported: • PPP based assignment • DHCP based assignment • Fixed IP address assignment

10.1.2 Cross-connect ModeThe Cross-connect mode supports especially business port or wholesale connections. This mode has a transparent behavior and is also named Transparent LAN Service (TLS). Cross-connections are configured per VLAN, thereby a mix of bridged and cross-connected services per UNI port is allowed.

Cross-connected VLANs provide for a certain degree of transparency as there is: • DHCP is not processed but flooded • ARP is not processed but flooded • PPPoE is not processed but flooded • IGMP is not processed but flooded • Transparency is per the outer VID of a single-tagged or both VIDs of a double-

tagged frame • Multicast and broadcast traffic can be flooded • Cross-connect mode with added port tag, see Section 10.3.6, accepts customer-

provided VIDs and tunnels it but requires the VID in question to be configured as VID on the respective port

• Cross-connect mode with added port tag and service tag, see Section 10.3.5, accepts untagged frames and adds port as well as service information.

g Even in cross-connected VLANs, all control-plane protocols (DHCP, IGMP, ARP and PPPoE) are triggered and directed to the controller port. They are, in contrast to bridged VLANs, not processed in any way but immediately reinserted into the data path once their origin from a CC VLAN has been determined.

The following aspects are not implemented: • Any BPDU type is dropped (LACP, PAUSE, xSTP) • MAC learning cannot be disabled, downstream forwarding is MAC-aware • MAC limiting is applied even to CC VLANs • C-VIDs to be accepted used pre-configuration, cross-connect • Station moves are suppressed.

10.1.3 SummaryThe following table summarizes capabilities and aspects of transparency.

Residential Bridging Cross-connect Mode

Convey PPPoE & IPoE encapsulations transparently disabled enabled

MAC-learning on per VLAN basis enabled enabled 1)

MAC-limiting enabled disabled 1)

1) enabled on the CXU, but disabled on the IUs 2) Flood along b/c domain

Table 130 Residential Bridging and Cross-conntect Mode

177


Id:0900d805805e0770

10.2 VLAN TaggingIn legacy versions, the IU was able to add one tag while the CXU could add another tag, thereby achieving double tagging. For the current mechanism, all tagging is per bridge port.

Tagging is controlled by four parameters:– A system setting “Tagging Mode” on the CXU– A per bridge port setting “VLAN Mode”– An outer tag PVID per bridge port (oPVID)– An inner tag PVID per bridge port (iPVID)

(used only when adding two tags at the same time).

Based on these settings, the IU adds no, one, or two tags to a frame, or removes tags accordingly in downstream direction. Both PVID values of a bridge port are configured on the CXU, The inner tag may be unused when a single-tagged frame is the result of the tagging mode settings. The EtherType of the inner tag is always 0x8100.

The following table summarizes the options and their effects (U = untagged, T = tagged, D = double-tagged).

Station Move Prevention enabled enabled 1)

DHCP processing enabled disabled 2)

IGMP processing enabled disabled 2)

ARP processing enabled disabled 2)

PPoE processing enabled disabled 2)

Flood broadcast traffic along b/c domain disabled enabled

Flood multicast traffic along b/c domain disabled enabled

Flood (unknown) unicast traffic along b/c domain disabled enabled

Residential Bridging Cross-connect Mode

1) enabled on the CXU, but disabled on the IUs 2) Flood along b/c domain

Table 130 Residential Bridging and Cross-conntect Mode (Cont.)

VLAN tagging mode(see Figure below)

VLAN mode IU port

System wide tagging mode

DSL line Uplink interface

(a) Stacking Double U T

(b) Stacking Double T D

(c) not applicable Single U T

(d) not applicable Single T T

(e) Double Double U D

(f) Double Double T dropped

Table 131 Tagging Modes of IP-DSLAM

178

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

Figure 104 Tagging Modes of IP-DSLAM

10.2.1 VLAN Stacking and Double TaggingVLAN stacking in the DSLAM simply adds another tag to the 802.1Q tagged packets, that enters the network. Double tagging adds two tags.

The purpose for stacking is to expand the VLAN space by tagging tagged packets, thus producing a "double-tagged" frame. The expanded VLAN space allows the service provider to provide certain services over the entire network (L2 Metro Ethernet aggre-gation and core network), such as Internet access on specific VLANs for specific cus-tomers, and allows the service provider to provide other types of services such as (E-Line, E-LAN, BTV, VoD) for their customers.

A further important benefit of using VLAN stacking in the DSLAM is that it hides and protects the customer VLAN IDs. When a tagged packet comes from the CPE, hiX 5622/25/30/35 performs forced tagging and does not change customer VLAN IDs.

A double tagged frame is shown in the following figure:

Figure 105 Double Tagged Packet Encapsulation

Generally the customers from a service provider require a range of VLAN-IDs to handle multiple applications. Service providers can allow their customers to use this feature to safely assign their own VLAN IDs on subscriber interfaces, because these subscriber

dstMAC srcMAC # # ## # # # # ## # #

Outer tag Inner tag

Field not present

Data

dstMAC srcMAC # # #0x8100 # # #VID Data

dstMAC srcMAC # # ## # # # # ## # # Data


dstMAC srcMAC # # ## # # # # ## # # Data


# # #

dstMAC srcMAC # # #0x8100 # # #oPVID

Outer tag Inner tag

Data

dstMAC srcMAC 0x81000x8100 VIDoPVID Data

dstMAC srcMAC # # #0x8100 # # #oPVID Data


dstMAC srcMAC 0x81000x8100 iPVIDoPVID Data

(a)

(b)

(c)

(d)

(e)

(f)

DSL Line Uplink Interface

Frame dropped

Destinat. Source Ether- VLAN Type /length Data CRC

6 2 2 2 2 26

64 to 1526 Bytes

address IDaddress TypeVLAN

IDEther-Type

179


Id:0900d805805e0770

interface VLAN IDs are encapsulated within a service-provider designated VLAN ID for that customer. Therefore there is no overlap of VLAN IDs among customers, nor does traffic from different customers become mixed.

Single tagged frames and double tagged frames can be sent simultaneously at the uplink port dependent on the configuration. All frames will be tagged from the interface unit. In the double tagged mode, an SP-VLAN ID is added to the received frame.

The following applications are possible:– If there is an untagged frame received then the SP-VLAN ID is added and the frame

is sent tagged. – For tagged frames, the SP-VLAN ID is added and the frame is sent with two tags.

10.2.2 Mixing of Single-Tagged and Double-Tagged TrafficMixing of single-tagged and double-tagged traffic is possible. You must observe certain boundary conditions.

A network usually distinguishes single-tagged frames and double-tagged frames by using different EtherType values for inner and outer tag. Also, IEEE 802.1ad (“Provider Bridges”) specifies two different values for inner and outer tag. Typical combinations comprise 8100-in-9100 (Juniper) and 8100-in-88A8 (IEEE 802.1ad), but 8100-in-8100 as well, the latter be so-called Q-in-Q encapsulation. The CXU only accepts a frame as tagged, when the tag in the packet matches the configured TPID.

Supported configurations are: • Single-tagged frames only for entire data path and system

– Any value– Example: 0x8100

• Double-tagged frames only for entire data path and system– 0x8100-in-0xTTTT with TTTT being any value as long as the inner TPID is

0x8100 – Examples: 0x8100-in-0x8100, 0x8100-in-0x88A8, 0x8100-in-0x9100

• Single-tagged and double-tagged mixed in data path – Once single-tagged and double-tagged frames are mixed in the data path and

the only common TPID for single-tagged frames is 0x8100, the only mixture of practical relevance is 0x8100 for single-tagged frames and 8100-in-8100 for double-tagged frames.

– Example for single-tagged: 0x8100 – Example for double-tagged: 0x8100-in-0x8100.

10.2.3 VLAN TranslationThe hiX 5622/25/30/35 supports VLAN translation for untagged packets in two approaches:– VLAN into VLAN translation on the CXU– EtherType based translation on the IU in upstream direction.

The following figure shows the VLAN into VLAN translation on the CXU. In this case, Shared VLAN Learning (SVL) must be enabled.

180

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

Figure 106 Example for VLAN Translation Scenario

VLAN translation can be used to do flexible service multiplexing using filter criteria based on EtherType, 802.1p or incoming VLAN-ID. The VLAN-ID on the subscriber side (downstream) is different from the VLAN-ID on the network side (upstream).

10.3 Layer 2 Switching ScenariosThe hiX 5622/25/30/35 provides various flavors of tagging and switching scenarios, e.g.: • Bridged modes with

– Service tag on the DSL line and VLAN IDs are transmitted unchanged at the uplink port

– Untagged or single-tagged frames on the DSL line, add service VLAN-ID– Untagged or single-tagged frames on the DSL line, add customer VLAN-ID– Service-tagged frames at the DSL line with the service tag being translated to a

port-based VID. • Cross-connect modes with

– Untagged frames on the DSL line. Two tags are added to the received frame.– Untagged or single-tagged frames on the DSL line, one port based VLAN tag is

added to the received frame.

The list above gives an overview about possible switching scenarios. The configurations in detail have to be done according Table 131 Tagging Modes of IP-DSLAM. Please, consider also the release notes to get detail information about using of interface units.

For optimum resource utilization, there are following per-port limits for VLAN switching:– 8 VCs with 1 VLAN each or– 1 VC with 8 VLANs

The VIDs (i.e., the numeric values) can span over the entire value range.

10.3.1 Bridged Mode with Unchanged Service TagThe bridged mode with unchanged service tag can be viewed as scenario that distin-guishes between several services. Frames received from a given subscriber must be single-tagged, thereby denoting the service.

The hiX 5622/25/30/35 keeps the tags and forwards the frames, after the VID member-ships have been checked successfully.

DSL Modem 1

DSL Modem 2 PVC 2

VLAN-1

VLAN-2

VoIPProvider-1

High InternetProvider

Service

SpeedService

SURPASS hiX 5625/30/35DSLAM

PVC 1

181


Id:0900d805805e0770

10.3.2 Bridged Mode with Added Service TagThe bridged mode with service tag added makes no assumption on the tagging format on the DSL line. The tagging and forwarding mode is bound to the respective bridge port. On the IU, one VLAN tag is added to the received frame (and removed from the frame for sending it onto the DSL line). The VID and .1p information of the tag added are to be configured per bridge port. The VID represents the service. MAC learning is enabled for this mode, all BPDUs will be discarded.

This mode is the right configuration for multicast services like IPTV providing efficient bandwidth usage, because the IP-DSLAM can distribute multicast groups of one provider to all subscribers.

10.3.3 Bridged Mode with Added Port TagThe bridged mode with added port tag makes no assumption on the tagging format on the DSL line, that is, it works with untagged as well as single-tagged frames. The tagging and forwarding mode is bound to the respective bridge port. On the IU, one VLAN tag is blindly added to the received frame (and removed from the frame for sending it onto the DSL line), with IU_ADSL48-CNX or IU_ADSL72-B1 being fully agnostic for any c-tag, if any. The VID and .1p information of the tag added are to be configured per bridge port. The VID represents the DSL port. MAC learning is enabled for this mode, all BPDUs will be discarded.

Furthermore, VLAN translation is configurable in a way that translation can be enabled or disabled per bridge port and valid VID.

In downstream, the VLAN tags are removed and the Ethernet frames are passed according to the MAC entries.

10.3.4 Bridged Mode with Service-to-Port Tag TranslationBridge mode with service-to-port tag translation refers to service-tagged frames at the DSL line with the service tag being translated to a port-based VID.

This mode assumes always tagged frames on the subscriber line, untagged frames are discarded. Two different VLAN memberships are allowed per subscriber port. Both VIDs can be chosen arbitrarily from the available value range and more than one port can be member of a given VLAN. When a frame is received, the VID is checked against the two configured values, mismatches will be discarded.

An application is supported in which more than one port is member in the same VLAN with at least one of its two VLANs. Traffic is aggregated in upstream direction, subscriber ports are segregated from each other, and switching in downstream is done with Inde-pendent VLAN Learning (IVL).

The IU adds and removes tags while the CXU switches traffic transparently.

The setting whether or not a VID is translated to or from a PVID shall be of a granularity that allows the coexistence of both modes at one single port at the same time.

182

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

10.3.5 Cross-connect Mode with Added Port Tag and Service TagThe cross-connect mode with added port and service tag assumes always untagged frames on the DSL line. Services are separated using different VCs.

Figure 107 Cross-connect Mode with Added Service and Port Tags

The tagging and forwarding mode is bound to the respective bridge port. On the IU, two tags are added to the received frame (and removed from the frame for sending it onto the DSL line). Both VID and .1p information are to be configured per bridge port. The inner VID denotes the DSL port while the outer VID represents the service.

Multicast handling is explicitly not within scope of cross-connect modes. The IP DSLAM deliberately acts as a transparent L2 forwarding device.

10.3.6 Cross-connect Mode with Added Port TagThe cross-connect mode with added port tag makes no assumption on the tagging format on the DSL line, that is, it works with untagged as well as single-tagged frames. The tagging and forwarding mode is bound to the respective bridge port. On the IU, one VLAN tag is blindly added to the received frame (and removed from the frame for sending it onto the DSL line) with the IU_ADSL48-CNX and IU_ADSL72-B1 being fully agnostic for any c-tag, if any. The VID and .1p information of the tag added are to be configured per bridge port. The VID represents the DSL port.

Figure 108 Cross-connect Mode with Added Port Tag

CRCDA SA Data DA SA VID VID CRCEtherType0x8100

EtherType0x8100

Bridge port x-1

.1p

.1p

Bridge port x-2

Bridge port x-3

CRCDA SA Data DA SA VID VID CRCEtherType0x8100

EtherType0x8100.1

p

.1p

CRCDA SA Data

CXUuplink

Data

Data

DA SA VID VID CRCEtherType0x8100

EtherType0x8100.1

p

.1p Data

DSL port x

All VCs untagged

VC x-1

VC x-2

VC x-3 ports

CRCDA SA Data DA SA VID CRCEtherType0x8100

Bridge

.1p

Bridge

DA SA VID VID CRCEtherType0x8100

EtherType0x8100.1

p

.1p

CXUuplink

Data

DA SA VID CRCEtherType0x8100 .1p Data

port x-1

port z-1

portsData

DSL port x

DSL port z

Singletagged

Untagged

VC x-1

VC z-1

183


Id:0900d805805e0770

10.4 VLAN Protocol StacksFigure 109 shows an example of protocol stacks, where the VLAN is generated by the CPE. CPE and DSLAM are connected via xDSL (VDSL2/SHDSL).

Figure 109 VLAN Protocol Stacks for Ethernet Based Transmission (Example)

Figure 110 shows a further example of protocol stacks, where the VLAN is generated by the CPE and transmitted via ATM cells. CPE and DSLAM are connected via xDSL (ADSL2+/SHDSL).

Figure 110 VLAN Protocol Stacks ATM Based Transmission (Example)

The VLAN can also be generated by the DSLAM, see example in Figure 111. Between CPE and DSLAM, the user data are transmitted via ATM cells.

10BaseT xDSL Ethernet

hiX 5625/30/35B-RASCPE

IP

PPP

PPPoE

MAC

Eth

RG

IP

PPP

PPPoE

VLAN

MAC

Eth PHY

IP

PHY

VLAN

MAC

Eth xDSL

VLAN

MAC MAC

xDSL Eth

1)

1) Transfer between CPE and DSLAM takes place via VLAN.


hiX 5625/30/35

B-RASCPE

IP

PPP

PPPoE

MAC

Eth

RG

IPPPP

PPPoE

VLAN

MAC

Eth PHY

IP

PHY

VLAN

MAC

Eth

VLAN

MAC MAC

xDSL Eth

AAL5

ATM

xDSL

AAL5

ATM

184

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

Figure 111 VLAN Protocol Stack Mapping of ATM Parameters (Example)

Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) operation addresses security and traffic isolation requirements of telecommunication installations.VLANs provide separation of Local Area Networks (LANs) and provide broadcast/multicast control over switched Ethernet environments. Each VLAN defines a fully separated broadcast domain.

10.5 IP over ATM (IPoA) and ARP HandlingWhen CPEs on the subscriber side supports IPoE over ATM based xDSL lines, the Ethernet/IP frame is encapsulated within the VC of the ATM layer. The DSLAM termi-nates the ATM layer and switches the frame based on the MAC address of the Ethernet frame. This is a normal bridge mode.

However, since some routers at the customer premises do not support IPoE, rather they directly encapsulate the IP packet into the VC of ATM without any Ethernet frame. Thus the DSLAM would not be able to switch the frame on layer 2. This is the basic concept of the IP over ATM (IPoA) which has been specified in RFC 2684 (update of RFC 1483).

The IPoA has been introduced for the DSLAM which allows to predefine a virtual MAC address per PVC which is used as the source MAC address of the Ethernet frame (upstream direction). The destination MAC address is evaluated by layer 3 functionality via an ARP request procedure.

In opposite direction, only the IP data is transmitted to the CPE, see Figure 112.

For IPoA, each subscriber must be separated by it’s own PVID.

IPoA with ARP handling can be provided with IU_ADSL48-CNX, IU_ADSL72-D1, IU_SHDSL48-A2, IU_VDSL24/P (in ADSL mode) and IU_VDSL48P (in ADSL mode).

The BRAS-IP address and the subscriber IP address have to be configured by the oper-ator. The subscriber IP address must always be fixed, DHCP is not possible. Therefore, the subscriber IP address and the BRAS-IP address have to be configured per bridge port, the subscriber IP address as source IP address, and the BRAS-IP address as des-tination IP address for the ARP request towards the BRAS.

The source MAC address of the ARP reply is used as destination MAC address, and is provided to the IU via internal communication. ARP is sent once the subscriber port is configured as IPoA. The source MAC address will be determined automatically and is derived from the bridge port.


hiX 5625/30/35

B-RASCPE

IP

PPP

PPPoE

MAC

IP

PPP

PPPoE

VLANMAC

Eth PHY

IP

PHYEth

VLANATM

xDSL Eth

AAL5

Eth

RG

ATM

xDSL

AAL5

185


Id:0900d805805e0770

Figure 112 RFC 2684 Routed Encapsulation Overview

In addition, operator can configure the interval that the DSLAM uses for sending ARPs to BRAS for all bridge ports in order to detect changes in BRAS MAC addresses (if BRAS is not known and might change over time).

The current implementation comprises the following processes: • CXU sends ARP request for BRAS IP address and get ARP reply. (If ARP reply can’t

be received, CXU retransmits ARP request every 60 seconds.) • CXU sends the BRAS MAC address to IU. • The standard ARP aging mechanism is used which periodically sends ARP

requests. The interval can be configured. • Whenever a status of IU operation is changed, its status is transmitted to ARP relay

agent. And whenever IU is enabled, MAC address of the provider router is transmit-ted to IU.

10.6 EtherType-based Tagging and SwitchingUsually, a VLAN is assigned to a bridge port. Different network scenarios might require VLANs to be assigned based on a protocol. Specifically, it might be desirable to aggre-gate PPPoE frames from multiple bridge ports into a single VLAN, while leaving the remaining traffic in bridge port specific VLANs. This will be achieved by EtherType based forwarding, which can distinguish frames by their EtherType value.

g Video on demand and other IP/DHCP traffic can not be distinguished by EtherType.

10.7 Mobile BackhaulingMobile backhauling is used to connect classic TDM or ATM based mobile base stations to the IP-DSLAM and tunnel the voice data accordingly. In both cases, the base stations are connected via several E1 interfaces to a specific CPE that is capable of terminating the IMA bundle in case of ATM, and establish a pseudo wire encapsulation (PWE) in network direction.

Ethernet ADSL

CPE

IP address 1

IP address 2

IP address 3

Ethernet

Ethernet

IPoA

New/Added

InterfaceUnit

CXU

IP

RFC2684 R

AAL5

ATM

DSL

DA SA VLAN Type IP FCS

186

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

The following features are provided for mobile backhauling:– T3 clock synchronization via SHDSL link using NTR functionality towards E1 inter-

faces of SHDSL CPE.– M-pair bonding of up to 4 SHDSL ports– IPoA support (in ATM mode of IU_SHDSL48-A2, termination of AAL5)– PWE3oE support (in EFM mode of IU_SHDSL48-A2).

Figure 113 TDM Based Mobile Backhauling

For mobile backhaul applications in packet network only scenarios, a highly stable clock of 10 ppb frequency accuracy is required on the base station side. Operators request to have a clock synchronization that is end-to-end based on physical layer methods like synchronous Ethernet and NTR on DSL. This usually is the preferred method when the mobile operator owns the access network or at least have friendly relationship with the access network provider. However, in some access network synchronization over physical layer scenarios can not be provided since synchronous Ethernet is not avail-able. In this case, timing over packet using like PTP according IEEE 1588 v2 needs to be used. Even if IEEE 1588 slaves may also be available in base stations, this DSLAM function is required, since the DSL in first mile adds additional jitter to the PTP flow causing unpredictable quality of the recovered synchronization. From DSLAM to base station site, the synchronization is forwarded via the NTR signal. Backhauling over DSL in general drastically reduces the transmission costs for the operators, since alternative multiple E1 leased lines are used. BITS synchronization is required to use DSL in packet only scenarios of mobile backhauling.

TDM

IP-DSLAMCentral Office site

PWE3EFM

NTRCPE

Base station site

nx SDSL

voiceTDM

E1TDMPWE3EFM

nx SDSL

BBnetwork

voiceTDMSDH

RNC site

TDMPWE3 SDH

Ethernet

GEEFM

SHDSLEthernet

GE

TDM

E1 PWE3EFM

SHDSL

voice

TDM

E1

187


Id:0900d805805e0770

Figure 114 ATM Based Mobile Backhauling

Mobile backhauling can be offered via SHDSL with a bandwidth of up to 22 Mbit/s sym-metrical.

10.8 MAC Address Translation 1:1hiX5622/25/30/35 can change a MAC address for a subscriber device in upstream and downstream direction. The MAC address which is changed is defined by a network operator. A virtual MAC address represents a subscriber which is identified by a virtual connection (DSLAM/slot/port/VCC). When the virtual MAC address is given, physical connection information can be extracted from it. It helps network operators to trace problems in their networks which are caused by computer virus or malicious traffic. Without this kind of mechanism, a network operator have to trace each MAC table in every network element in order to find the originator. Virtual MAC addressing allows the use of duplicated MAC addresses from subscribers. Some vendors use the same MAC address for their equipment in order to save costs. Learning the same MAC address can cause mis-forwarding packets or a lot of station movement, and so it disturbs services. When virtual MAC addressing is used, all MAC addresses from subscribers are trans-lated to virtual MAC addresses, there is no duplicated MAC address anymore.

10.8.1 MAC Address Translation with PPPoEFor MAC address translation with PPPoE, the IU provides MAT from host MAC to a virtual MAC, embedded in upstream direction. For downstream direction, there is a MAT from virtual MAC to the host MAC.

voiceAAL2ATMIMAE1

AAL2ATMPWEAAL5ATM

nx SDSL

IP-DSLAM

Central office site

NTRCPE

Base station site

BBnetwork

AAL2ATMPWEGE

RNC site

ATMPWE SDH

Ethernet

GE

voiceAAL2ATMSDH

voiceAAL2ATMIMAnx E1

ATMIMA

nx E1PWE

EthernetAAL5ATMM-pair

nx SHDSL

EthernetEthernet

GE

AAL5ATMM-Pair

nx SHDSL

voiceAAL2ATMSDH

188

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

10.8.2 MAC Address Translation with DHCPBesides MAC translation for the MAC address in the Ethernet header, there is also MAC translation for the MAC address inside the DHCP payload possible. In upstream, the MAC address in the DHCP datagram is translated from the original MAC address to a virtual MAC address, while in downstream the MAC address in the DHCP datagram is translated back from the virtual one to the original one.

10.9 PPPoE Intermediate AgentPoint-to-point protocol is currently used by most of the operators to authenticate the sub-scribers and assign them a public Internet Protocol Address. PPPoE intermediate agent is supported by hiX 5622/25/30/35 and actually it is a combination of IP-DSLAM and BRAS functionalities that will be primarily used by customers to identify the specific physical location of a BRAS subscriber.

The difference to existing network operation is the addition of a PPPoE vendor specific tag appended to the existing PPPoE PADI and PADR packet received from the client by the DSLAM. As shown in the figure below, the frame is forwarded in upstream direction by the DSLAM to the BRAS. This should not cause any issues for existing BRAS PPPoE implementations since unknown or unused PPPoE tags are ignored. The new tag will be used by the BRAS (when configured and present in the packet) as the NAS-Port-ID or calling station-ID RADIUS value in authentication and accounting records.

Figure 115 PPPoE Scenario

10.10 PPPoA to PPPoE Conversion PPPoA is based on DSL Forum TR-101 which recommends a protocol interworking function (IWF) instead of layering on top of Ethernet in the aggregation network.

PPPoE

Access Provider

PPPoE ------ PPPoE + PPPoE VSA

Home GW

RADIUS

IP Network

PC

L2-Access

BRAS

PPPoE + VSA RADIUS(including NAS-Port-Id)

- DSL Line Identifier- DSLAM Identifier

189


Id:0900d805805e0770

Figure 116 End-to-end Protocol Processing for PPPoA Access

Figure 117 Example Message Flow with PPPoA IWF

With this approach, a conversion between PPPoA and PPPoE is performed in the DSLAM.

IP

PPP

RFC 2364

ATM

DSL

CPE

IWF for PPPoA

PPPoE

802.1ad

EthernetRFC 2364

ATM

DSL

DSLAM

Some802.3 Phy

PPP

PPPoE

802.1 ad

Ethernet

Some802.3 Phy

BRAS

PTA or LAC

state = disconnected

LCP Config-Req

state = connected

PPPoE PADI

PPPoE PADO

PPPoE PADR

PPPoE PADS

PPPoE (LCP Config-Req)

PPPoE (LCP Config-Ack)

PPPoE (PPP Packet)

PPPoE (PPP Packet)

PPPoE (PPP Packet)

PPPoE PADT

LCP Config-Ack

PPP Packet

PPP Packet

PPP Packet

state = disconnected

Subscriber LIU CXU BRAS

PPPoEDiscovery

Stage

PPPoESessionStage

PPPoESession

Terminates

190

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

This includes standard PPPoE management and setting-up a new PPPoE session with the BRAS for each new PPPoA session, and encapsulating the PPP messages with PPPoE framing accordingly. That’s why, the DSLAM does not have to go through the complexity of the entire PPP state machine.

Since ATM is terminated at the interface unit, the interworking has to take place there as well. The IWF needs to maintain state information for all configured PPPoA PVCs.

Each connection is in one of the following states: • Disconnected • Connected.

Disconnected: In this state, the IU blocks all traffic to and from the PVC. The IU listens on the PVC and waits for an LCP configure-request message indicating the beginning of PPP session setup.

Connected: Once a PPPoE session is in the session stage, the IU can start forwarding upstream traffic received over the PVC to the network after adjusting the encapsulation, by adding Ethernet, VLAN and PPPoE headers and Ethernet check fields. Downstream interworked PPPoE traffic (i.e. with EtherType = 0x8864) can be distinguished from other PPPoE traffic, since its MAC destination address equals the MAC address of the interface unit. This is a separate MAC address since there is another one configured for inband management. Forwarding in downstream direction to the correct DSL line and PVC is performed according to the PPPoE session ID and VLAN ID using the mapping records mentioned above.

The connected state will be left and the connection returns to the disconnected state in any of the following cases: • upon receipt of a PPPoE PADT message for this session from the BRAS (denoted

as graceful termination) • upon detection of non-graceful session termination • upon a DSL loss of synchronization • when the IU/CXU restarts

IU_ADSL48-CNX and IU_ADSL72-D1, IU_VDSL24/P and IU_VDSL48P support auto-detection (auto-sensing) of PPPoA, and IPoE (including PPPoE and EoA).

PPPoA to PPPoE InterworkingIn order to support subscribers running CPEs with PPPoA, the PPPoA traffic is converted into PPPoE. This method is called routed encapsulation according to RFC 1483/2684. That means, before the PPP protocol will be sent towards the network, the DSLAM has to setup an Ethernet layer on which the PPP can be carried. In addition, a PPPoE session has to be established in the DSLAM towards the BRAS in order to map PPPoA traffic into a PPPoE session.

The DSLAM is able automatically to decide whether or not to involve the interworking function depending on whether or not PPPoA is sent.

A bridge port is configured for PPPoA in a fixed way when this protocol is expected. Additionally, it is possible to configure autodetection per bridge port. By default, autode-tection is enabled for all bridge ports.

This configuration only has an effect if the bridge port is not yet configured for IPoA or IPoE/PPPoE or even PPPoA. Only then, frames of such a port are sent to the host that detects the protocol type, and the port can be configured by software accordingly. This

191


Id:0900d805805e0770

also means, that no other protocol and encapsulation is supported in parallel to the con-figured one.

In order to be able detect a protocol change for such a port, this procedure is involved every time a line (DSL layer 1) has been synchronized.

10.11 DHCP Relay Agent (Option 82)A possibility to authenticate the subscribers and assign them an IP address is the func-tionality DHCP relay agent option 82. Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP) imple-mentations support host configuration (assignment of IP address, default gateway, DNS) but do not allow operators to authenticate the subscribers, once no user informa-tion is forwarded in the request. To allow authentication, DSLAMs support DHCP relay agent option 82. This defines methods for adding information about the port/users to the regular DHCP request, so that the operator can uniquely identify the subscriber and authenticate him to use the service.

Figure 118 DHCP Relay Agent - Message Flow

Benefits:– Enhances security by DHCP server access rights– Logging of user access data can be used for network optimization purposes and for

error tracking– Number of users per port can be easily restricted– Prevents MAC spoofing

DHCPDISCOVER (to all the subnet for DHCP server with identifier of MAC of client)

DHCP Relay Agent

DHCPOFFER (relay offer message to client through cli-ent identifier)

DHCPREQUEST (request all parameter and IP address included in offer message)

DHCPACK (relay ack message to the client)

Send DHCPRELEASE (sends release to DHCP server)

DHCPDISCOVER (IPDSLAM receives discovery message and for-wards to configured DHCP Server with IP and MAC of the relay agent)

DHCPOFFER (send message of the IP address/subnet, gateway and the other information to IPDSLAM)

DHCPREQUEST (IPDSLAM receives request message and forwards to configured DHCP server with IP and MAC of the Relay agent)

DHCPACK (confirm assigned IP address and other information to IPDSLAM)

DHCP ServerDHCP Client

192

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

– Simplifies user authentication and reduces network costs, since more costly BRAS functionality is not needed in the network

Before any subscriber connected to the DSLAM via DSL has successfully requested an IP address via DHCP, forwarding of Ethernet frames to this subscriber is not possible. The DHCP client initiates a DHCP_REQUEST message on his local LAN. This message is sent to the DSLAM and processed by the DHCP relay agent. The DHCP relay agent relays the request adding an options field (Agent Remote ID or Agent Circuit ID) to notify the DHCP server on which of the DSLAM’s interfaces this DHCP request has originally been received. With this information the DHCP server is able to perform a basic user authentication and to provide host configuration data for the client.

10.12 Access Line Identification for DHCP/PPPoE/ANCPhiX 5622/25/30/35 supports access line identification for the following reasons:

– RADIUS authentication & accounting based on access line identification as some-times performed

– Used for troubleshooting. Going through RADIUS logs based on an IP address or a user name to find out which access line was used under some circumstances.

– BRAS or surrounding policy management functions with advanced processing based on access line identification.

Inserting the appropriate access line characteristics (e.g. sync rate and interleaving delay values) while forwarding DHCP or PPPoE messages is an extension of the layer 2 DHCP relay agent and the PPPoE intermediate agent in the IP-DSLAM.

Reports are sent whenever the state of an assigned DSL line changes (comes up or down) with the following parameters:– DSL type– DSL link state– Actual data rates upstream/downstream– Attainable data rates upstream/downstream– Configured minimum rate upstream/downstream– Configured maximum rate upstream/downstream– Minimum data rates in low power state upstream/downstream– Maximum interleaving delay upstream/downstream– Actual interleaving delay upstream/downstream.

10.13 Use of Private IP AddressesThis feature is available for the IU_ADSL72-D1 and the IU_SHDSL48-A2 as well as the IU_ADSL72-CNX.

Actually, the DSLAM itself is agnostic for using private IP addresses. But it can be con-figured in a way that it considers S_VLAN/C_VLAN as a tuple (thereby making port iden-tification unique), and allows the assignment of identical private IP addresses to multiple ports.

In the ARP mechanism, the CXU resolves IP addresses into a MAC address, which is then given to the respective IU.

This function includes: • Replacing of IP field in the ARP table of CXUs by S_VLAN/C_VLAN couple + IP.

193


Id:0900d805805e0770

• When BRAS sends ARP request with S_VLAN/C_VLAN tuple for MAC of IP on the access port, CXU looks up ARP table using S_VLAN/C_VLAN couple + IP and sends ARP response.

• CXU sends ARP request with S_VLAN/C_VLAN couple for MAC of BRAS. When got the response from BRAS, CXU maintains this entry in the ARP table, also using S_VLAN/C_VLAN couple + IP.

• CXU also sends the BRAS MAC to IU, together with S_VLAN/C_VLAN couple.

10.14 Multicast and IGMPThe hiX 5622/25/30/35 supports video services by providing an access controlled multicast (MC) service.

The complete implementation consists of the video head-end which encapsulates and transports the video streams using UDP/IP transport protocol, the hiX 5622/25/30/35 with ADSL2+/SHDSL/VDSL2 interface units operating the multicast, and the set-top box terminating the ADSL2+/VDSL2/SHDSL line at the customer’s home.

The possible options supported from the DSLAM are: • IGMPv2 • IGMPv3.

IGMP is an asymmetric protocol, specifying separate behaviors for group members (hosts or routers that wish to receive multicast packets) and multicast routers.

The following configurations are possible in the DSLAM: • Configuration 1 - IGMPv2

– VLAN is configured to IGMPv2 only mode – Distribution via destination IP address and VLAN as key parameters

• Configuration 2 - IGMPv3– VLAN is configured to IGMPv3 only mode – Distribution via destination IP address, source IP address and VLAN as key

parameters.

10.14.1 Previous Release ContentsIn previous releases, the hiX 5622/25/30/35 supported IGMP version 2 and was compatible with IGMP version 1. It provided multicast capabilities by implementing IGMP snooping in each IU and IGMP proxy in the CXU.

Following messages are supported with IGMPv2:

DSLAM to set-top box:

• General query • Group-specific query

Set-top box to DSLAM:

• Join group message • Leave group message

DSLAM to router:

• Join group message • Leave group message

194

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

Router to DSLAM:

• General query • Group-specific query.

10.14.2 New Multicast Functions with IGMPv3The IP-DSLAM supports IGMPv3 snooping and proxy with the capability to record both the destination group IP address and the source IP address which is the source for the multicast group. Thus, introducing IGMPv3 enables source specific multicast.

There are two types of events that trigger IGMPv3 protocol actions on an interface from a group member’s perspective: • a change of the interface reception state • reception of a query.

IGMPv3 includes also source filtering, using source lists and filter modes for an inter-face. This enables a multicast receiver host to signal to a router the groups from which it wants to receive multicast traffic, and from which sources this traffic is expected, or from which sources it doesn’t whish to hear traffic. This Source Specific Multicast (SSM) allows to specify the source addresses from which reception of packets are expected.

IGMPv3 defines three types of queries: • General query

A general query is sent by a multicast router to learn the complete multicast reception state of the neighboring interfaces (that is, the interfaces attached to the network on which the query is transmitted).

• Group-specific query A group specific query is sent by a multicast router to learn the reception state, with respect to a single multicast address, of the neighboring interfaces. In a group specific query, the group address field contains the multicast address of interest.

• Group and source specific query A group and source specific query is sent by a multicast router to learn if any neigh-boring interface desires reception of packets sent to a specified multicast address, from any of a specified list of sources. In a group and source specific query, the group address field contains the multicast address of interest, and the source address fields contain the source address(es) of interest.

IGMPv3 allows fast leaving mechanisms and explicit host tracking without the problems and restrictions if these features are used with IGMPv2.

Additionally it is an inherit feature of IGMPv3 to support also backward compatibility to IGMPv2. For interoperation with version 2 of IGMP, the following messages are sup-ported: • Version 2 membership report • Version 2 leave group.

10.14.3 IGMP Configuration ModelThe multicast configuration is based on defining multiple multicast providers identified each by a separate MC VLAN. A single VLAN can only be assigned to one MC provider. An MC provider can host several packages, and a package consists of several MC groups which are configured for this package. There is the restriction that a MC group is not allowed being configured in packages that are assigned to different providers. The

195


Id:0900d805805e0770

reason for that restriction is that the same MC group address cannot be used and MC data cannot be forwarded in downstream direction in different VLANs. As a side-effect, an MC group uniquely identifies an MC provider in this way.

Several MC providers can be used at the same time on the same bridge port. If the incoming IGMP traffic on a bridge port is tagged, then the VLAN is the classification key for the MC provider. If IGMP comes untagged on a bridge port, then the MC group address have to be used to identify the right MC provider.

10.14.4 IGMPv3 Source Specific MulticastWith IGMPv3 the Source Specific Multicast (SSM) in addition to the existing Any Source Multicast (ASM) of IGMPv2 is introduced.

SSM provides the following benefits to the customer: • It enables a distributed multicast server architecture where multicast servers can be

assigned to regions providing additional region specific content. • It supports a multi provider environment where the end user is directed to a multicast

server of the provider he is subscribed to.

A channel is defined by the pair (S, G) for the SSM group address G and source host address S.

For mixed scenarios, where ASM and SSM will be supported, the granularity for ASM results in bridge port and multicast group, and for SSM in bridge port and channel (source and multicast group).

SSM Filter ModeThe DSLAM supports the include mode. All include related report types are supported and processed by the IU snooping as well CXU proxy. In include mode, reception of packets sent to the specified multicast address is requested only from those IP source addresses listed in the source list.

The exclude mode with empty source list is supported.

Any other group record (include type) within the same report is processed.

The criteria for multicast replication on CXU and IU is based on destination and source addresses.

10.14.5 IGMP Snooping on IUIn IGMP snooping implementations, IGMP messages are generated from the STB and sent to the IU. Figure 119 has a view on the IGMP snooping in IU.

Snooping in the IU snoops every IGMP join and leave message. According to the message, the multicast FDB in the data plane is set, which makes multicast traffic goes through or is stopped. Then the IU sends the join and leave message to the CXU for further processing.

For IGMPv3, the snooping functionality on the IUs is extended by the capability to record both the destination group IP address and the multicast source IP address. SSM aware snooping is general done by IGMPv3.

196

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

Figure 119 IGMP Snooping on IU

10.14.6 IGMP Proxy on CXUAs the word proxy implies, IGMP proxy software on CXU acts as a query to the sub-scriber side, and as host to the router side. IGMP proxy sends IGMP join to the router only when there’s a new group registered and will send IGMP leave message to the router when all members of a group leaved. That shields the multicast router from managing group membership for all the DSL subscribers.

IGMP join/leave packets are filtered on the CXU where they are handled by the IGMP proxy. With protocol handing, the multicast FDB is configured according to membership change. When there is a new group registered, notification from the protocol handler is sent to the host, which invokes membership report sent to the uplink for the new group. When the protocol handler finds out that no member exists for a group, notification is sent again to the host to invoke leave message sent to the uplink side. The IGMP proxy also supports an IGMP query which sends general queries periodically and a specific query when it received a leave message. IGMP query packets, received from the uplink port, are filtered for the control plane and processed by the host of the IGMP proxy. The host sends a membership report when it finds the queried group existing in the DSLAM.

Figure 120 depicts the proxy handling on CXU.

Subscriber 1

Subscriber 2

Join/239.1.1.1

Join/239.1.1.1

Legend:

Van access point

IGMP join/leaveIGMP queryConfiguration to MC FDB

Interface Unit

Multicast

IGMP Join/239.1.1.1

Join/239.1.1.1

FDB entry

VID MC mac

ProviderVlan id

Multicast groupMAC

Port map

x

Y

z

z

z

snooping

FDB

197


Id:0900d805805e0770

Figure 120 IGMP Proxy on CXU

The hiX 5622/25/30/35 supports IGMPv3 proxy with the capability to record both the destination group IP address and the multicast source IP address.

IGMPv3 proxy is implemented in the CXU based on the well defined IGMPv3 standards and recommendations. The proxy functionality is mainly characterized by: • Proxy routing

All IGMP messages are sent with the IP address of the DSLAM. • Proxy Reporting

IGMP packets are selectively forwarded by the DSLAM only when there is a need for the upstream or downstream devices to see the packet.

IGMPv3 Proxy ReportingProxy reporting includes the following IGMP capabilities

• Report suppression: This reduces traffic from the DSLAM to the multicast router by having the DSLAM aggregate the responses (membership reports) from multiple hosts. The DSLAM can intercept IGMP reports coming from IGMP hosts, and forwards a summarized version to the IGMP router only when necessary.

• Query suppression: This reduces traffic between the DSLAM and the host at the subscriber premises, by having the DSLAM intercept and respond to IGMP queries sent by the router.

• Last leave: This is similar to report suppression, since the DSLAM only forwards leave requests upstream when the last subscriber (connected to the DSLAM) request to leave the multicast group. If there are other subscribers still viewing the channel, the DSLAM drops the request after responding locally.

10.14.7 IGMP Snooping on CXUIn contrast to IGMP proxy, with IGMP snooping the IGMP signal will be unmodified. Only a copy of the IGMP packet is branched off to the host.

Host

IGMP

Control Plane

Data Plane

Original IGMP Packet

CXU

Filter

(Different) IGMP Packets

IGMP Querier

IGMP

IGMP Proxy - Separated Protocol Interaction between Subscriber and Server

198

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

Figure 121 depicts the snooping handling on CXU.

Figure 121 IGMP Snooping on CXU

10.14.8 IGMP Fast LeaveThe general procedure of the channel change issues a leave IGMP command (current channel is no more used) followed by a join IGMP command for a new channel. Without fast leave feature, the standardized procedure requests the IP DSLAM to issue a further command to all subscribers. When this channel is really no more used by any sub-scriber; the channel will be released afterwards by the IP DSLAM. According to this pro-cedure, the release of the channel can only occur after a predefined time. With the feature fast leave, the operator can configure the DSLAM in a way, that after receiving a leave message from the DSL line, there is no need to wait for any response (after query) from the subscribers device, rather the channel can be released immediately.

10.14.9 IGMP Explicit Host Tracking for Fast LeaveExplicit Host Tracking (EHT) allows the use of multiple set top boxes on one DSL port. In general, the fast leave procedure implies, that in case a set top box is leaving a channel, the DSLAM must immediately stop sending this channel to this port. This means, in case several set top boxes are connected to the same DSL line and have selected the same video channel, they would also be hit. Therefore the DSLAM keeps track of the number of set top boxes which have requested the channel. Only in case all of them left a certain channel, the channel will be released.

For IGMPv3, the explicit tracking of hosts, groups and channels enables a multicast device to explicitly track the membership of all multicast hosts in a particular network. This enhancement enables tracking of each individual host that is joined to a particular group or channel. The main benefits of explicit host tracking are, that it provides minimal leave latencies and faster channel changing. With EHT enabled for a bridge port, the IGMP snooper at the IU knows about the number of subscribers joined the same MC group and/or channel. The snooper adds or updates an entry for a bridge port and channel (multicast group + source IP address) in the EHT database and updates an EHT counter every time an IGMP report was received.

Host

IGMP

Control Plane

Data Plane

CXU

Filter

IGMP Snooper

IGMP

IGMP Snooping - Direct Protocol Interaction between Subscriber and Server

Copy of IGMP Packets

m/cConfigu-

ration

199


Id:0900d805805e0770

10.14.10 IGMPv3 User StatisticsThe DSLAM provides IGMPv3 user statistics (i.e. number of IGMP queries received, etc. for a stream or for a multicast group) for all active groups and sources on a per VLAN and per port basis. • Per VLAN refers to per provider source IP address • Per port refers to per bridge port source IP address.

The already existing statistics as known from version 2 are extended by the source spe-cifics. This includes but is not limited to: • The number of IGMP queries received, etc. for a multicast group • IGMP messages per second including maximum value with time stamp (via CLI) • Maximum number of active multicast groups with time stamp per port and per

DSLAM (via CLI).

10.14.11 Multicast Service Support with IPoA-to-IPoE InterworkingA new multicast service for business customers connected via ADSL2+ or SHDSL.bis is introduced for IPoA-to-IPoE interworking on the IU. The multicast service for business subscriber is not necessarily video traffic, it can be multicast data traffic as well. For instance, IS-IS signaling is using multicast addresses and sends traffic in upstream direction as well. Another example is to send SW upgrades available for the CPE owned by the operator.

The cross-connect mode with added port and service tag can be used to handle the interworking between ATM and Ethernet also for multicast packets with the IPoA-to-IPoE interworking function of the IU. The DSLAM is not involved in any protocol signal-ing where multicast destination addresses are used, e.g. PIM or IGMP signaling.

Upstream Direction: IP multicast packets received from the CPE on the ADSL2+ or SHDSL.bis line can be sent by the DSLAM to the corresponding S_VLAN/C_VLAN), using as Ethernet MAC destination address the one got from the IP destination address via the standard mapping rules and as source MAC address the one of the GE physical/logical interface of the DSLAM. The multicast traffic is then flooded within the VLAN.

Downstream Direction: All packets with MAC multicast addresses for which a S_VLAN/C_VLAN couplet corre-sponding to a defined and present access line can be accepted and transparently for-warded, are flooded within the VLAN to the corresponding IU to process reverse IPoA-to-IPoE interworking. The transported IP packet must then be sent to the corresponding bridge port/PVC. Multicast Ethernet frames that do not contain IP multicast traffic with destination address in the defined range are ignored by the interworking function.

10.14.12 Modification of IGMP ParametersThere is a set of IGMP parameter according to the following list which are configurable for the IGMP proxy via SNMP to control the behavior of IGMP: • Modification of Last Member Query Count • IGMP Last Member Query Interval • IGMP Query Interval • IGMP Maximum Response Time • IGMP Robustness Variable

200

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

• Startup Query Count • Startup Query Interval

All IGMP parameter are configurable per IGMP/MC provider so that each provider can have its own IGMP configuration. This configuration is also given to the IUs within the initial MC configuration.

10.14.13 Access and Admission Control

10.14.13.1 IGMP Access ControlAccess control is provided in each IU to control DSL subscriber’s access to the multicast service. When a subscriber sends an IGMP join message for a multicast group, this message would be filtered to the control plane where the access control is first applied.

Figure 122 IGMP Access Control

When the subscriber has no right to access this group, this join message would be dropped and so the access to multicast is denied. When the subscriber has the authority to join this group, the join message would be sent to the IGMP snooping for further han-dling. Figure 122 shows IGMP join/leave packet handling processed in IU.

10.14.13.2 Admission Control for Multicast Traffic (IPTV)Admission control for multicast traffic is applicable for both IGMPv2 and IGMPv3. The following sub-features are supported: • The operator can configure a bandwidth for each multicast group (IPTV channel) • The operator can configure a maximum bandwidth for multicast services (IPTV) and

a minimum remaining bandwidth for unicast services per subscriber port • The operator can configure a maximum number of allowed multicast groups (IPTV

channels) in the range of 0 to 32 (value for “unlimited” is also possible) • The IP-DSLAM blocks requests under following conditions:

DSL subscriber 1

DSL subscriber 2

DSL subscriber 3

Control plane

AccessControl

SnoopingHandling

Filter

Interface Unit

Multicast

Data plane

Filtered with the IGMP protocol

FDB

201


Id:0900d805805e0770

– The total bandwidth of all active multicast flows for this subscriber exceeds the configured maximum multicast bandwidth for this port.

– The total bandwidth of all active multicast flows for this subscriber exceeds the current bandwidth of the DSL link reduced by configured minimum bandwidth for unicast services.

– The total number of active multicast flows for this subscriber exceeds the configured maximum number.

10.14.14 Static Configuration of IGMP Multicast ChannelsStatic multicast groups can be used for the most popular channels, while the others are handled by dynamic join.

Fix configuration of multicast streams (via ACI-E) in the DSLAM prior to first customer is requesting a channel via SNMP or CLI. All IGMP messages are suppressed on the uplink. Due to fixed configuration even the initial IGMP message is not needed.

10.15 IS-IS RoutingIf the hiX 5622/25/30/35 is part of an autonomous system in metro area networks, IS-IS (Intermediate System to Intermediate System) routing can be used inside the routing domain to form adjacencies between all L3 nodes of the same domain.

IS-IS stores information about the link states and uses that data to select paths. IS-IS is used to intermittently send out link state information across the network, so that each router can maintain a current picture of network topology. Optional metrics can be used to identify network delay, expense, and error involved with the use of a particular link.

IS-IS permits intermediate systems within a routing domain to exchange configuration and routing information to facilitate the operation of the routing and relaying functions of the network layer.

The implementation of IS-IS for the hiX 5622/25/30/35 is dedicated to IP routing (Integrated IS-IS). The IS-IS routing protocol is implemented according RFC1142 and RFC1195. Connectionless network routing and end system-IS discovery are not supported.

IS-IS routing makes use of two-level hierarchical routing. Level 1 routers know the topology in their area, including all routers and hosts, but they do not know the identity of routers or destinations outside of their area. Level 1 routers forward all traffic for destinations outside of their area to a level 2 router within their area which knows the level 2 topology. An IS-IS area may consist of L1 routers only, L1/L2 routers or L2 only or a combination of all.

All level 1 routers and hosts in an area must have a Network Service Access Point (NSAP) with the same area address. Level 1 and level 2 routers may have neighbors in any area. They have two link-state databases: a level 1 link-state database for intra-area routing and a level 2 link-state database for inter-area routing.

Running integrated IS-IS, a default IP route will automatically be installed in the level 1 routers pointing toward the nearest level 1/level 2 router that originally set the attached bit in its level 1 LSP. If there are multiple level 2-capable routers in the area, the closest level 1/level 2 router is selected based on the cost.

202

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

It is assumed that the hiX 5622/25/30/35 is part of a single area and it therefore performs the tasks of a level-1 router. The hiX 5622/25/30/35 runs IS-IS at the uplink ports only, not at subscriber ports.

IS-IS operations: • Routers running IS-IS will send hello packets out all IS-IS-enabled interfaces to

discover neighbors and establish adjacencies. • Routers sharing a common data link will become IS-IS neighbors if their hello

packets contain information that meets the criteria for forming an adjacency (matching authentication, IS-type, Multi-Tenant Unit size).

• Routers may build a link-state packet (LSP) based upon their local interfaces that are configured for IS-IS and prefixes learned from other adjacent routers.

• Generally, routers flood LSPs to all adjacent neighbors except the neighbor from which they received the same LSP.

• All routers will construct their link-state database from these LSPs. • A shortest-path tree (SPT) is calculated by each IS, and from this SPT the routing

table is built.

10.16 BGP Version 4Border Gateway Routing Protocol (BGPv4) facilitates connectivity throughout the Internet providing optimized communications by selecting the best path to a destination, and responds and adapts to frequent network changes. BGP introduces the concepts of communication between Autonomous Systems (AS), BGP state machines, and incre-mental updates. BGP is a distance vector routing protocol based upon a similar concept as RIP. A path with the smallest hop count is assumed to be the optimal route to a destination.

BGP resolves several challenges associated with the Internet: • Scalability • Responsiveness and • Control.

The hiX 5622/25/30/35 system supports BGPv4 according to RFC1771.

ScalabilityRIP calculates the best path to a remote destination based upon individual router hops. BGP calculates it based upon autonomous system hops. RIP, for example, generates a lot of overhead and control traffic. BGP reduces this traffic. The use of the so-called “trig-gered updates” improves the scalability of the protocol. This means that two adjacent BGP routers will only exchange their entire routing tables once – as they initiate a com-munications session. After a session is established, the two routers will exchange brief “hello” messages periodically to verify the integrity of the connection. They will only exchange routing data, or Network Layer Reachability Information (NLRI), when a topo-logical change takes place. BGP achieves further scalability by supporting network aggregation and summarization. Advertisements for networks with contiguous IP addresses can be combined into single summary announcements. This reduces the size of the forwarding databases of each router. Network summarization is based upon the principles of Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR), which identifies IP networks based on the desired length of the network prefix.

203


Id:0900d805805e0770

ResponsivenessWhen a BGP router discovers a topology change either by a status change or via an update message from another router, it immediately floods this information to all other adjacent routers. These routers in turn update their local routing and forwarding tables with the new information, and then forward the change to their peers. That way, topology changes are propagated very rapidly. Since BGP uses TCP, a certain degree of reliability is added to the update procedure. Secondly, by using hold down timers, the effect of frequently flapping routes can be dampened. The generation of multiple adver-tisements for the same route will be prevented. Otherwise, this would force routers to constantly recalculate their routing and forwarding tables.

10.17 ADSL Interface ConfigurationThe ADSL interface units IU_ADSL48 and IU_ADSL72 are functionally located between the CXU and external splitter units or connect directly to the MDF for data only solutions, and support the following features: • 48 ADSL interfaces per IU_ADSL48, and 72 ADSL interfaces per IU_ADSL72 • Different HW versions of ADSL interface units support the following variants:

Via splitter– IU_ADSL48 and IU_ADSL72 Annex A

ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ full rate over POTSIn case of ADSL2 functionality the IU_ADSL72 includes also Annex L

– IU_ADSL72 Annex BADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ full rate over ISDN

Without splitter– IU_ADSL72 Annex I/J:

All Digital Mode ADSL2/ADSL2+ over POTS

• The ports on the IU_ADSL48 can be configured for support of:– ADSL functionality (ITU-T G.992.1)– ADSL2 functionality (ITU-T G.992.3)– ADSL2+ functionality (ITU-T G.992.5)

• The ports on the IU_ADSL72 Annex A can be configured for support of:– ADSL functionality (ITU-T G.992.1)– ADSL2 functionality (ITU-T G.992.3) including Annex L– ADSL2+ functionality (ITU-T G.992.5)

• The ports on the IU_ADSL72 Annex B can be configured for support of:– ADSL functionality (ITU-T G.992.1)– ADSL2 functionality (ITU-T G.992.3)– ADSL2+ functionality (ITU-T G.992.5)

• The ports on the IU_ADSL72 Annex I/J can be configured for support of:– ADSL2 functionality (ITU-T G.992.3)– ADSL2+ functionality (ITU-T G.992.5)

• IU_ADSL48, IU_ADSL72 Annex A and IU_ADSL72 Annex B support the following data rates:

204

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

– ADSL ports enableDownstream: 32 kbit/s to about 8128 kbit/sUpstream: 32 kbit/s to about 1300-1400 kbit/s (dependent of the used modem)The line rates are set with a 32 kbit/s granularity.

– ADSL2 ports enableDownstream: 32 kbit/s to about 11,000 kbit/sUpstream: 32 kbit/s to about 1500 kbit/sThe line rates are set with a 4 kbit/s granularity.

– ADSL2+ ports enableDownstream: 32 kbit/s to about 25,000 kbit/sUpstream: 32 kbit/s to about 1500 kbit/sThe line rates are set with a 8 kbit/s granularity.

• IU_ADSL72 Annex J support the following data rates:– ADSL2 ports enable

Downstream: 32 kbit/s to about 11,000 kbit/s Upstream: 32 kbit/s to about 3000 kbit/s The line rates are set with a 4 kbit/s granularity.

– ADSL2+ ports enableDownstream: 32 kbit/s to about 25,000 kbit/s Upstream: 32 kbit/s to about 3000 kbit/s The line rates are set with a 8 kbit/s granularity.

• Latency: fixed or interleaved mode can be configured for each ADSL port. • Latency paths:

A single latency path is supported for each ADSL2+ port. The maximum delay and the minimum impulse noise protection (INP) level are separately set for each ADSL2+ port.

• Extended framingThe IU_ADSL72 supports extended framing. This allows to transmit data rates greater than 11 Mbit/s also in operation mode “Interleaved” with a typical INP pro-tection of two symbols together with a maximum delay of 16 ms.

With IU_VDSL24, IU_VDSL24P and IU_VDSL48P, ADSL2+ profiles can be used instead of VDSL2 profiles for the individual ports.

The IU_VDSL24/IU_VDSL24P/IU_VDSL48P supports in ADSL2+ mode the following functions: • ADSL2+ according ITU-T G.992.5 • IU_VDSL24

ADSL2+ over ISDN (Annex B) • IU_VDSL24P and IU_VDSL48P

ADSL2+ over POTS (Annex A) • Data rates

Downstream: 32 kbit/s to about 25,000 kbit/sUpstream: 32 kbit/s to about 1500 kbit/s.

• Latency pathsA single latency path is supported for each ADSL2+ port. The maximum delay and the minimum impulse noise protection (INP) level are separately set for each ADSL2+ port.

• Extended framingThe IU_VDSL24/IU_VDSL24P supports extended framing. This allows to transmit

205


Id:0900d805805e0770

data rates greater than 7.6 Mbit/s also in operation mode “Interleaved” with a typical INP protection of two symbols together with a maximum delay of 16 ms.

10.18 VDSL2 Interface ConfigurationThe VDSL2 interface units IU_VDSL24, IU_VDSL24P and IU_VDSL48P are functionally located between the CXU and external passive splitter units.

The VDSL2 line card was released first with Annex B, band plan 998, profiles 8b and 17a. With hiX 5622/25/30/35 R2.8 additional band plans and profiles are supported. For detailed information, please see release notes.

Figure 123 VDSL2 Profiles

20.5 dBm

17.5 dBm

14.5 dBm

11.5 dBm

VDSL2 8b

VDSL2 8a

VDSL2 8d

VDSL2 8c

VDSL212a,b

VDSL217a

VDSL230a

1.1 2.2 8.8 12.0 17.6 MHz 30.0

256 512 2048 2782 4096 # of tones 6956

Analogbandwidth

DSP power

Tx power

Region Index

North America A

Europe B

Japan C

206

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

Figure 124 VDSL2 Bandplans

The IU_VDSL24, IU_VDSL24P and IU_VDSL48P interface units support in VDSL2 mode the following features:– VDSL2 in accordance with ITU-G.993.2 – Bandplan Annex A 998 D-32/EU32 or D-64/EU64, profile 8b and profile 17a 1)

– Bandplan Annex B 997 (B7-5), profile 8a for IU_VDSL24P (-A1) 1)

– Bandplan 998 Annex B (B8-6), profile 8b, and (B8-12), profile 17a 1)

– Data rates: 100 Mbit/s symmetrically or unsymmetrically, granularity 8 kbit/s– IU_VDSL24: line codes for ISDN service: 4B3T or 2B1Q– IU_VDSL24P: POTS service, in combination with different splitter units providing

impedances of 600 Ohm, or complex impedance of 270 Ohm + 750 Ohm || 150 nF 2).– IU_VDSL48P: POTS service, in combination with different splitter units providing

impedances of 600 Ohm, or complex impedance of 270 Ohm + 750 Ohm || 150 nF 2).


2) Further splitter units on demand, only splitter units with decoupling capacitors are allowed

3.0 3.75 5.1 5.2 5.8 7.05 8.5 12.0 17.7Bandwidth/MHz

0.025 0.138 0.276 0.64 2.2

997 A

997 M

997 E17

998 B

998 N/A

998 E17

998 ADE17

998 ADE17

998 ADE17

US1 US2DS1 DS2

US1 DS2 US2

DS1 US1 DS2 US2

998 A DS1 US1 DS2 US2

DS1 US1 DS2 US2

DS1 US1 DS2 US2

DS1 US1 DS2 US2

DS1 US1 DS2 US2

DS1 US1 DS2 US2

DS1 US1 DS2 US2

DS3 US3

14 30

DS3US3

Bandplan

DS3

DS3

DS3

6 32 64 148 510 695 869 1182 1205 1634 2048 2782 3246 40961344 Subcarrier

Configurable

DS1

998 M DS1 US1 DS2 US2

B998M2xB

B998ADE17M2xB

US0

(B8-12)

B997M2A

(B8-6)

(B7-5)

207


Id:0900d805805e0770

10.19 SHDSL Interface ConfigurationThe IU_SHDSL48 is a 48 port SHDSL interface unit. It terminates the SHDSL links and aggregates the traffic on a GE (Gigabit Ethernet) uplink. The IU_SHDSL48 (-A2) supports M-pair mode up to 4 pairs according G.992.1.

No splitter unit is needed to be installed for SHDSL lines, but dummy splitter units enable SHDSL units to connect to the MDF through the splitter shelf. This means SHDSL units can be cabled in the same manner as ADSL units through the same splitter subrack or you can upgrade ADSL installations with SHDSL.

The SHDSL modems inside the SHDSL interface units support the following features: • 48 SHDSL interfaces per interface unit IU_SHDSL48 • Supported data rates in 2-wire mode: 2.3 Mbit/s (TC-PAM16)

– ITU-T G.991.2 Annex B– ETSI TS 101 524.

• Supported data rates in 4-wire mode when SHDSL bonding with 2 ports: 4.6 Mbit/s • Supported standards are ETSI TS 101 524, ITU-T G.991.2 (2001) and ITU-T

G.991.2 (2004):– Wetting current– CC enhanced SHDSL (SHDSL.bis)– Annex A/B: standard mode ANSI/ETSI for data rates up to 2.3 Mbps

Annex F/G: enhanced mode ANSI/ETSI for data rates up to 5.7 Mbps (enhanced bit rate)

• TC-PAM16, UC-PAM16 and UC-PAM32 line coding.

10.20 Rate Adaptation ModesRate adaptation can be configured independently for upstream/downstream traffic via the OS. You can select one of two or three rate adaptation modes (RA modes):

Mode Description

“MANUAL” (fixed) This is a fixed rate mode where the fixed data rate corresponds with the configured minimum net data rate. The configured maximum net data rate is ignored. If line conditions do not permit the configured minimum data rate, the connection cannot be activated for data transfer.

“AT_INIT” (adapt at init) During initialization in this mode, the net data rate for the connection is configured automatically within the permitted data rate range. At the same time, the ADSL/VDSL2 modems attempt activation with the maximum possible data rate within the permitted data rate range, in accordance with profile settings and line conditions. The permitted range is defined via the OS with the parameters “Min data rate” and “Max data rate”. If the minimum data rate cannot be reached, the connection is not activated.Once activated (“showtime”), the data rate for the connection remains constant.

Table 132 Rate Adaptation Modes

208

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

g Dynamic rate adaptation is only supported for ADSL2, ADSL2+ and VDSL2 (if released for the relevant version).

Figure 125 shows an example of seamless bit rate adaptation (dynamic mode).

Figure 125 Seamless Rate Adaptation

Rate Adaptation RatioUsing the parameter Rate Adaptation Ratio (in %), the distribution ratio of additionally available data rates that exceed the minimum data rate (totalled for all bearer channels) can be configured for the individual bearer channels in rate adaption mode. The total for all bearer channels must equal 100%.

“DYNAMIC” (adapt at runtime) During initialization in dynamic mode (also known as “Seamless Rate Adaptation Mode”,SRA), the net data rate for the connection is configured automatically within a permitted data rate range (similar to “AT_INIT” mode). At the same time, the ADSL/VDSL2 modems attempt activation with the maximum possible data rate within the permitted data rate range, in accordance with profile settings and line conditions. The permitted range is defined via the OS with the parameters “Min data rate” and “Max data rate”. If the minimum data rate cannot be reached, the connection is not activated. During an active connection (“showtime”), the net data rate for the connection is continually adapted to the line conditions. The per-mitted data rate range is defined by the user via the OS with the parame-ters “Min data rate” and “Max data rate”. Data rate adaptation is performed during showtime when the conditions defined by the user via the OS-programmable parameters “Up/Downshift Noise Margin” and “Up/Downshift Time Interval” are fulfilled. If the current margin value is less than the minimum (upshift) margin or more than the maximum (downshift) margin for the corresponding time period (Up/Downshift Time Interval,1 to 16383 seconds) the data rate is increased or decreased accordingly. If dynamic transmission power control is activated, reaching the maximum configured data rate takes precedence over reducing the transmission power, see Section 10.22.

Mode Description

Table 132 Rate Adaptation Modes (Cont.)

Increasedata rate

Max margin

Upshift margin

Actual margin

Downshift margin

Min margin

Min waitingtime

Decreasedata rate

Time

dB

Min downshifttime

209


Id:0900d805805e0770

However, hiX 5622/25/30/35 only supports one bearer channel. For this reason, the value should be set to 100. This function was implemented with a view to supporting dual latency.

10.21 Spectral Shaping and RFI BandsVDSL2 supports spectral shaping and the configuration of RFI bands (Radio Frequency Interference) via the OS.

Spectral shaping allows you to define an individual spectral mask (PSD mask) in order to perform manual spectrum management. The PSD mask can be necessary if national or provider-specific requirements must be met, or if fault conditions are to be specifically optimized in a connection area in order to reduce crosstalk, for example if trunk groups are located adjacent to one another or if interference is evident.

To enable MIB PSD mask definition, 32 points (known as breakpoints) may be used for downstream MIB PSD mask. For the upstream MIB PSD mask the maximum number of breakpoints is 4 for G.992.3/5 and 16 for G.993.2. Each breakpoint shall consist of a subcarrier index t, with a subcarrier spacing of 4.3125 kHz and a MIB PSD mask level (expressed in dBm/Hz) at that subcarrier. The requirements for a valid set of breakpoints are defined in the relevant recommendations (e.g. ITU-T recommendations G.992.3 or G.993.2).

RFI band configuration allows the transmission power density of VDSL2 connections in the corresponding frequency bandwidths to be considerably reduced. This prevents xDSL transmission signals disrupting radio services operating in these frequency band-widths.

Every RFI band is defined by 2 breakpoints (start and end subcarrier, see Figure 126) that correspond to the start and end frequency of the RFI band.

Figure 126 shows the default PSD and an individually-defined PSD mask with an RFI attenuation maximum (RFI notch).

Figure 126 Spectral Shaping and RFI Tone Masking (Example)

Custom PSD maskRFI notch

End

Subcarrier

Default PSD mask

StartFrequency

definition points

dBm

/Hz

210

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

10.22 Dynamic Transmission Power ControlThe hiX 5622/25/30/35 supports dynamic transmission power control in accordance with ITU G.997.1. This means that during the active connection (showtime), the transmission power is automatically adapted within the permitted range to the line conditions. The adaption is implemented when the conditions defined via the OS-programmable parameters for the maximum and minimum noise margin are fulfilled.

The transmission signal strength can be reduced if the available channel capacity on the VDSL2 subscriber lines should not be used. Lowering the transmission power reduces interference on adjacent lines in a trunk group and also restricts the power consumption of the module. The level of power reduction depends largely on the selected parameter settings for the maximum and minimum noise margin, the required data rate and on the fault conditions of the corresponding subscriber line.

You can enable this mode from the OS by selecting a maximum signal-noise margin (MAXSNRM) less than 31 dB.

The usability of this feature depends on the type of VDSL2 and on the CPE implemen-tation.This feature is supported for VDSL2 in accordance with ITU G.997.1:

• If the CPE supports dynamic transmission power control, it measures the actual maximum signal-noise margin for the connection during training and operation. If the actual signal to noise margin exceeds the configured MaxSNR margin, reducing of downstream transmit power is requested. If the actual signal to noise margin falls below to the configured MinSNR margin, the CPE requests increasing the down-stream transmit power at the IU port. If the transmission power cannot be increased, connection retraining is initiated.

• If the CPE does not support dynamic transmission power control, and this mode is activated, the CPE reports the actual signal to noise margin during training. If this exceeds the maximum level, the IU may initiate line retraining and may reduce the transmission power. This is only possible when the line is being trained for the first time. During operation, the IU only reacts if the actual signal to noise margin falls below the minimum level. A retraining is then initiated.

Figure 127 shows and example of power reduction (Power back-off) during operation.

Figure 127 Example of Power Back-Off

Powerback-off

Actual SNR margin

dB

TimePower increase Retrain

Max SNR margin<31 dB

Min SNR margin

211


Id:0900d805805e0770

10.23 L2 Energy-Saving StatusWith millions of ADSL modems deployed around the world operating at full power state all day long, a significant amount of power resource is consumed. Statistically nowa-days, during most of the time, the ADSL modem is in idle state and not even transmitting or receiving any data. A good deal of electrical power could be saved if the modems are engaged in a standby or sleeping mode. In addition, this power-save is more helpful for ADSL transceivers operating in small remote units and digital loop carrier (DLC) cabinets that operate under very strict heat dissipation requirements.

L2 energy-saving status allows for changes in the downstream control parameters without a retrain and without cause of transmission errors. L2 energy-saving status is uses the same signaling mechanism as seamless rate adaption.

The L2 energy-saving status supports two kinds of parameter changing:

• Changing parameters to minimize the aggregate transmit power • Changing parameters to dynamically change the actual date rate.

The G.992.3 standard (G.992.3/5 or G.993.2) defines a set of stable ADSL link states between the ATU-R and ATU-C. An ATU (ADSL Transceiver Unit) should support the ADSL power management link states shown in Table 133:

Power saving mode “L2” is not supported in all VDSL cards. State “L0” means IU is working in the full power state. This is the case when IU is per-forming data transferring. When IU is at an idling time between data transactions, it would goes into state “L2”, which means a power-saving mode. In the "L3" state, the physical link is not active. The state switching is shown in the state diagram Figure 128 below:

State Name Description

L0 Full On The ADSL link is fully functional.

L2 Low Power The ADSL link is active but a low power signal conveying background data is sent from the ATU-C to the ATU-R. A normal data carrying signal is trans-mitted from the ATU-R to the ATU-C.

L3 Idle There is no signal transmitted at the ATU-C and ATU-R reference points. The ATU may be powered or unpowered in L3. There is no autonomously transition from or to L3 state supported. L3 is used if a line is deactivated.

ATU (ADSL Transceiver Unit) A device that provides ADSL modulation of the telephone line. The device at the telecom side is the ATU-C (Central office end), which is a line card plugged into the IP-DSLAM. The unit at the customer's side is the ATU-R (Remote terminal end), which is either an external modem or a card plugged into the PC.

Table 133 L2 Energy-saving Status

212

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

Figure 128 ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ Power Management Link States

“L2” is the energy-saving state the Low Power State:The L2 energy-saving state low power state typified by:

• Reduced downstream powerIt is reduced with entering L2 state. The maximum reduction per power trim can be configured with the parameter L2-ATPR. The total aggregate transmit power reduc-tion can be configured up to a maximum of 31 dB. Power management can cut up to a maximum of 40 dB of power from the full power L0 state.

• Lowering bit rateThis mode enables statistical power savings at the ADSL transceiver unit in the central equipment (ATU-C) by rapidly entering and exiting low power mode based on Internet traffic running over the ADSL connection. The system can monitor the data traffic on the ADSL line and controls parameters. After a period of time, when no packets have been transmitted, the ADSL transceiver will be instructed to go into the L2 mode. During L2, the ADSL transceiver can instantly re-enter L0, and can increase the data rate to the maximum as soon the user initiates a file download. The L2 entry/exit mechanisms and resulting data rate adaptations are accomplished without any service interruption or bit errors, so that it is not noticed by the user.

The L2 energy-saving status makes possible to decrease the energy requirement on the telecom side ADSL transceiver unit in that period of time, in which the subscriber request none or only small data volume. The system can watch the data traffic in subscriber direction and can take settings dependent of that data traffic. The connection is changed from L0 state to L2 state, if the data rate which is necessary for transmission of the data volume falls for a defined time (L0 time) below a threshold which is defined by the operator (minimum L2 rate). Is this condition continuing, then the system can further reduce the transmit power in configurable time intervals (minimum L2 time) with a configurable maximal step rate (L2-ATPR) until a configurable maximally total power back-off (L2-ATPRT). When the data volume to the subscriber exceeds in L2 state the transmission capacity of the ADSL connection, because for example the subscriber opens a new internet side including a lot of graphic information, then the system returns immediately without deficit in the normal state L0 with the appropriate transmit power and data rate.The L2 entry/exit mechanisms and the resulted data rate adaptations are in progress without service interruption or data loss, so that the user do not notice something.

Supported Functionalities:Besides the power management functionalities implemented on the board, the following configurations are also supported in the software:

autonomous transaction if

L0

L3L2

unlock

Full “On”

Low power Idle

traffic below configured MinL2 rate

autonomous transaction if traffic exceeds actual L2 rate

213


Id:0900d805805e0770

• Enable/disable L2 or L3 state on the specified port • Configure the state transfer timer thresholds/parameters on the specified port

Configure the parameters for the time thresholds (L0 time, L2 time) • Configure the step rate (step size) and the total power back-off (L2-ATPR,

L2-ATPRT). • Configure the minimum data rate in L2 state (MinL2-rate). • Change the ADSL power management status of specified port to appointed status

by forcedChanging of state from L0 state to L2 state (caution: this function can affect the data traffic) or from L2 state to L0 state. the ADSL power management status of specified port to appointed status by forced.

• Display power management link status for the specified port

10.24 Access Node Control Protocol (ANCP)SURPASS hiX 5622/25/30/35 supports the Access Node Control Protocol (ANCP) for high speed internet access via ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+/VDSL2/SHDSL subscriber lines and uplink interfaces of CXU.The ANCP has the following main functionalities: • Topology reports

These reports will be sent whenever the state of an assigned DSL line changes (comes up or down). The following parameters are sent:– DSL type– DSL port state– Actual data rates upstream/downstream– Attainable data rates upstream/downstream– Configured minimum data rate upstream/downstream– Configured maximum data rate upstream/downstreamAdditional for ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+/VDSL2: – Minimum data rates in low power state upstream/downstream– Maximum interleaving delay upstream/downstream– Actual interleaving delay upstream/downstream

• ANCP enables OAM loopbacks with ADSL and port status test with VDSL2:– F5 end-to-end ATM OAM loopbacks with ADSL on BRAS request

For maintenance purposes the ANCP can be used to support F5 end-to-end ATM OAM loopbacks to check the connectivity between CPE/xDSL modem and DSLAM. This check is performed by the DSLAM for a specific port on demand of the BRAS.

– Port status test with VDSL2Using an ANCP operation, the BRAS can trigger a port status test (activated via a local management interface). The DSLAM is used to send the test result to the BRAS via ANCP.

The test result is displayed to the operator on a local management interface. In this way, the connectivity both on the subscriber side and between the DSLAM and the BRAS can be checked through a single event.

ANCP is used in hiX 5622/25/30/35 to deliver information about the type of DSL subscriber line as well as upstream and downstream bit rates to the broadband remote access server (BRAS). Without this information, BRAS has to adjust its shaping

214

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

functions to the maximum configured bit rate values. However, traffic losses can occur in the DSLAM and incorrect billing may ensue if the actual rate is lower than the maximum rate.

ANCP is currently standardized by the IETF ANCP Working Group. The ANCP is based on proposed extensions for the GSMP (RFC 3292) as well as the TCP encapsulation defined in RFC 3293.

An individual synchronization protocol (adjacency) is also transmitted between DSLAM and the BRAS. Up to ten BRAS sessions can be configured in the DSLAM. An ANCP communication channel is set up for each BRAS session. This means that an IP address must be defined for each BRAS connected to the CXU. All of the BRAS sessions can run in parallel, irrespective of the uplink interface used.

On the DSLAM side, an IP address must be defined which will be used as the DSLAM address for ANCP purposes. In addition, a VLAN ID must be defined for the CXU uplink for ANCP communication channel assignment. All ANCP sessions share the same VLAN ID.

Figure 129 Shaping

10.25 Traffic ManagementTraffic management assures the quality of service and the flexibility to allocate band-width to the desired service/user meeting the service level agreements agreed between operators and end users.

The mechanisms supported by the hiX 5622/25/30/35 to provide traffic management are input rate limit, CoS, queuing and scheduling mechanisms.


hiX 5625/30/35

B-RASCPE

IP

PPP

PPPoE

MAC

IP

PPP

PPPoE

VLANMAC

Eth PHY

IP

PHYEth

VLANATM

xDSL Eth

AAL5

Eth

RG

ATM

xDSL

AAL5

215


Id:0900d805805e0770

Figure 130 Traffic Management

Traffic management of the hiX 5622/25/30/35 supports policing (rate-control) of upstream traffic to equal or lower than the physical line rate. It also supports shaping (i.e., rate-control and buffer) of traffic in downstream direction. Rate limitation in upstream direction is done in 64 kbps steps and determines whether or not a frame is forwarded, discarded, or forwarded with some higher drop precedence in case of a filled queue.

The following tables give an overview about the policing and shaping functions on the different units:

Flow1

Flow2

Flow3

Flow4

Flow5

Flow...

Classifier

1

Queue 8

Queue 7

Queue 6

Queue 5

Queue 4

Queue 3

Queue 2

Queue 1Meter

Marker ShaperPolicer

QueuingScheduling

QueueManager

Metering/MarkingPolicing/Shaping

Classification

Meter


Meter


Meter


Policing Per DSL port (UNI port)

Per PVC Per destination IP address or source IP address

Per C-VID

(inner VID)

Acc. CoS (.1p)

Acc. DSCP

Per protocol (ARP, IGMP,

DHCP)

Policing (upstream) at UNI provided on CXU 1) CXU 1) CXU 1) CXU 1) CXU 1)

IU_ADSL72-B1 IU_ADSL72-ADL-A1 If 1 VC per port x

IU_SHDSL48-A2/-A4 IU_ADSL72-C1 U_ADSL72-D1 IU_ADSL72-ADL-D1

x x x x x x

IU_VDSL24IU_VDSL24PIU_VDSL48P

x x x x x x

x supported1) with one rate, without any bursts

Table 134 Overview of Unit’s Policing Functions

216

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

10.25.1 IU_ADSL48-CNXThe IU_ADSL48-CNX supports packet based QoS traffic management. There are 8 queues per DSL port in downstream direction. Main features for traffic management are: • Packet based traffic management • Packet scheduling with Strict Priority (SP) • 8 queues per port.

10.25.2 IU_ADSL72-C1The IU_ADSL72-C1 supports ATM based traffic management with 8 queues per PVC.

Main features related to traffic management are: • ATM based traffic management. • Queue scheduling per PVC • 8 queues per PVC (bridge port).

10.25.3 IU_VDSL24/P, IU_VDSL48P, IU_SHDSL48, IU_ADSL72-C1 and IU_ADSL72-D1IU_VDSL24 and IU_VDSL48 support hierarchical queuing and scheduling (HQS) as well as the scheduling of 8 flat queues per DSL port. IU_ADSL72-C1, IU_ADSL72-D1 and IU_SHDSL48-A2 support hierarchical queuing and scheduling (HQS) as well as the scheduling of 4 flat queues per DSL port. IU_SHDSL48-A4 supports hierarchical queuing and scheduling (HQS) as well as the scheduling of 8 flat queues per DSL port.

Because flat queuing and hierarchical queuing are available on the same IU, the IU can be configured to set the queuing model to flat or hierarchical. The queuing model con-figured applies to the whole IU. All physical subscriber ports have the same queuing mode. If HQS is enabled, two levels can be configured for 4 queues each.

Shaping Per DSL port (UNI port)

Per PVC Acc. CoS (.1p)

Shaping (downstream) at UNI provided on

IU_ADSL72-B1 IU_ADSL72-ADL-A1

If 1 VC, or n x VCs with the same QoS According ATM QoS 1)

IU_SHDSL48-A2/-A4 IU_ADSL72-C1 U_ADSL72-D1 IU_ADSL72-ADL-D1IU_VDSL24IU_VDSL24PIU_VDSL48P

x Per .1p and port, if 1 : 1 mapping from queue to .1p

x supported1) Shaping per ATM-QoS applied to the result of queuing and scheduling.

Table 135 Overview of Unit’s Shaping Functions

217


Id:0900d805805e0770

10.25.4 Policing

10.25.4.1 Input/Output Rate LimitWith the hiX 5622/25/30/35 utilizes two types of rate limiters: Input Rate Limiter (IRL) and Output Rate Limiter (ORL). IRLs can be used to process traffic originating from DSL ports in upstream direction, while ORLs work in the reverse direction. There is one IRL available for each VC. Traffic can be policed using the limiter in steps.

Queue thresholds and bandwidth access control apply to the upstream direction only. The hiX 5622/25/30/35 supports rate-affecting SLA parameters CIR, PIR, CBS and MBS.

The rate limiting can be set for port or queue level by profiles.

Bandwidth profileBandwidth profiles specify the Committed Information Rate (CIR) with the Committed Burst Size (CBS) as well as an Excess Information Rate (EIR) with the corresponding Excess Burst Size (EBS).

A service frame is only subject of one bandwidth profile. For example, in the figure below there are different ingress bandwidth profiles per CoS; therefore there cannot be a band-width profile per EVC1 respectively a bandwidth profile per UNI.

The hiX 5622/25/30/35 supports three bandwidth profile service attributes:

• Ingress bandwidth profile per User Network Interface (UNI)This profile applies to all service frames at a UNI.

Figure 131 Ingress Bandwidth Profile per UNI

• Ingress bandwidth profile per EVC (Ethernet Virtual Connection)This profile applies to all service frames sent over a particular EVC.

Figure 132 Ingress Bandwidth Profile for EVC

• Ingress bandwidth profile per CoS (Class of Service)This profile applies to all service frames within an EVC identified via the customer’s IEEE 802.1p bits.

UNI

EVC1

EVC2

EVC3

Ingress Bandwidth Profile per UNI

UNI

EVC1

EVC2

EVC3

Ingress Bandwidth Profile per EVC2



218

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

Figure 133 Ingress Bandwidth Profile for CoS

Egress bandwidth profiles could be applied to the DSL ports in downstream direction towards the subscriber. The shaping function of the DSL aggregator can be used. For each of the four queues per DSL a maximum bandwidth can be configured. The bandwidth rate per queue is the same for all logical ATM ports. For example if for queue 1 for the logical ATM port 1 a maximum bandwidth of 2 Mbps is configured this value also applies for all queues number 1 of the remaining logical ATM ports. The ingress bandwidth profile is performed through the policing function of the DSL aggregator according to the possibilities of the device. The element manager offers the possibility to configure metering profiles per logical ATM port, e.g. per VCC.

10.25.4.2 Policing per DSL PortIf the traffic is policed per physical port (DSL port), each DSL port use a separate policer (not shared).

10.25.4.3 Policing per PVCIngress policing refers to policing of upstream traffic going from the DSL line towards the uplink interface. The ingress policing per PVC can be processed on IU_ADSL72-B1, IU_ADSL72-ADL-A1, IU_ADSL72-C1, IU_ADSL72-D1, IU_VDSL24/P and IU_VDSL48P.

Each bridge port can have an own policer. For policing per PVC it is necessary to con-figure the bridge ports.

10.25.4.4 Policing per CoS (.1p)Policers are configured per service class and port. On the bridge port, the policer is configured for service class “.1p”. Ingress policing refers to policing of upstream traffic going from the DSL line towards the uplink interface. The ingress policing per CoS is processed on the IU_ADSL72-C1, IU_ADSL72-D1, IU_VDSL24/P and IU_VDSL48P.

The policing assignment is based on a direct mapping of the ingress VC to the top/outer VLAN priority and bottom/inner VLAN ID. Policing is performed separately per CoS (.1p bits) for each VC and VLAN ID. It depends on the value of the top VLAN priority bits assigned to the frame. For each VLAN priority, a separate policing rate can be config-ured, including 0 kbps, which means dropping all frames of this CoS. It’s possible to disable the policing for specific VLAN priorities.

10.25.4.5 Policing of ARP, IGMP and DHCP per DSL PortFor the protection of the processor, data packet transmission rates can be limited for the protocols. For this, policer can be applied to the several protocols. All frames can be subjected to one policer.

UNI EVC1

CoS1

CoS2

CoS3

Ingress Bandwidth Profile per CoS1



219


Id:0900d805805e0770

The policers are based on a configured exception which, e.g., detects special control protocols like ARP, IGMP, or DHCP. Each exception can use its own policer (policing of ARP, DHCP, IGMP each per DSL port). IU_ADSL72-C1, IU_ADSL72-D1, IU_VDSL24/P and IU_VDSL48P provide policing per protocol.

10.25.5 ShapingTraffic shaping is only done in downstream direction. At the egress means in front of the DSL port.

The following granularity of shaping is supported: • Egress shaping per port • Egress shaping per PVC • Egress shaping per CoS service class (.1p).

10.25.5.1 Egress Shaping per CoS Service ClassEgress Shaping per service class is performed per queue by the aggregator of the inter-face unit. Each CoS value (VLAN priority) is assigned to one of the queues of a physical port in 4 queues per port mode. Each of the queues can be configured to use its own shaper, see Figure 134. Each of the shaper can be separately configured for each port by assigning a shaping profile. The assignment of frames to the queue is determined by the .1p value. On condition of an appropriate configuration (1:1 mapping of queues to .1p values), egress shaping per service class can be used.

Figure 134 Egress Shaping per Service Class (CoS)

shaper 0

Scheduling Shaping Queueing

shaper 1 shaper 2 shaper 3

220

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

10.25.5.2 Egress Shaping per Port

Figure 135 Egress Shaping per Port

All queues of a port can be configured to use the same shaper, to shape the entire traffic from all queues of a scheduler block. Because each scheduler block has its own set of shapers, shaping is only possible per scheduler block, that means per queue 0 to 3 and per queue 4 to 7.

10.25.5.3 Egress Shaping per PVCOn IU_ADSL72-D1, IU_VDSL24/P and IU_VDSL48P, shaping is done always per queue or group of queues. Shaping per PVC could be provided only for a single PVC per physical port using egress shaping per physical port. IU_ADSL72-B1 and IU_ADSL72-ADL-A1 provide shaping on ATM level per VC (CBR, rt-VBR, ntr-VBR, UBR).

10.25.6 Class of ServiceThe hiX 5622/25/30/35 supports CoS based on IEEE 802.1p. This L2 standard reserves 3 bits for QoS settings. Up to 8 priorities can be configured using these bits. These settings define the priority. The according traffic will be assigned to the different output queues supported by the switches in the L2 domain.

When inserting the S-VLAN in upstream direction, the 802.1p bits can be copied from the existing C-VLAN tag to the outer S-VLAN tag. In case of untagged traffic the p-bit information can be set to 0. In downstream direction, the .1p bit information remains unchanged.

The hiX 5622/25/30/35 supports a flexible way of setting these priority bits:

– Port based (bridge port for IU_ADSL72-C1,-D1; DSL port for IU_ADSL48-CNX)– L2 based (MAC, IEEE 802.1p, Ethertype, VLAN)– IP based (ToS/DSCP, IP DA, IP SA)– L4 based (TCP/UDP)

Scheduling

0

Shaping Queuing

1

2

3

Scheduling

4

Shaping Queuing

5

6

7

DSL Port

Scheduler Block 0

Scheduler Block 1

221


Id:0900d805805e0770

Figure 136 Traffic Classification

10.25.7 QueuingQueues are located in the interface units and in the CXU. The traffic is distributed to the different queues based on the 802.1p settings and delivered according to the scheduling mechanisms.

In upstream direction, interface units support 4 queues per board, and the CXU supports 8 queues. Like in the downstream direction, traffic is distributed based on 802.1p settings and delivered according to the scheduling.

At the network interface 8 queues can be utilized by a strict priority scheduler only.

In downstream direction the scheduler can be set to work either as a SP (strict priority) or Strict priority with WFQ. WFQ (Weighted Fair Queuing) operates on bits. The hiX 5622/25/30/35 also supports WRR (weighted round robin).

When mapping services to queues, voice should get the highest priority, and then video/multicast traffic. Regular IP data should be carried forward as best effort and some “silver” or other data traffic should be handled between voice and best effort.

10.25.8 CoS-to-DSCP MappingA set of new options used for setting the VLAN priority of the inner/C-VLAN and/or outer/S-VLAN for upstream direction (DSL towards CXU) will be configured. Table 136 shows all combinations of the VLAN priority settings which are supported:

MAC-DA(6B) MAC-SA(6B) IP Datagram

1. Physical Port Number and VC

2. Mac Address and Ether Type

3. IEEE802.1p and VLAN ID

4. IP Address

5. TCP/UDP Port Number

MAC-DA(6B) MAC-SA(6B) IP-SA(4B) FCS

MAC-SA(6B) IP Datagram FCSPrior(3B)TPID CFI VLAN ID

(12B)MAC-DA(6B)

IP-DA(4B)

MAC-DA MAC-SA Type/Length(2B) IP Datagram FCSTCP/UDP Port Number

Type/Length(2B)

Type/Length(2B)

Type/Length(2B) FCS

Priority ModeC-VLAN S-VLAN

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)

Default/predefined configuration

ToS/DSCP-to-VLAN priority mapping


C-VLAN priority -> S-VLAN priority


DSL line incoming untagged (ut)

Set new VLAN priority to default or configured value.

Set new VLAN priority based on DSCP value of IP header.

Set new VLAN priority to default or config-ured value.

(n/a) Set new VLAN priority based on DSCP value of the IP header.

Table 136 VLAN Priority Configuration Options

222

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

The configuration options are specified as priority mode within the table. These modes are applied as follows: • Priority modes (a) and (c) can realize the prioritization for untrusted ports. In these

modes, the VLAN priority of the new added C-VLAN (single tagging) and the priority of the added S-VLAN (in case of double tagging) of incoming untagged frames can be set to the default/pre-configured value(s) for the C-VLAN and for the S-VLAN priority of the bridge port. For incoming tagged frames, the VLAN priority of the received C-VLAN can be overwritten by the default/pre-configured C-VLAN priority and/or the VLAN priority of the new added S-VLAN can be set to the default/pre-con-figured value for the S-VLAN of the bridge port. The default value for CoS VLAN priority is “0”. It is also possible to keep the received C-VLAN priority of incoming tagged frames.

• Priority modes (d) refers to the trusted port mode. This mode can only be used for incoming tagged frames. When inserting the S-VLAN in upstream direction, the VLAN priority bits of the C-VLAN of the incoming single tagged frame are copied to the stacked S-VLAN priority bits.

• Priority modes (b) and (e) refers to the trusted port mode. In these modes, the VLAN priority of the new added C-VLAN (single tagging) and the priority of the added S-VLAN (for double tagging) of incoming untagged frames are set based on the Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) value of the IP header. For incoming tagged frames, the VLAN priority of the received C-VLAN is overwritten based on the DSCP value and/or the VLAN priority of the new added S-VLAN can set based on the DSCP value. The configurations applies per bridge port, too.

All configurations can separately done per bridge port and are only applicable for traffic in upstream direction. In downstream direction, the VLAN priority of the inner and outer VLAN remains unchanged.

10.25.8.1 DSCP-to-CoS MappingThe IU is able to replace the VLAN priority with a value based on the DSCP value of the IP header according to the Internet Protocol definition of RFC 791.

A DSCP-to-VLAN priority mapping scheme is used to map the 6 bit DSCP to the 3 VLAN priority bits. The mapping scheme is freely configurable for the 64 distinct code points. Different DSCP to CoS mapping schemes are configurable separately. A profile-based approach is used to define several mapping profiles, but each bridge port of an IU will be associated to the same DSCP to CoS profile. A maximum of 16 different profiles is available. The mapping profile can be assigned to each IU separately. Thus, each IU can have a separate mapping profile assigned to support different IU types (e.g. IU_ADSL72, IU_VDSL24/48, IU_SHDSL48) can use a separate profile each.

DSL line incoming tagged (t)

Keep received priority or change existing VLAN priority to default or con-figured value.

Change existing VLAN priority based on DSCP value of IP header.

Copy C-VLAN priority to S-VLAN priority

Priority ModeC-VLAN S-VLAN

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e)




C-VLAN priority -> S-VLAN priority


Table 136 VLAN Priority Configuration Options (Cont.)

223


Id:0900d805805e0770

Two profiles are pre-defined for the NE. The first profile uses a very simple straight- forward mapping scheme which is shown in Table 136. The mapping also implicitly covers the former IP precedence bits of the TOS field defined by the RFC 791.

A second mapping scheme, which is more complying to the actual definition of IANA is preconfigured as second profile. The mapping is based on definitions of RFC 2474, 2597, and 3246, where several per hop behaviors (PHB) are defined. A PHB, for example expedited forwarding (EF), is defined by a unique DSCP. Because of the fact that not all the DSCP values are specified today, the unspecified DSCPs are interpreted as the default DSCP which is 000000. Therefore, all the DSCP values DSCP which are not exclusively mentioned in Table 138 are set to the default CoS = 0.

DSCP (dec) CoS (dec)

0-7 0

8-15 1

16-23 2

24-31 3

32-39 4

40-47 5

48-55 6

56-63 7

Table 137 DSCP-to-CoS Mapping Default Configuration #1

DSCP (hex) DSCP (dec) Code point Name Ref CoS (dec)

000000 0 CS0 [RFC2474] 0

001000 8 CS1 [RFC2474] 1

001010 10 AF11 [RFC2597] 1

001100 12 AF12 [RFC2597] 1

001110 14 AF13 [RFC2597] 1

010000 16 CS2 [RFC2474] 2

010010 18 AF21 [RFC2597] 2

010100 20 AF22 [RFC2597] 2

010110 22 AF23 [RFC2597] 2

011000 24 CS3 [RFC2474] 3

011010 26 AF31 [RFC2597] 3

011100 28 AF32 [RFC2597] 3

011110 30 AF33 [RFC2597] 3

100000 32 CS4 [RFC2474] 4

100010 34 AF41 [RFC2597] 4

100100 36 AF42 [RFC2597] 4

100110 38 AF43 [RFC2597] 4

101000 40 CS5 [RFC2474] 5

Table 138 DSCP-to-CoS Mapping Default Configuration #2

224

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

10.26 Security

10.26.1 Access Control ListsAccess Control Lists are rules that can be configured in network elements to allow or deny the forwarding of specific traffic. The hiX 5622/25/30/35 supports ACLs which can be configured based on different parameters:

• Port • MAC Address (list, range) • Ethertype • IP destination and source address • L4.

10.26.2 Denial of Service (DoS) PreventionTo avoid DoS attacks and MAC spoofing the following mechanisms are implemented:

• Limiting of the number of MAC addresses per port • Storm control • Suppression of broadcast and multicast frames • Port isolation (i.e. avoids connectivity between subscriber ports)

10.26.3 IP Anti-SpoofingIP anti-spoofing is a layer 3 security function. A malicious or misconfigured user can send IP packets with a forged IP source address (IP SA) which was not provided or assigned via DHCP or static configuration to the user. As result, several host and network attacks are possible. An attacker e.g. is able to gain unauthorized access to another user or network equipment where authentication is based on the IP SA. Further-more, an attacker can cloud its real L3 identity in the course of other network attacks or can execute denial of service attacks by, e.g., TCP syn flooding where traffic is sent back from the target host(s) to the spoofed IP address.

To prevent a user from spoofing the IP source address, the IP SA of packets sent from the user to the network is verified against the IP address which was:

• statically assigned and provided to this user in case of static IP • dynamically assigned and provided to this user in case of dynamic IP (DHCP).

The existing DHCP relay software stores port identification information as well as MAC address of the host. This information is used for ARP reply agent also. With that, the bound IP address can be managed. Each entry is aged out after the lease time and the

101110 46 EF [RFC3246] 7

110000 48 CS6 [RFC2474] 6

111000 56 CS7 [RFC2474] 7

For unspecified values - - - [RFC2474] 0

DSCP (hex) DSCP (dec) Code point Name Ref CoS (dec)

Table 138 DSCP-to-CoS Mapping Default Configuration #2 (Cont.)

225


Id:0900d805805e0770

lease time is updated by each DHCP_ACK packet. But, this action is performed by DHCP relay software which sends events to the IP anti-spoofing component. The follow-ing events can be provided by the DHCP relay software: • New entry (port identification, IP address) • Delete entry (triggered by aged-out or DHCP Leave/Decline message).

10.26.4 MAC Anti-Spoofing and Uplink MAC Anti-Spoofing (UMAS)The hiX 5622/25/30/35 provides MAC anti-spoofing by preventing learning of already learnt MAC addresses of another port. MAC anti-spoofing can be enabled or disabled globally through CLI.

Uplink MAC anti-spoofing (UMAS) refers a method preventing the MAC address of a service gateway such as the BRAS or a DHCP server or relay connected to the uplink interface becoming learnt at any subscriber port.

Spoofing prevention is implemented by a static MAC entry in the FDB for the backplane interface of the IU aggregator and the CXU switch. This feature needs to be configured by the operator and isn’t enabled automatically.

Dynamic UMAS refers to achieving the same thing in a dynamic way (i.e. at runtime) - preventing the MAC addresses of such service gateways becoming learnt at any subscriber port.

10.27 Flow ControlFlow control as described in IEEE 802.3x is supported by both CXU (active and standby) and interface unit.

The DSLAM is able to handle 802.x flow control request coming from an uplink node. For that, the IP-DSLAM performs the “Receive Operation” role, as it described in IEEE 802.x, 318.3.3. The PAUSE request and all other 802.3x flow control requests are for-warded to the interface units in order to let the interface units block/forward traffic.

Note that 802.x Flow Control request only passes to the interface units on receiving 802.3x Flow Control request from the Uplink.

Unicast and multicast addressing are accepted.

10.28 Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)Spanning-Tree Protocol (STP) as defined in IEEE 802.1D is a link management protocol that provides path redundancy while preventing undesirable loops in the network. For an Ethernet network to function properly, only one active path can exist between two sta-tions. Loops occur in networks for a variety of reasons. The most common reason you find loops in networks is the result of a deliberate attempt to provide redundancy in case one link or switch fails, another link or switch can take over.

STP is a technology that allows bridges to communicate with each other to discover physical loops in the network. The protocol then specifies an algorithm that bridges can use to create a loop-free logical topology. In other words, STP creates a tree structure of loop-free leaves and branches that spans the entire Layer 2 network.

Operators might connect hiX 5622/25/30/35 to different switches to provide a full redun-dant path towards the ISP. One potential problem can be the occurrence of loops in such topologies. Loops could be generated by broadcast traffic. An example is the mecha-

226

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

nism of the Address Resolution Protocol, ARP. Users send ARP requests in L2 domains to learn the destination MAC address from a specific IP host they want to access. This request is a broadcast frame that is flooded into every interface from a specific LAN or VLAN domain. Let’s assume that the DSLAM is connected to 2 switches. It forwards the ARP request generated by the user to one switch which sends this request to all inter-faces except to the interface where the request was first received (interface connected to the DSLAM) – normal switching procedure. At some point, the other switch also con-nected to the DSLAM, might receive the same request from another interface. This request will then be flooded into all other interfaces and, consequently, reach the DSLAM. The sequence starts again and the loop has been established.

Spanning Tree Protocol, Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple Spanning Tree are mecha-nisms supported by the hiX 5622/25/30/35 which avoid such loops in the network.

Figure 137 Spanning Tree Protocol

10.29 Link AggregationLink Aggregation is an Ethernet feature that allows the grouping of multiple physical interfaces as one single logical interface. The traffic load is shared between the physical links and rerouted to the remaining links in case of failure of one or more physical links.

The link aggregation standard defines LACP protocols for the communication between both link aggregation peers. The purpose of LACP is to provide automatic configuration of aggregation groups. LACP is a state full peer-to-peer protocol. No commands are exchanged but states. LACP operates on a per-link basis and treats each link independently of any other. State information is exchanged periodically. The LACP control packets are trapped by the software according to their well known multicast destination address and processed by the Ethernet application software on the CXU.

Router/Switch

CXU-Master CXU-Slave

IP-DSLAM

InterlinkPorts 1)

Uplink UplinkPorts

STP running

Router/Switch Router/Switch

Ports

1) Only CXU_C and CXU_B1 support uplink redundancy via interlink cables.

227


Id:0900d805805e0770

Figure 138 Link Aggregation Control Protocol

LACP uses peer exchanges across links to determine, on an ongoing basis, the aggregation capability of various links, and continuously provides the maximum level of aggregation capability achievable between a given pair of systems. LACP automatically determines, configures, binds and monitors the binding of ports to aggregators within the system.

The implementation is based on IEEE 802.3ad standard and allows to aggregate up to 4 ports to one logical group.

The different modi for LACP are described in the operation manual CLI.

10.30 Ethernet Ring Protection (ERP)The ERP is a protection protocol and procedure to protect Ethernet ring topologies. ERP provides for optimal loop prevention and optimal failover performance of a ring configu-ration optimized for fast failure detection and recovery on Ethernet rings.

The ERP is implemented in Carrier Ethernet Products which are part of the metro network ring configurations.

The main characteristics of the ERP are as follows: • It requires no additional underlying protection mechanism within the ring configura-

tion, the complete functionality is implemented on the interface units of the system and does not require additional dedicated hardware which may raise network com-plexity and costs.

• It is a unique robustness functionality which runs on every network element involved in the ring configurations (SURPASS DSLAMs and SURPASS switches). It means each system is active part of the ring protection mechanism. Therefore it guarantees a maximum of 50 ms to switch over towards a new configuration after link or system failures.


InterlinkPorts 1)

UplinkIP-DSLAM

Router/Switch

PortsUplinkPorts

LACP or PortTrunking

1) Only CXU_C and CXU_B1 support uplink redundancy via interlink cables.

228

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

Figure 139 Protection Mechanism

The failure detection is done on two different methods: • Fast detection is based on the active elements which detects and reports every net-

work failure immediately towards a Master ERP system which initiates the switchover to the new ring configuration.

• Slow detection of failures occurs due to the loop back packets which are send in the ring configuration continuously. These packets are sent by the ring master within a certain time interval (e.g. 10 ms) to check the ring integrity. If a malfunction of the ring is detected a recovery procedure is started and the ring will be reconfigured like it is done with fast detection mechanism.

The picture below illustrates the protection mechanism. In the case of a failure between two network elements involved in the ring configurations, a ring reconfiguration will be done. Then the packets can be sent over the connections between the other network elements involved in the ring configurations.

In the hiX 5622/25/30/35 R2.8, up to 64 ERP domains can be provided per DSLAM.

10.31 Concentration and CascadingThe hiX 5622/25/30/35 can concentrate multiple DSLAMs in order to spare the number of FE/GE interfaces connected to the metropolitan network.

The CXU provides 4 Ethernet uplinks with optical and electrical interfaces. Any interface can be configured as a network interface, connecting the DSLAM to the metropolitan network, or as a user interfaces, aggregating DSLAMs and/or other switches towards the network. Moreover, multiple physical interfaces can be configured as one logical interface using LACP (link aggregation control protocol). These bundled interfaces can also be configured as user or network interfaces allowing the operator to flexibly assign more bandwidth towards the user/network. To aggregate collocated DSLAMs, electrical interfaces are used whereas to aggregate remote DSLAMs, optical interfaces are used.

Master ERP Switch

!Link down

!Link down

ERP: Failure Detection

ERP: Ring reconfigured

Ringreconfiguration

Ringreconfiguration

Master ERP Switch

229


Id:0900d805805e0770

The hiX 5622/25/30/35 supports star topologies, tree topologies and chain topologies. There is no fixed limitation regarding the number of DSLAMs that can be cascaded to a master IP-DSLAM. The limitation is actually the available bandwidth and the number of MAC addresses that can be learnt by the master DSLAM (16 k). Please mind that physical interfaces from different groups can’t be grouped as one logical interface.

Figure 140 Cascading with hiX 5635 (Example)

10.32 RedundancyCXU board redundancyFor an increased reliability of the hiX 5625/30/35, board redundancy for the CXU is supported. The M1200/M1100/M1100 2G/G1100/G1100 2G/M600/G600 2G/ G600R 2G/M400/G400/G400R/G400 2G/G400R 2G shelf can be optionally equipped with a set of two CXUs, one of them acting as active CXU. The second CXU remains in the standby mode until a failure condition on the active CXU triggers a redundancy switching event.

The board redundancy meets following requirements: • Redundancy switching is initiated autonomously by CXU HW in case of a watch-dog

event (SW error on the currently active CXU) • Redundancy switching is initiated autonomously if the currently active CXU is

plugged-out • Redundancy switching can be initiated by a SW command on the currently active

CXU. This can occur:– as a result of HW state monitoring or– if switchover is requested by the TMN.

CXU

CXU CXU

CXU CXU

CXU

hiX 5635

hiX 5635 hiX 5635

hiX 5635 hiX 5635

hiX 5635

Router/Switch

Router/Switch

Router/Switch

Router/Switch

Router/Switch

Router/Switch

Router/Switch

Router/Switch

230

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

Uplink interface redundancyRedundancy of the hiX 5622/25/30/35 uplink can be provided by link aggregation of Ethernet interfaces. The uplink interfaces form a link aggregation group. In case of a failure of a single link, the interface remains active, but the bandwidth is reduced by the bandwidth of the lost link.

The link aggregation based uplink protection mechanism works uniformly for shelf equipping with a single CXU so as for shelf equipping with a redundant CXU pair.

Redundancy of CXU boards can also be supported as follows:1. The uplink interfaces are shared between both CXU by use of interconnection

cables between both CXUs. The currently active CXU provides Ethernet frame switching, whereas the switch on the currently standby CXU is not in use. Therefore the uplink payload of the currently standby CXU has to be transmitted over the inter-link interface to the L2 switch on the currently active CXU. Both CXUs are connected via interlink on front plate.

Figure 141 Cross-connection for CXU Redundancy

g Only CXU_C and CXU_B1 support this uplink interface redundancy via interlink cables.

2. The uplink interfaces of both CXUs are connected with optical combiners.

231


Id:0900d805805e0770

Figure 142 Cabling diagram for CXU_C2 redundancy

g The boards CXU_C2/CXU_B2/CXU_B3/CXU_B21 support only variant 2, i.e. redundancy via optical combiners.

Power supply redundancyThe power feeding of the M1200/M1100/M1100 2G/G1100/G1100 2G/M600/G600 2G/ M400/G400/G400 2G/G200 2G/G200S 2G shelf is provided by two power supply con-nectors.

Following redundancy features are provided: • Redundant external power supply interface. A failure of the feeding line (e.g. due to

an external fuse break) does not cause a system breakdown. • Redundant power supply lines within the shelf are provided for

– feeding of the de-centralized on-board DC/DC converters– power supply of the fan unit (see below)– power supply for the serial EEPROMS on all M1200/M1100/M1100 2G/G1100/

G1100 2G/M600/G600 2G/G600R 2G/M400/G400/G400R/G400 2G/ G400R 2G/G200 2G/G200S 2G boards (inclusive backplane) containing PID data.

Fan redundancyThe M1200/M1100/M1100 2G/G1100/G1100 2G/M600/G600 2G/G600R 2G/M400/ G400/G400R/G400 2G/G400R 2G/G200 2G/G200S 2G shelf contains only one fan shelf where the fans are mounted.

Por

ts

protecting CXU: GE-Uplink

GE-Uplink

Portsworking CXU:

optical combiner (splitter):

232

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

10.33 CWDM Ring ConfigurationSURPASS hiX 5622/25/30/35 can be used in a Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing (CWDM) ring configuration.

The advantage of CWDM ring configuration is that eight IP-DSLAMs can be connected using only two optical lines (one line for each direction). This is possible by using eight CWDM-splitters with different wavelengths, see Figure 143 and Table 139.

Signals with eight different wavelengths (for every IP-DSLAM one wavelength) are led into one optical line. For every IP-DSLAM, a CWDM-splitter is necessary to filter the signal of both directions with the corresponding wavelength.

E.g., from port 2 of the CWDM-splitter the signal (Rx) is led to the optical unit of the IP-DSLAM, see Figure 143. From port 2’ of the CWDM-splitter the signal (Tx) is led to the optical unit of the IP-DSLAM.

CWDM wavelengths are selected according ITU-T G.694.2 (20-nm spacing, see Table 139) and can be used with CWDM interfaces according ITU-T G.695, for passive multichannel applications according to ITU-T G.959.1.

g Please observe CWDM-splitters with different wavelengths must be used for every IP-DSLAM. The CWDM-splitter and the SFP module must have the same wave-length, see Table 139.

Figure 143 CWDM Ring Configuration

hiX 5625/30/35 Port 2’

Port 2

hiX

562

5/30

/35

hiX 5

625/

30/3

5

Port 1

Port 3’Port 3

Port 1’

CWDM splitter

hiX

5625

/30/

35

hiX 5625/30/35hiX 5625/30/35

hiX 5625/30/35hiX 5625/30/35

Downlink Uplink Uplink Downlink

233


Id:0900d805805e0770

10.34 Port MirroringPort mirroring facilitates monitoring the incoming or outgoing traffic on a particular port (monitored port) by connecting a sniffer or protocol analyzer to a mirrored-to port, also known as copy port, see the following figure:

Figure 144 Port Mirroring

Port mirroring is supported for any port. The port being mirrored is referred as the mirrored port and the port to which is it mirrored is referred as the mirrored-to port. A port is either one of the uplink ports or a port to an IU_xDSL. For instance, if the customer wants to monitor the traffic to/from a particular IU, the traffic from/to this IU has to be mirrored to the mirrored-to port. On the CXU, one of the four uplink ports can be used as mirrored-to port in order to be able to connect a protocol analyzer or sniffer to that port. Both the received and transmitted packets on the mirrored ports can be sent to the mirrored-to ports. The type of traffic that gets mirrored is programmable.

The amount of traffic sent to the mirrored-to port can be controlled by setting up addi-tional rules, such as:– Forward ingress only: Frames coming from a specified port.– Forward egress only: Frames going out on a specified port.






-40 °C to +85 °C

Center wave-length

Clasp Color Code

1 V50017-U3447-K500 V50017-Q2247-K822 1471 nm Gray

2 V50017-U3449-K500 V50017-Q2249-K822 1491 nm Violet

3 V50017-U3451-K500 V50017-Q2251-K822 1511 nm Blue

4 V50017-U3453-K500 V50017-Q2253-K822 1531 nm Green

5 V50017-U3455-K500 V50017-Q2255-K822 1551 nm Yellow

6 V50017-U3457-K500 V50017-Q2257-K822 1571 nm Orange

7 V50017-U3459-K500 V50017-Q2259-K822 1591 nm Red

8 V50017-U3461-K500 V50017-Q2261-K822 1611 nm Brown

Table 139 SFP Modules and Splitters for CWDM Ring Configuration

uplink ports

Sniffer


Router

IU . . . .IU IU IU IU

234

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

– More advanced mirroring, based on traffic types are also available by using the Layer 2 through Layer 7 filtering mechanism.

10.35 Dual-Ended Line Test (DELT)ITU-T G.992.3 and G.992.5 present new line diagnostics procedures that enhance the ADSL service maintenance and diagnostics defined in ITU-T G.992.1. VDSL2 is defined in ITU-T G.993.2.

Dual-ended line test can be used to get an overview of the loop situation (attenuation, quiet line noise, etc.) while the measurement is being done. It can also be used if the loop conditions do not allow the achievement of data mode (showtime). In the event of the inability of a line to get into data mode, DELT is typically activated by the operator of the system to troubleshoot the problem.

There are two types of DSL line sync such as normal data mode and DELT (loop diagnostic) mode.– Normal data mode: Normal service mode between ATU-C and ATU-R– DELT mode: Dual-ended line test allows the immediate measurement of line

conditions at both ends of the line without requiring maintenance technicians to attach test equipment to the line. The resulting information helps to isolate the location (inside the premises, near the customer end of the line, or near the network end of the line) and the sources (crosstalk, radio frequency interference and bridged tap) of impairments.

The hiX 5622/25/30/35 supports integrated Dual-ended line test for VDSL2, ADSL2 and ADSL2+. This enables you to check the characteristics of the line for troubleshooting or evaluation purposes. To do a DELT the CPE at the other end of the line has to support also this feature.

DELT can only be started if the related line is in administration state “locked”, because DELT is a service interrupting test mode.

DELT has the advantage over both the narrowband test function line check and the broadband test function SELT in that it tests in both the upstream and downstream direc-tions. Table 140 lists the DELT measurements. You can get more information in the telecom-munication standards ITU-T G.992.1, G.992.3, G.992.5, G.993.2 and G.997.1. The abbreviations used in this standards are shown in brackets in Table 140.

Measurement Description

Status Initialization status: The result of the last training attempt.

Line attenuation [dB] Line attenuation (LATN): The measured difference between the total power transmitted and the total power received over all subcarriers during diagnostics and initialization.

Signal attenuation [dB] Signal attenuation (SATN): The measured difference between total power transmitted and the total power received over all subcarriers during showtime.

SNR margin [dB] SNR margin (SNRM): The signal-to-noise ratio for the line.

Table 140 DELT Measurements

235


Id:0900d805805e0770

At the SNMP interface a command can be used to retrieve the current data. This command requests the line data for one line. The channel characteristics can be stored in linear or logarithmic form. The linear representation is suitable for a numerical pro-cessing. The logarithmic representation is suitable for the graphical representation.

The EM draws the logarithmic channel characteristics and the quiet line noise together as lines in a single diagram with the subcarrier (the bins) or alternatively the frequency.

You can export the data for a single port to the FTP server using the OS workstation. This data is then available for analysis and troubleshooting.

10.36 Single-Ended Line Test (SELT)SELT is an automatic test method which allows to estimate from one end of the subscriber line (central office side) the essential transmission parameters. The ADSL\VDSL card supports single-ended line test. Table 141 lists the SELT param-eters.

Single-ended line test is an automatic test method which tests DSL loop from central office end, and it needs no equipment and technical support at subscriber end. Figure 145 describes the SELT solution structure.

Channel [dB] Channel characteristics per subcarrier, logarithmic (Hlog): This measurement shows the channel transfer function (absolute value) of the loop per subcarrier in a logarithmic representation. This function is a quantity that is related to the values of the (complex) source and load impedance.

Quiet line noise (QLN) [dBm/Hz]

This measurement shows the root mean square (effective noise level) for each subcarrier. QLN cannot be measured once the line is trained. Use this value to analyze crosstalk.

Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) [dB]

This measurement provides the actual signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) in dB for each subcarrier. This provides an indication of the maximum possible ADSL transmission rate. The maximum ADSL transmission rate is calculated by the system. The graph can be updated as the current SNR changes due to crosstalk and noise conditions in the binder.

Attain rate [kBit/s] Maximum attainable data rate (ATTNDR): The maximum data rate you can expect to achieve on the line.

Output Power [dBm] Actual aggregate transmit power (ACTATP): The total power transmitted at the U-C reference point at the moment.

Last state transmitted Transmission state: This parameter represents the last successfully transmitted initialization state in the last full initialization performed on the line.

Measurement Description

Table 140 DELT Measurements (Cont.)

236

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

Figure 145 Single-Ended Line Test

SELT process

1. Operators send test command from ACI to DSLAM via SNMP;Operator starts SELT on the ACI. Thereby the ACI sends a command to the DSLAM via SNMP.

2. SNMP agent in CXU processes the command and forwards it to SELT module in CXU;

3. SELT module in CXU forwards the command to IU;4. SELT data collector in IU collects test data and sends them to CXU;5. SELT module in CXU transmits test data to SELT server;6. SELT server converts test data to parameters and sends them to SELT module in

CXU, and sends message to ACI that test results are ready;7. SELT module in CXU transmits parameters to IU;8. ACI gets test results from SELT server and displays them to operators.

SELT measurements

Measurement Descriptions

Loop Length Loop length in feet. Optional in feet or meter. Precision: The estimation of the loop length can be in feet or meter. The estimation has the best accuracy in case of open-circuit on the subscriber end.length range and associated precision: - for 0 to 1000 ft: precision about 100 ft- for 1000 ft to 6000 ft: precision about 10% - for more than 6000 ft to 12000 ft: precision about 20% - for more than 12000 ft to 17000 ft: precision about 30%

Table 141 SELT Measurements

ACI SELT Server

DSLAM

snmp

XoMsg

Private Interfaceon TCP Socket

CXU

IU

Snmp Agentsmux

Selt Module

comd

Com Agent

SELT Data Collection

comMsg

237


Id:0900d805805e0770

Operational ScenariosThere are three major operational scenarios where SELT can be used by the operator. • Post-DSLAM installation to qualification of the subscriber line

In this scenario, no customer premise equipment (CPE) has been installed, but the physical loop has been pre-wired to the DSLAM. SELT can provide simple verifica-tion that the DSLAM port is physically connected to a physical loop and provide loading coil detection. see Table 141.

Open/Short Detection Loop Termination on the subscriber side end: You can see whether the loop is open or short circuit.detection range: - for ADSL Annex A: 12000 ft - for ADSL Annex B: 2,5 km The reliability is limited in case of larger length.

Wire Gauge Wire gauge (awg) is determined in the following range:- AWG 19/22/26 and - PE 0.4/0.5/0.63 The accuracy of the estimation is plus/minus one step.

DS Data Rate [kBit/s] estimated maximum downstream data rate of the modem This data rate depends from the set ADSL2 mode.

US Data Rate [kBit/s] estimated maximum upstream data rate of the modem This data rate depends from the set ADSL2 mode.

CrosstalkDB this parameter indicates the estimated disturber types fitting to the measured noise PSD (HDSL, T1, ADSL\VDSL Full-Rate, ISDN (T1.601) or unknown) together with the related power level.

this parameter indicates the estimated disturber types This information is calculated by comparing the PSD of some known interference types (HDSL, T1, ADSL Full-Rate, ISDN (T1.601) or unknown) with the PSD of the Quiet Line Noise (QLN) measurement. In case of different interference types, the detection is difficult or not possible.

Channel HLOGps This diagram describes the transfer function of the channel on the subscriber line (attenuation [dB] per subscriber [No.].

External Noise PSD at CO Quiet Line noise in dBm/Hz on the central office side. The following measurement range is supported for the different ADSL modes and FW versions: Annex A/M 6 to 100, if the firmware is greater or equal FW 7.17.xx 6 to 511, if the firmware is greater or equal FW 8.1f.xx Annex B:33 to 255, if the firmware is greater or equal FW 7.16.xx 33 to 511, if the firmware is greater or equal FW 8.1f.xx

Estimated SNR This diagram describes the SNR value [dB] per subcarrier which is determined from channel transmission function and QLN.

DS Bits This diagram describes the Bits [number] of the occupation per subcarrier for downstream direction. This is derives from the SNR.

US Bits This diagram describes the Bits [number] of the occupation per subcarrier for upstream direction. This is derives from the SNR.

AM and Other NB Disturbers This diagram describes as interference curve the interference power [dBm] of possible narrowband interfere (sinus interfere, AM interfere) with the appropriate frequency [kHz].

Measurement Descriptions

Table 141 SELT Measurements (Cont.)

238

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

• Pre-DSL Service ActivationNo CPE has been installed, but the physical loop has been pre-wired to the DSLAM and verified through post-DSLAM installation tests. The objective is loop pre-quali-fication (line characterization, noise measurement, etc.) for the purpose of estimating what data rate the loop is capable to support.

• Post-DSL Service ActivationA CPE is installed and satisfactory performance was previously achieved, but now a problem has arisen. Possible reasons for service disruption include disconnection of the loop, a physical break in the loop, changes in loop noise, equipment failures, etc. SELT can be used to compare the current loop topology estimate against previous saved estimates

10.37 Internal CommunicationThe communication between the active CXU and the interface units is done inband via Gigabit star. Both CXUs (active and standby) communicate via 100Base-T Ethernet interface.

The controlling of the interface units is realized via the shelf control bus; three I2C busses are used for plug-in detection of the interface units and for the interface unit type identification. The plug-in detection is realized by a polling procedure. A hardware based mechanism polls all slots. The polling cycle has a round-trip delay of 10 ms. So a safe detection of plug-in and plug-out events can be guaranteed.

The CXUs are connected to the interface units with a redundant reset star. So the active CXU can force any interface unit independently into a reset state. The used reset handling allows permanent reset of interface units.

10.38 Clock SynchronizationThe hiX 5622/25/30/35 clocking concept considers the synchronization requirements for the uplink and subscriber interfaces.

Ethernet uplink interfaces

• The Ethernet transmit clock for interfaces with distinct physical media for transmit and receive direction (e.g. optical Ethernet, 10/100Base-TX) are generated from free-running oscillators with an accuracy of 100 ppm.

• On a 1000Base-T interface link, one of the nodes operates in master clocking mode (free-running transmit clock) and the other in slave clocking mode (transmit clock is derived from receive clock). The clocking mode is allocated to the nodes by auto-negotiation during the link start-up.

xDSL subscriber interfacesThe line clock for xDSL interfaces is generated on the interface units by free-running oscillators with an accuracy of 32 ppm. For IU_SHDSL48 (-A2), the DSL ports are synchronized to a “DSLAM system clock”. This system clock can either be free-running or synchronized to an external source.

239


Id:0900d805805e0770

10.39 External Clock SynchronizationThe hiX 5622/25/30/35 can be synchronized by an external clocking interface. The output clock of clocking unit is an 8 kHz clock and is distributed to all IU cards. The clocking source is selected by ACI. This function is supported by CXU_B2, CXU_B3, CXU_B2,CXU_C2, and CXU_B3.

Following external clock synchronization is possible: • T3 input: External clock input for 2048 kHz signal according ITU-T G-703.13

(available in CXU_B1, CXU_B2, CXU_B21, CXU_B3 and CXU_C2) • Synchronous Ethernet, with EEC function according ITU-T G-862

(available in CXU_B2, CXU_B21, CXU_B3 and CXU_C2)

T3-Interface (external clocking interface) is not usable in M400/M600 Shelf in conjunc-tion with CXU_B2/C2/B21/B3.

10.40 Remote InventoryThe plug-in units and the M1200/M1100/M1100 2G/G1100/G1100 2G/M600/G600 2G/ G600R 2G/M400/G400/G400R/G400 2G/G400R 2G/G200 2G/G200S 2G shelf of hiX 5622/25/30/35 will provide remote inventory capability in order to support fast and easy service activities. The concept is based on the “Service Concept”. The active CXU can read all product identification data (PID) from the complete system inclusively its own.

Inventory export service provides the capability to export all DSLAM specific data stored in the EM database to a file.

10.41 Temperature ControllingThe M1200/M1100/M1100 2G/G1100/G1100 2G/M600/G600 2G/G600R 2G/M400/ G400/G400R/G400 2G/G400R 2G/G200 2G/G200S 2G shelf supports heat manage-ment with temperature controlled fans.

The targets of heat management are: • to guarantee a sufficient forced ventilation in all traffic situations and under all re-

quired environmental conditions. • to guarantee the desired turn-on characteristics under all required environmental

conditions, and especially an improved cold start of the system. • to minimize the background noise produced by the system. • to minimize the mechanical stress on the fans and so prolong the operational life of

the fans. • to supervise the proper operation of all fans and to generate an alarm when a fault

has been detected.

Forced ventilationForced ventilation is carried out by a fan unit which contains independent fans. All fans are mounted in a replaceable shelf.

A single fan failure does not force the complete switch off of the other fans, so forced ventilation will be reduced for the complete shelf. During replacement time, forced ven-tilation will be reduced for the complete shelf due to the missing fan shelf.

The fan shelf is mounted in M1200 shelf below the slots. The air inlet is on the underside of the shelf. The air outlet is on the top side of the shelf. The heated air can be guided

240

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

with a baffle to the front or rear side of the rack. The baffle has to be mounted above the shelf.

The CXU contains one power supply for fan feeding. The fan voltage will be led to the fans via two paths (PUB_FAN1 and PUB_FAN2). The fan supply voltage of both CXU_Bs (active and standby) will be combined with diodes. The active CXU controls both fan groups. The three fans per group are connected in parallel to the fan operating voltages (PUB_FAN1 for the first fan group and PUB_FAN2 for the second fan group). The common return path MUB_FAN grounding is connected with GND at the CXU.

The fans in the shelf are connected with the CXU with direct cabling via a connector located on the backplane of the M1200 shelf. Beside the fan operation power lines, one fan speed control signal per fan is connected to the CXUs. A mechanical failure of the fans can be detected via these lines.

The speed of the fans is controlled in accordance with the measured temperature inside the shelf. Four temperature sensors are connected to the CXU. The temperature sensors are located on the backplane, about half-way to the slots. The measured values are evaluated and the output fan voltage controlled accordingly. All fans receive the same fan voltage.

For M1100/M1100 2G/G1100/G1100 2G, the air inlet is at the bottom of the shelf. The air outlet is at the top of the shelf. The heated air can be guided to the front or rear side of the rack using a baffle mounted above the shelf.

The operating voltage for the fans is 24 V. Normally the fans are controlled by the fan control unit on the power modules PM_UPL. The fans are fed by a controlled voltage from the power modules.

For M600/M400, the fan shelf is mounted on the right side of the slots. The air inlet is on the left side of the shelf. The air outlet is on the right side of the shelf.

For G600 2G/G600R 2G/G400/G400R/G400 2G/G400R 2G/G200 2G/G200S 2G, the fan unit is equipped on the left side of the shelf in a special slot.The air inlet is on the left side of the shelf. The air outlet is on the right side of the shelf.

The CIUG contains one power supply for fan feeding. The fans in the shelf are con-nected with the CIUG via a DIN connector located on the backplane of the M600/M400 shelf. The fan voltage will be led to the fans via the DC/DC converter.

Temperature managementBeside the fan control there is additional temperature management in the shelf to prevent the system for overheating. All plug-in units have a temperature sensor. The CXU and all interface units are able to read their sensors only via their own processors. This means that necessary decisions about temperature can be made and temperature information provided to the management system even in cases of minimum system availability (one central plug-in unit).

If the temperate exceeds the upper limit, the interface units are powered down until only the processor is operational. The interface units send alarm signals to the CXU. When the temperature falls far below the upper limit again, the interface units are able to resume operations independently.

In cases where the interface units have been powered down and the temperature con-tinues to rise, the processor of the interface units is also powered down. The interface units can then only be powered up again via the CXU. This requires instructions by the operator.

241


Id:0900d805805e0770

If the CXU registers an excess temperature at its own processor, a switch-over is made to the standby CXU. If this is not possible (because the standby CXU also has an excess temperature, for example), all slots are powered down to the reset status.

10.42 Mass Software UpgradeThe S-APS download is an extension of the existing upgrade procedure controlled by the operator (upgrade one board or upgrade all boards of a particular type). The S-APS upgrade procedure is based on the “S-APS content file” (or shortly “S-APS file”) which provides a list of board types and the software version expected for this board type. On start-up of a board (single board start-up or board start-up as part of the system start- up) or after download of a new S-APS file the content of the S-APS file will be compared with the stored software version of the board which is starting up. In case of a mismatch the upgrade of the board software has to be performed. In case of redundancy switcho-ver a running upgrade will be disrupted and will NOT be resumed by the new active main board automatically.

The S-APS upgrade feature can be activated/deactivated by the operator. In case of deactivation of the S- APS download the original download behavior can be performed (download per board or per board type on operator command).

hiX 5622/25/30/35 also provides the function of mass software upgrade for all NEs in network, After assigning ftp path in SNMP-parameter of NE in ACI-E, software can be downloaded from the ftp server. When assigning ftp path to all NEs in the network, all boards of NEs can be upgraded.

10.43 Switching between Inband Management Channel and Outband InterfaceThe IP-DSLAM provides the switching functionality between the local Ethernet interface of the CXU and the Element Manager (e.g. ACI) connected to the CXU using a dedi-cated VLAN (single or double tagged) of the uplink interface.

Figure 146 Switching between Inband Management Channel and Outband Interface

10.44 Routing between Inband Management Channel and Outband InterfaceThe SMU (Supervision and Management Unit) provides an Ethernet hub serving for the connection of the LCT and other components residing in shelters. The IP-DSLAM provides the gateway functionality (IP router) between the SMU connected to the local

Device 2

Device 1

CXU

Only one VLAN is possible

PMROutbandmanagm.interface

Uplink interfacewith inbandmanagementchannel

When switching is activated, routing can not be used at the same time

One Subnet

242

System Description

Id:0900d805805e0770

Function

Ethernet interface of the CXU and the Element Manager (e.g. ACI) connected to the CXU using a dedicated VLAN (single or double tagged) of the uplink interface. In addi-tion, the CXU provides the DHCP relay agent serving for DHCP client requests of the SMU, the LCT, and additional components connected to the Ethernet hub of the SMU.

10.45 Move of Subscriber from one Port to AnotherThis feature allows that the subscriber station can be move from one port to an other without a longer outage time. It serves the following main scenarios:

• A service staff is testing a number of ports e.g. directly at the DSLAM with help of a test device by moving the device from one port to the next one.

• Re-connect an active subscriber line to another port on the same or a different IU e.g. due to re-balance the load of IUs e.g. caused by changes in the last mile or if the operator wants to record the subscriber-to-IU assignment.

Especially in the second case the subscriber sessions can be persistent in a way that the subscriber can immediately continue using the services without the need of re-establish the session, e.g. by re-start DRCP or reset the residential gateway.

243

System Description Operation and Maintenance

Id:0900d8058058af2f

11 Operation and Maintenance

11.1 Management Network Environment of hiX 5622/25/30/35The hiX 5622/25/30/35 requires a management network environment in order to properly manage the system. Figure 147 Management Network Environment (Example) illustrates an example management network environment.

Figure 147 Management Network Environment (Example)

The hiX 5622/25/30/35 can connect to the management network either directly (outband) or through the access network (inband). It can even connect using a combination of the two; for example, a cascaded hiX 5622/25/30/35 connects inband to the cascading shelf, and then from the cascading shelf to the management network through the outband interface. Through the management network, the hiX 5622/25/30/35 can connect to the following: • FTP server(s) • Management operating system

These server functions can exist on a single server host, but for larger networks, you should divide these functions among several hosts. Your network system may require additional servers to host, for example, a primary domain controller, CORBA naming service, or other network infrastructure services.

The inband management is configured via a dedicated VLAN – say VLAN ID which is assigned for the hiX 5622/25/30/35 by default. This management VLAN is terminated on the CXU. The service class for the VLAN is EF, or user_priority = 7. When installing a new network element during the basic setup if necessary the VLAN ID has to be configured accordingly via LCT.

The network operator has to ensure correct VLAN membership for all relevant NNI ports throughout the entire network. This can be done using ACI-E EM GX R2.8 or LCT.

For security reasons, the inband VLAN ID must not be assigned to UNI ports.

Operator’snetwork

(protected)

LCT with optional(T)FTP and opt.Bootp server

Operating systemcontrols the NEs via SNMP orTelnet/CLI

(T) FTP server(s)necessary forSW downloadbut might be notconnected persistent

Router

Configuration(Database)

Data(software)

Inband or separatemanagement channel

Outband

SURPASS hiX 5635

244

System Description

Id:0900d8058058af2f

Operation and Maintenance

Outband management interfaceLocal management accesses to hiX 5622/25/30/35 via the Ethernet interface.

Figure 148 Outband Management Access (Example)

The Ethernet interface is located on the CXU itself.

The Ethernet interface corresponds to IEE 802.3 with Ethernet border configuration 2. The interface is either type 10bT or 100bT, i.e. the interface is automatically compatible with both FD and HD speeds.

The Ethernet MAC address is stored on the backplane of the M1200/M1100/G1100/M600/M400/G400 shelf.

Each network element has an individual MAC address. The IP address is assigned to the network element.

11.1.1 FTP ServerThe hiX 5622/25/30/35 needs access to an FTP server.

The FTP server stores configuration information for the hiX 5622/25/30/35. It is also used to backup the database and store logs and other data uploaded from the subrack. The following information is stored on the FTP server: • Database backup

The hiX 5622/25/30/35 database is backed up to this server. • Log files

Through the management OS you can command the hiX 5622/25/30/35 to upload log files and other data to the FTP data server. This enables you to access and analyze the data.

• License fileThis feature is under development.

The FTP server is used as a repository for the hiX 5622/25/30/35 software loads. When the hiX 5622/25/30/35 identifies that it needs new software, by reading the SAPS descriptor file, it downloads the software from the FTP server.

The application program SW (APS) of a whole access network is provided on a software FTP server. On this server may be one or more APS with all required files in a software APS (S-APS) directory. On the file server can be more than one S-APS directory.

After installation and start-up, each NE and its modules is loaded with the appropriate software version.

ACI-E EM GX R2.8

10/100bT

HUB

SNMPUDPIPMACEthernet

SNMPUDPIPMACEthernet

UplinkGig

aBit

starADSL2+

CXU_B1

M1100

ADSL2+

VDSL2

SHDSL

IU_VDSL24

IU_ADSL72

IU_VDSL24

IU_SHDSL48

245


Id:0900d8058058af2f

Beside of the APS we distinguish between system APS (SAPS) which is the SW for an NE and all its components, customer APS (CAPS) as special production for a customer, and partial APS (PAPS) with software components for individual plug-in units (PIU).

11.1.2 Management Operating System ACI-E EM GX R2.8Access Integrator Ethernet (ACI-E) EM GX R2.8 is the element manager for the network elements of SHE R2.8. It enables the operators to benefit from the whole feature set supported by the products. EM GX R2.8 supports FCAPS-functionality (fault manage-ment, configuration management, accounting management, security management and performance management). Mass provisioning tables, topological maps and wide network alarm tables are further value added services that facilitates operators’ daily work. The EM GX R2.8 can also operate in standalone mode providing the complete element management system level FCAPS functional set.

The EM GX R2.8 can be integrated into any existing network management platform via SNMP or CORBA Northbound interface, providing the wide feature set offered by the element manager.

11.1.3 Configuration via Command Line Interface (CLI)It is easy for users who administer system by using Telnet or Console port to configure the functions for system operating through hiX 5622/25/30/35 based on CLI. The hiX 5622/25/30/35 is easy to configure the needed functions after looking for available commands by help menu.

11.1.4 Security ConceptThe rights of operator access to the functions of the OS can be controlled by applying user classes. A specific set of functions is assigned to each user.

11.1.5 Fault Handling and TestingATM OAM flows include fault management functionality, such as performing of loop backs and continuity check. Due to the termination of the ATM connections, ATM OAM is supported on the DSL subscriber line.

To check ATM link connectivity, OAM cell loop backs can be performed on the DSLAM.

11.1.6 Performance ManagementPerformance Management within SURPASS hiX 5622/25/30/35 covers performance monitoring and protocol monitoring on physical layer.

Performance monitoring on physical layer is supported for the whole xDSL transmission section between xTU-C and xTU-R.

246

System Description

Id:0900d8058058af2f


Performance monitoring, statistics on ATM VCC are supported for interfaces with sub-scribers. The counters of the supported statistics are as listed below: • Count of total valid cells received • Count of cells received with CLP 0 • Count of total valid cells transmitted • Count of total valid cells discarded

11.1.7 Ethernet StatisticsThe hiX 5622/25/30/35 supports Ethernet statistics counters for the Ethernet uplinks. These counters provide you with the information whether frames are transmitted and received. The table below lists the Ethernet statistics counters and shows which counters are available for receive and transmit direction.

11.1.8 Integrated Line SupervisionIn order to offer the possibility of controlling the line behavior during operation, the func-tionality of integrated line supervision has been integrated in the hiX 5622/25/30/35.

xTU-C xTU-R

Loss of framing failure (LOFS)1) × ×

Loss of signal failure (LOSS)1) × ×

Loss of link failure (LOLS)1) ×

Loss of power failure (LPRS)1) × ×

Errored Seconds (ESS)1) × ×

The count of severely errored seconds × ×

The count of unavailable errored seconds × ×

1) Interval of seconds in which each failure occurs.

Table 142 Physical Layer Performance Monitoring Parameters

Ethernet Statistics Counters Receive Transmit

EtherStatsDropEvents ×

EtherStatsOctets × ×

EtherStatsPkts × ×

EtherStatsBroadcastPkts ×

EtherStatsMulticastPkts ×

EtherStatsCRCAlignErrors ×

EtherStatsUndersizePkts ×

EtherStatsOversizePkts ×

EtherStatsFragments ×

EtherStatsJabbers ×

EtherStatsCollisions ×

Table 143 Ethernet Statistic Counters

247


Id:0900d8058058af2f

Information concerning the signal to noise ratio (SNR) in upstream direction can also be provided. In addition, information about attainable possible bit rate in upstream and downstream direction is also provided.

11.1.9 Operating States and AlarmsThe current operating states are displayed on the individual plug-in units by means of light emitting diodes (LEDs). For location of the LEDs on the individual plug-in units and the meaning of the indications, see Tables “LED Operating Status” and “Status LEDs” in different Sections.

In addition, the network elements continually report their current operating states to the OS where they can be retrieved at any time.

Every alarm report received by the OS from the NEs is indicated visually and color-coded to indicate its severity. Each alarm is also logged in an alarm list which is contin-uously updated. In addition the operator has the option of generating and exporting log files for offline analysis.

In addition to the already existing alarm list which provides all alarms currently active in the system the operator can display the alarm history in the event of “off-line operation” of the network element, i.e. in case of loss of connectivity between the IP-DSLAM and the ACI.

11.2 Maintenance ManualAccess Integrator Element Manager (ACI-E) EM GX R2.8 for Central OperationFor central operation, the Access Integrator Ethernet (ACI-E) EM GX R2.8 for SURPASS hiX 5622/25/30/35 is provided for maintenance personnel.

Indication of the Alarm ReportsAny alarms which occur are indicated on the operator PC in the following manner:

• Visually by a change of color in an alarm status window of the ACI-E EM GX R2.8 • In an alarm list

For more information about the ACI-E EM GX R2.8, refer to the relevant ACI-E docu-mentation, see Section Document Structure.

11.2.1 Directly Branching Into the Maintenance ManualFor fault clearance the tool “branch to maintenance” is integrated in the ACI-E. The fault clearance procedures are in HTML format. The HTML files are installed in the same directory as the Access Integrator.

A link will be activated by clicking an alarm type in the alarm list. The appropriate fault clearance procedure will be displayed in the browser.

Opening the Maintenance Manual via the Alarm ListThe ACI-E EM GX R2.8 offers the possibility of directly branching into the maintenance manual. If you select an alarm in the alarm list you can open the maintenance manual with the appropriate fault clearance procedure via the context menu. This then elimi-nates manual searching for the correct procedure.

Open the maintenance procedures from the “Alarm List” by the following method:

• Select an alarm in the alarm list with a click with the left mouse button.

248

System Description

Id:0900d8058058af2f


• To open a context menu, click on the selected alarm in the alarm list using the right mouse button.

• Then select the item “Maintenance Manual” in the context menu.

11.2.2 Maintenance Manual via Main Menu “Help”Open the main menu “Help”:

• Select in the context menu “Maintenance Manual” with a double click with the left mouse button.

• Navigate to the relevant functional unit and alarm type.

249

System Description Product Overview

Id:0900d805805f1ec0

12 Product Overview

Designation Product Number Dimensionsin mm

W x H x D

Weightin kg

M1200 Shelf

Chassis hiX 5635 S50028-B2012-B1 Without cables: 482 x 571.1 x 279With cables: 482 x 571.1 x max. 331

9.5

M1100 Shelves

Chassis hiX 5635 S50028-B2013-A1 Without cables: 482 x 536 x 268 With cables: 482 x 536 x max. 331

7.5

Chassis hiX 5635 S50028-B2013-B1 Without cables: 482 x 536 x 268 With cables: 482 x 536 x max. 331

7.5

M1100 2G Shelf

Chassis hiX 5635 S50028-B3113-A1 Without cables: 482 x 536 x 268 With cables: 482 x 536 x max. 331

7.5

G1100 Shelves

Chassis hiX 5635 S50028-B2102-B1 Without cables:482 x 536 x 268 With cables: 482 x 536 x max. 331

7.5

Chassis hiX 5635 S50028-B2102-C1 Without cables:482 x 536 x 268 With cables: 482 x 536 x max. 331

7.5

G1100 2G Shelf

Chassis hiX 5635 S50028-B3102-A1 Without cables:482 x 536 x 268 With cables: 482 x 536 x max. 331

7.5

M600 Shelf Chassis hiX 5630

S50028-B2030-A1 Without cables: 483 x 311 x 279 With cables: 483 x 311 x max. 331

6

250

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1ec0

Product Overview

M400 Shelf Chassis hiX 5625


4.6

G600 2G ShelfChassis hiX 5630


7.4

G600R 2G ShelfChassis hiX 5630


7.4

G400 ShelfChassis hiX 5625


G400R ShelfChassis hiX 5625




G400R 2G ShelfChassis hiX 5625




G200S 2G ShelfChassis hiX 5622


Common Interface Units

CIU_G WMCommon interface unit

S50028-Q2063-A2 25 x 390 x 235 0.45

CIU_G THSCommon interface unit

S50028-Q2063-A1 25 x 390 x 235 0.45


W x H x D

Weightin kg

251


Id:0900d805805f1ec0

CIUG-A3CIU for hiX5625 and hiX5630 with fan control for 12V fans

S50028-Q2063-A3 25 x 390 x 235

Blank panel C50117-A230-B328 25 x 410 x 12

Blank panel for PM_UPL C50117-A230-B147 27 x 327 x 20

Central Switching Units

CXU_B (for M1200)– 4 blank SFP slots or fixed 4 port GTX– combo uplink interface– 24.0 Gbps switching capacity

S50028-Q2020-B1 25 x 390 x 235 1.1

CXU_B1 (for M1100/M1100 2G/ G1100/G1100 2G)– 4 blank SFP slots or fixed 4 port GTX– combo uplink interface– 24.0 Gbps switching capacity

S50028-Q2120-A2 25 x 390 x 235 1.2

CXU_B2 (for M1100/M1100 2G/ G1100/G1100 2G)

– 4x 1 GigE uplinks– 4 slot blank SFP– 24.0 Gbps switching capacity– external synchronization

S50028-Q3120-A1 25 x 390 x 235

CXU_B3 (for M1100/M1100 2G/ G1100/G1100 2G/M600/G600 2G/ G600R 2G/M400/G400/G400R/ G400 2G/G400R 2G/G200 2G/ G200S 2G)

– 4x 1 GigE uplinks– 4 slot blank SFP– 24.0 Gbps switching capacity– external synchronization and timing

over Packet– prepared for virtual routing

S50028-Q3121-A1 25 x 390 x 235


W x H x D

Weightin kg

252

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1ec0

Product Overview

CXU_B21 (for M1100/M1100 2G/ G1100/G1100 2G/M600/G600 2G/ G600R 2G/M400/G400/G400R/ G400 2G/G400R 2G/G200 2G/ G200S 2G)

– 4x 1 GigE uplinks– 4 slot blank SFP– 24.0 Gbps switching capacity– external synchronization and timing

over packet

S50028-Q3120-B1 25 x 390 x 235

CXU_C (for M600/M400/G400/G400R/G400 2G/ G400R 2G)– 4 blank SFP slots or fixed 4 port

GTXcombo uplink interface.– 12.0 Gbps switching capacity

S50028-Q2030-A1 25 x 390 x 235 0.9

CXU_C2 (for M600/G600 2G/ G600R 2G/M400)– 4x 1 GigE uplinks– 4 slot blank SFP– 12.0 Gbps switching capacity– external synchronization

S50028-Q3130-A1 25 x 390 x 235

SFP Options

SFP GB-SX (550m) Ethernet 850nm, VCSEL, Data rate 1.25 Gbit/sMulti-mode, LC connector, -5/+70°C

V50017-U362-K500 10 x 13 x 63

SFP GB-SX (550m) Ethernet 850nm, VCSEL, Data rate 1.25 Gbit/sMulti-mode, LC connector, -40/+85°C

V50017-U365-K500 10 x 13 x 63

SFP GB-LX (10km) Ethernet 1310nm, FP, Data rate 1.25 Gbit/sMono-mode, LC connector, -5/+70°C

V50017-U363-K500 10 x 13 x 63

SFP GB-LX (10km) Ethernet 1310nm, FP, Data rate 1.25 Gbit/sMono-mode, LC connector, -40/+85°C

V50017-U361-K500 10 x 13 x 63

SFP GB-LX (20km) Ethernet1310nm, FP Data rate 1.25 Gbit/sMono-mode, LC connector, -40/+85°C

V50017-U366-K500 10 x 13 x 63

SFP GB-LX (40km) Ethernet1310nm, DFB, Data rate 1.25 Gbit/sMono-mode, LC connector, -40/+85°C

V50017-U367-K500 10 x 13 x 63


W x H x D

Weightin kg

253


Id:0900d805805f1ec0

SFP GB-ZX (80km) Ethernet1550nm, FP Data rate 1.25 Gbit/sMono-mode, LC connector, -5/+70°C

V50017-U368-K500 10 x 13 x 63

SFP GE (10km) Ethernet1310nm, DUPLEX (10 km)

V50017-U461-K500

SFP GE (20km) Ethernet1550nm, Data rate 1.25 Gbit/s-5/+70°C

V50017-U369-K500

SFP GE (80km) Ethernet1550nm, outdoor, Data rate 1.25 Gbit/sMono-mode, -40/+85°C

V50017-U469-K500

CWDM-SFP Wavelength 1471 nm, Outdoor tempera-ture range -40°C to +85°C

V50017-U3447-K500


V50017-U3449-K500


V50017-U3451-K500


V50017-U3453-K500


V50017-U3455-K500


V50017-U3457-K500


V50017-U3459-K500


V50017-U3461-K500

Interface Unit Options

ADSL48 CNX Annex A48-port ADSL2+ interface unitAnnex A (Conexant)

S50028-Q2022-B1 25 x 390 x 235 0.9


W x H x D

Weightin kg

254

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1ec0

Product Overview

IU_ADSL72-B1 Annex A72-port ADSL2+ interface unitAnnex A (Infineon)

S50010-M1498-B101 25 x 390 x 235 1.2

IU_ADSL72-B1 Annex B72-port ADSL2+ interface unitAnnex B (Infineon)

S50010-M1499-B101 25 x 390 x 235 1.2

IU_ADSL72-C1 Annex A72-port ADSL2+ interface unitAnnex A (Infineon)

S50010-M1498-C1 25 x 390 x 235 1.2

IU_ADSL72-C1 Annex B72-port ADSL2+ interface unitAnnex B (Infineon)

S50010-M1499-C1 25 x 390 x 235 1.2

IU_ADSL72-D1 Annex A72-Port ADSL2+ Service Module (Annex A) with Convergate D and Geminax-Max V2.1, optimized hybrid

S50010-M1498-D1 25 x 390 x 235 1.2

IU_ADSL72-D1 Annex B72-Port ADSL2+ Service Module (Annex A) with Convergate D and Geminax-Max V2.1, optimized hybrid

S50010-M1499-D1 25 x 390 x 235 1.2

IU_ADSL72-ADL-A1 72-port ADSL2+ interface unitAll Digital Loop (Infineon)

S50028-Q2038-A1 25 x 390 x 235

IU_ADSL72-ADL-D172-port ADSL2+ interface unitAll Digital Loop (Infineon)

S50028-Q2038-D1 25 x 390 x 235

IU_SHDSL48.bis48-port SHDSL interface unit4-wire bonding (Conexant)SHDSL.bis and wetting current support

S50028-Q2029-A1 25 x 390 x 235 1

IU_SHDSL48-A248-Port SHDSL Service Module (Infineon)Annex A/B: Standard Mode ANSI/ETSI for 2,3 MbpsAnnex F/G: Enhanced Mode ANSI/ETSI for 5.7 Mbps (enhanced bit rater)SHDSL.bis Simultaneous support of 2-wire and 4-wire

S50028-Q2029-A2 25 x 390 x 235 1


W x H x D

Weightin kg

255


Id:0900d805805f1ec0

IU_SHDSL48-A448-Port SHDSL Service Module (Infineon)Annex A/B: Standard Mode ANSI/ETSI for 2,3 MbpsAnnex F/G: Enhanced Mode ANSI/ETSI for 5.7 Mbps (enhanced bit rater)SHDSL.bis Simultaneous support of 2-wire and 4-wire8-queue-flat

S50028-Q2029-A4 25 x 390 x 235 1

IU_VDSL24-A324-Port VDSL2 Service Module (Infin-ion), "VINAX M" (up to 17MHz)

S50028-Q2028-A3 25 x 390 x 235 1

IU_VDSL24P-A124-Port VDSL2 Service Module VDSL over POTS

S50028-Q2027-A1 25 x 390 x 235 1

IU_VDSL48P-A148-Port VDSL2 Service Module VDSL over POTS

S50028-Q2066-A1 25 x 390 x 235 1

IU_VDSL48I-A248-Port VDSL2 Service Module VDSL over ISDN (Q2067)

S50028-Q2067-A2 25 x 390 x 235 1

IU_10x1G synInterface unit with optical 10 x 1-Gbps interfaces with synchronization

S50028-Q2125-A1 25 x 390 x 235 1

Splitter Shelves

Splitter chassis-1616-slot splitter chassis (vertical type)

S50028-B2040-A1 483 x 440 x 261 5.94

Splitter chassis-88-slot splitter chassis (horizontal type)

S50028-B2048-A1 483 x 222 x 261 3.29

Splitter chassis-44-slot splitter chassis (horizontal type)

S50028-B2060-A1 483 x 148 x 261

Splitter-Chassis ETSI-RMK-8Bracket for installing 8-Slot Splitter Chassis in ETSI Rack (Mounting Kit-8) Also available for hiX 5625 chassis.

C50165-A230-B143

Splitter-Chassis ETSI-RMK-16 C50165-A230-B141

Splitter Chassis-MTA-16-2417-Slot MTA Splitter Chassis.

S50028-B2046-A1


W x H x D

Weightin kg

256

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1ec0

Product Overview

Splitter Chassis-MTA-16-3617-Slot MTA Splitter Chassis.

S50028-B2056-A1 483 X 488 X 235

SPLT-BPSplitter chassis blank panel

C50117-A230-B140 25 x 435 x 12 0.12

Splitter Units

SPT-36-60036-port splitter, 600 Ohm POTS

S50028-Q2050-A1 25 x 415 x 240 1.2

SPT-36-4B3T36-port splitter, 150 OhmCombo ISDN 4B3T & ETSI POTS220 Ohm + 820 Ohm // 115nF

S50028-Q2054-A1 25 x 415 x 240 1.04

SPT-36-ETSI36-port splitterETSI POTS complex270 Ohm + 750 Ohm // 150nF

S50028-Q2055-A1 25 x 415 x 240 1.11

SPT-24-4B3T-C S50028-Q2057-A1 25 x 390 x 235

SPT-V24-ISDN-2B1Q S50028-Q6000-A1 25 x 415 x 240

SPT-V24-POTS-600 S50028-Q6001-A1 25 x 415 x 240

SPT-V24-POTS-ETSI S50028-Q6002-A1 25 x 415 x 240

SPLT-Dummy-3636-port dummy splitterSpecific configurations for ADSL2+ andSHDSL boards

S50028-Q2059-A1 25 x 415 x 240 0.47

SPT-36-60036-port splitter, 600 Ohm POTS

S50028-Q2070-A1 25 x 415 x 240

SPT-36-600-BT36-port splitter, 600 Ohm POTS16 kHz billing tone

S50028-Q2071-A1 25 x 415 x 240

SPT-36-2B1Q36-port splitter, 135 OhmISDN 2B1Q

S50028-Q2073-A1 25 x 415 x 240

SPT-36-4B3T36-port splitter, 150 OhmCombo ISDN 4B3T & ETSI POTS220 Ohm + 820 Ohm // 115nF

S50028-Q2074-A1 25 x 415 x 240

SPT-36-ETSI36-port splitterETSI POTS complex270 Ohm + 750 Ohm // 150nF

S50028-Q2075-A1 25 x 415 x 240


W x H x D

Weightin kg

257


Id:0900d805805f1ec0

SPLT-Dummy-3636-port dummy splitterSpecific configurations for ADSL2+ andSHDSL boards

S50028-Q2079-A1 25 x 415 x 240

Power Modules

PM_1 S50028-Q2104-A1 27 x 80 x 235

PM_UPL ETSI S50028-Q2107-A1 27 x 305 x 235

PM_UPL_R ETSI S50028-Q2107-A2

PM_1R ETSI S50028-Q2108-A1

PM_UPL ANSI S50028-Q2109-A1

PM_1R ANSI S50028-Q2108-A2

PM_R S50028-Q2110-A1 25 x 390 x 235

PM_R ETSI S50028-Q2110-A2 25 x 390 x 235

PM_UPL 2G ETSI S50028-Q3107-A2

PM_ONU 2G S50028-Q3150-A1

PM_1R 2G S50028-Q3108-A1

PM_R 2G ETSI S50028-Q3110-A2

Power Options

Fuse Panel 22 breaker 40A / 2 feeders2 power cables includedFor power supply redundancy

S50028-B1100-R2

Fuse Panel 61 breaker 40A / 1 feeder1 power cables included

S50028-B1100-R4

Fuse Panel 52 breaker 30A / 2 feeder.2 power cables included.For power supply redundancy

S50028-B1100-R1

Fuse Panel 71 breaker 30A / 1 feeder1 power cables included

S50028-B1100-R5

Fan Options

FAN-5635 (M1200)Fan module (horizontal)

S50028-B2003-A1 433 x 74.5 x 267 3.1


W x H x D

Weightin kg

258

System Description

Id:0900d805805f1ec0

Product Overview

FAN-5635-DF (M1200)Horizontal typeDust filter included.

S50028-B2003-A2 433 x 74.5 x 267

FAN-5635 (G1100/G1100 2G/M1100/ M1100 2G)

S50028-B2104-A1 445 x 59 x 267

FAN-5635 (M1100/M1100 2G) S50028-B2104-A2 445 x 75 x 267

FAN-5635 (M1100/M1100 2G) S50028-B2104-A3 445 x 165 x 267

FAN-5630-12V Fan module (vertical for M600)

S50028-B2038-A1 30 x 305 x 261 1.1

FAN-5630-12V Fan module reduced noise (vertical for M600)

S50028-B2038-A2 30 x 305 x 261

FAN-5630-Vertical for M600 S50028-B2037-A1 30 x 305 x 261

FAN-5625 Fan module (vertical for M400)

S50028-B2036-A1 30 x 217 x 261

FAN-5625 Fan module reduced noise (vertical for M400)

S50028-B2036-A2 30 x 217 x 261

FAN_G400 S50028-B2141-A1 72 x 186 x 258.5

FAN_G400 DF S50028-B2141-A2 72 x 186 x 258.5

FAN_G400 2G S50028-B3141-A1 72 x 186 x 258.5

FAN_G400 DF 2G S50028-B3141-A2 72 x 186 x 258.5

FAN_G600 2G S50028-B3161-A1

FAN_G600 DF 2G S50028-B3161-A2

FAN_G200 2G S50028-B3181-A1

FAN_G200 DF 2G S50028-B3181-A2

FAN_G200S 2G S50028-B3191-A1

Software Licenses

Per port in network:

Basic SW license for ADSL2+ (Annex A, B)

P50028-Q2022-L102-*-76M1

Basic SHDSL.bis SW license(ATM mode, 1 pair and 2 pair bonding)

P50028-Q2024-L102-*-76M1

Basic SW license for VDSL2 P50028-Q2028-L102-*-76M1

Application SW license for ADSL2+ P50028-Q2022-L122-*-76M1

Application SW license for SHDSL P50028-Q2024-L122-*-76M1

Application SW license for VDSL2 P50028-Q2028-L122-*-76M1


W x H x D

Weightin kg

259


Id:0900d805805f1ec0

Application SW license for advancedsynchronization

P50028-Q2072-L3-*-76M1

Application SW license for IPTV P50028-Q2074-L3-*-76M1

Application SW license for switching P50028-Q2065-L3-*-76M1

Application SW license for quality ofservice

P50028-Q2066-L3-*-76M1

Application SW license for advanced security

P50028-Q2067-L3-*-76M1

Application SW license for advanced topology

P50028-Q2068-L3-*-76M1

Application SW license for protection P50028-Q2069-L3-*-76M1

Application SW license for serviceability

P50028-Q2070-L3-*-76M1

Premium SW license for routing (all used ports)

P50028-Q2071-L3-*-76M1


W x H x D

Weightin kg

260

System Description

Id:0900d8058060ad77

Abbreviations

13 Abbreviations2B1Q Two Binary One Quaternary line code

4B3T 4 Bipolar 3 Ternary

ABR Area Border Router

AAL5 ATM Adaptation Layer type 5

AC Alternating Current

ACI Access Integrator

ACI-E ACI Ethernet

ACL Access Control List

ADMN Administration Manual

ADSL Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line

ADSL2 Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line 2

ADSL2+ Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line 2+

AGW Access Gateway

ANCP Access Node Control Protocol

ANSI American National Standards Institute

APS Application Program Software

ARP Address Resolution Protocol

AS Autonomous Systems

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

ATU ADSL Transceiver Unit

ATU-C ADSL Transceiver Unit-Central office

ATU-R ADSL Transceiver Unit-Remote

BB Broadband

BGP Border Gateway Routing Protocol

BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply

Bootp Bootstrap Protocol

BPDU Bridge Protocol Data Unit

BRAS Broadband Remote Access Server

BTM Battery Test Mode

BTV Broadcast Television

261

System Description Abbreviations

Id:0900d8058060ad77

CAN Controller Area Network

CAPS Customer APS

CBS Committed Burst Size

CE Communauté Européenne

CEBS Carrier Ethernet Border Switch

CIDR Classless Inter Domain Routing

CIF Common Interface Field

CIR Committed Information Rate

CIU Common Interface Unit

CIUG Common Interface Unit with Guarded input

CLI Command Line Interface

CLP Cell Loss Priority

CNG Comfort Noise Generation

CORBA Common Object Request Broker Architecture

CoS Class of Service

CPE Customer Premises Equipment

CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check/Code

CWDM Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing

CXU Central Switch Fabric Unit

CXU_B Central Switch Fabric Unit (for M1200)

CXU_B1 Central Switch Fabric Unit (for M1100, M1100 2G, G1100 and G1100 2G)

CXU_B2 Central Switch Fabric Unit (for M1100, M1100 2G, G1100 and G1100 2G)

CXU_B21 Central Switch Fabric Unit (for M1100, M1100 2G, G1100, G1100 2G, M600, G600 2G, G600R 2G, M400, G400, G400R, G400 2G, G400R 2G, G200 2G and G200S 2G)

CXU_B3 Central Switch Fabric Unit (for M1100, M1100 2G, G1100, G1100 2G, M600, G600 2G, G600R 2G, M400, G400, G400R, G400 2G, G400R 2G, G200 2G and G200S 2G)

CXU_C Central Switch Fabric Unit (for M600, M400, G400, G400R, G400 2G and G400R 2G)

CXU_C2 Central Switch Fabric Unit (for M600, G600 2G, G600R 2G and M400)

D Depth

DA Destination Address

DC Direct Current

DCN Data Communications Network

262

System Description

Id:0900d8058060ad77

Abbreviations

DELT Dual Ended Line Testing

DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

DIN Deutsche Industrie Norm (German Standard)

DLC Digital Loop Carrier

DNS Domain Name System

DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory

DoS Denial of Service

DSCP Differentiated Service Code Point

DSL Digital Subscriber Line

DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer

DTMF Dual Tone Multi-Frequency

E1 ETSI digital signal level 1 (2.048 Mbit/s)

EBS Excess Burst Size

ECM Enhanced Charge Mode

EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

EGP Exterior Gateway Protocol

EHT Explicit Host Tracking

EIR Excess Information Rate

E-LAN Ethernet Local Area Network

E-Line Ethernet Line

EM Element Manager

EMC Electro-Magnetic Compatibility

EN Europäische Norm (European Standard)

EoA Ethernet-over-ATM

EPROM Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory

ERP Ethernet Ring Protection

ESD Electro-Static Discharge

ETS European Telecommunication Standard (defined by ETSI)

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

EVC Ethernet Virtual Connection

FCAPS Fault, Configuration, Account, Performance and Security

FCM Float Charging Mode

263


Id:0900d8058060ad77

FCS Frame Check Sequence

FDB Filtering Data Base

FE Fast Ethernet

FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array

FTP File Transfer Protocol

FW Firmware

G1100 High density medium DSLAM G1100 Shelf Variant

G1100 2G High density medium DSLAM G1100 2G Shelf Variant

G200 2G Low density medium DSLAM G200 2G Shelf Variant

G200S 2G Low density medium DSLAM G200S 2G Shelf Variant

G400 Low density medium DSLAM G400 Shelf Variant

G400R Low density medium DSLAM G400R Shelf Variant

G400 2G Low density medium DSLAM G400 2G Shelf Variant

G400R 2G Low density medium DSLAM G400R 2G Shelf Variant

G600 2G Medium density medium DSLAM G600 2G Shelf Variant

G600R 2G Medium density medium DSLAM G600R 2G Shelf Variant

GB Gigabyte

GE Gigabit Ethernet

GND Ground

GPL General Public License

H Height

hiX Access Products in SURPASS Product Family

HTML Hypertext Markup Language

HW Hardware

I2C Inter - Integrated Circuit interface

IAD Integrated Access Device

ID Identifier

IGP Interior Gateway Protocol

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE 802 Standards for Local and Metropolitan Area Networks

IEEE 802.1 Glossary, Network Management, MAC Bridges, and Internetworking

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers

264

System Description

Id:0900d8058060ad77

Abbreviations

IETF Internet Engineering Task Force

IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol

ILTF Integrated Line Test Function

IMN Installation Manual

IP Internet Protocol

IPoA IP over ATM

IPoE IP over Ethernet

IRL Input Rate Limiter

INP Impulse Noise Protection

IS-IS Intermediate System to Intermediate System

ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network

ISP Internet Service Provider

ITU International Telecommunication Union

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union -Telecommunications standardisation sector

IU Interface Unit

IVL Independent VLAN Learning

IWF Interworking Function

L2 Layer 2

L2CP Layer 2 Control Protocol

LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol

LAN Local Area Network

LCP Link Control Protocol

LCT Local Craft Terminal

LED Light Emitting Diode

LGPL Lesser General Public License

LLC Logical Link Control

LOF Loss of Frame

LOL Loss of Link

LOS Loss of Signal

LPR Loss of Power

LSP Link-State Packet

M1100 High density medium DSLAM M1100 Shelf Variant

265


Id:0900d8058060ad77

M1100 2G High density medium DSLAM M1100 2G Shelf Variant

M1200 High density medium DSLAM M1200 Shelf Variant

M400 Low density medium DSLAM M400 Shelf Variant

M600 Medium density medium DSLAM M600 Shelf Variant

MAC Medium Access Control

MAN Metro Area Network

MEGACO Media Gateway Control protocol

MBS Maximum Burst Size

MC Multicast

MDF Main Distribution Field

MG Media Gateway

MGC Media Gateway Controller

MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol

MMF Multi Mode Fiber

MMN Maintenance Manual

MTA Metallic Test Access

NB Narrow Band

NE Network Element

NEBS Network Equipment Building System

NLRI Network Layer Reachability Information

NNI Network-to-Network Interface

NSAP Network Service Access Point

MSAN Multiservice Access Network

MSTP Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

NTR Network Timing Reference

NT Network Termination

OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance

OGL Operator Guidelines

OLT Optical Line Terminal

OMN Operation Manual

ONU Optical Network Unit

ORL Output Rate Limiter

266

System Description

Id:0900d8058060ad77

Abbreviations

OS Operating System

PAM Pulse Amplitude Modulation

PADI PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation

PADR PPPoE Active Discovery Request

PADT PPPoE Active Discovery Terminate

PAPS Partial APS

PAT Periodic Access Test

PC Personal Computer

PCM Pulse Code Modulation

PHY Physical Layer

PID Product Identification Data

PIR Peak Information Rate

PIU Plug-in Units

POTS Plain Old Telephone Service

PPP Point to Point Protocol

PPPoA PPP over ATM

PPPoE PPP over Ethernet

PSD Power Spectrum Density

PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network

PVC Permanent Virtual Connection

PVID Port VLAN ID

QoS Quality of Service

QLN Quiet line noise

RA Rate Adaptation

RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service

RAM Rate Adaptive Mode

RAS Remote Access Server

RDAC Rapid Deployment Access Cabinet

RFC Request for Comments

RFI Radio Frequency Interference

RIP Routing Information Protocol

RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree

267


Id:0900d8058060ad77

RTC Real Time Clock

RTP Real-time Transport Protocol

SA Source Address

SAPS System Application Program Software

S-APS Software - Application Program Software

SDRAM Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory

SELT Single Ended Line Testing

SFP Small Form Factor Pluggable

SHDSL Symmetrical High Bit Rate Digital Subscriber Line

SLA Service Level Agreement

SMF Single Mode Fiber

SMU Supervision and Management Unit

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SNR Signal to Noise Ratio

SOHO Small Office Home Office

SPI Stateful Packet Inspection

SPT Shortest Path Tree

SP-VLAN Service Provider - Virtual Local Area Network

STB Set Top Box

SRA Seamless Rate Adaptation Mode

STM Synchronous Transport Mode

STM-1 Synchronous Transport Module Level 1

STP Spanning Tree Protocol

SW Software

SYD System Description

TAP Test bus interface

TCP Transmission Control Protocol

TC-PAM Trellis Coded Pulse Amplitude Modulation

TDM Time Division Multiplex

TFTP Trivial FTP

TMN Telecommunication Management Network

ToS Type of Service

268

System Description

Id:0900d8058060ad77

Abbreviations

UC-PAM Ungerboeck Coded Pulse Amplitude Modulation (same as TC-PAM)

UDP User Datagram Protocol

UMN User Manual

UNI User Network Interface

USB Universal Serial Bus

VAD Voice Activity Detection

VC Virtual Channel

VCC Virtual Channel Connection

VCI Virtual Channel Identifier

VDC Volt Direct Current

VDSL Very High-Speed Digital Subscriber Line

VDSL2 Very High-Speed Digital Subscriber Line 2

VID VLAN ID

VLAN Virtual Local Area Network

VoD Video on Demand

VPI Virtual Path Identifier

VPN Virtual Private Network

VTU VDSL Transceiver Unit

VTU-C VDSL Transceiver Unit- Central office

VTU-R VDSL Transceiver Unit- Remote

W Width

WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing

WRR Weighted Round Robin

xDSL Any form of DSL

xTU-C xDSL Terminal Unit Central

xTU-R xDSL Terminal Unit Remote

syd_hix5625_30_35_r28_update5

Documents

em gx r2

pmuplpmupl

enhanced mode

hix ps 4830

average input

existing copper

critical alarm

minor alarm